Featured

What Makes AvantStay Different?

Welcome to AvantStay! We believe you deserve so much more than an ordinary short-term vacation rental experience. But what makes AvantStay different? We’re all about what you can dream. Every travel experience should be one-of-a-kind, delightful, and stress-free. We shine with our attention to detail, commitment to customer service, hotel-quality amenities, and upgrades and experiences that help ensure every stay with us is more memorable than the last. In choosing us, you’re not just choosing another short-term rental company—you’re choosing an elevated experience.

Homes Catered To Groups

AvantStay home catered to groups for vacation rental

We have homes of all types, but most of our homes are best experienced with friends and family. Large We have homes of all types, but most of our homes are best experienced with friends and family. Large dining areas, state-of-the-art kitchens, and yards great for gatherings make getting together with all your loved ones a breeze. Plus, plenty of bedrooms (many with their own bathrooms) means no one’s sleeping on the couch this time.

An Elevated Experience

AvantStay dedicated concierges on vacation rental

With luxurious upgrades and experiences available at the touch of a button, you can let your imagination run wild when it comes to trip activities. To start, our app gives you front-row access to services you would expect at a five-star hotel — in-room massages, mid-stay cleanings, and private transportation. But, when you stay with us, the sky’s the limit! From booking a private chef to prepare dinner for the family, to pre-stocking your fridge with groceries before you arrive, the AvantStay app makes it easier than ever to make your vacation dreams a reality.

Award-Winning Design

AvantStay's interior design is custom for every home

As travelers ourselves, we know how crucial the interior design of a home can be when planning the vacation of your dreams. We’ve actually built an in-house interior design team. And it’s not just any interior design team—they’ve actually won awards for it, including best design from Marriott Homes & Villas in 2021. We make sure our homes match the vibe of your trip, whether it be on the coast or in the woods, so you’re fully immersed in the magic of your vacation. 

Our homes are also decked out with amenities, so you’ll never be sitting around wondering what to do next. From cornhole to board games, from billiards to the hot tub, we believe fun comes in all shapes and sizes and is best experienced with your loved ones. The amenities for each home are different (our estates collection has some truly awe-inspiring ones), but we can promise that you will never be bored. 

Customer Service By Humans, For Humans

Firepit at AvantStay's Buena Vista property

Our dedicated area managers are here to make sure your experience is delightful. We also have team members available 24/7, so even if you need something in the middle of the night, we’re there to help. That way, you aren’t at the whim of the homeowner’s availability and you won’t get a computer trying to help you in a crisis. We want every aspect of your experience to be as relaxing as possible, because that’s why you go on vacation in the first place.

Happy Homeowners

Woman lounging at an AvantStay property

On top of the personal relationship we keep with our guests, we also take deep care and thoughtful steps to ensure our homeowners feel proud and reassured when their property is in our hands. 

We pride ourselves on:

  • Best-in-class in-field operations
  • Smart-home technology to keep our homes and guests safe
  • Complimentary updated interior design
  • A proprietary software platform that manages it all and keeps homeowners informed

We care for these homes as though they were our own (some are even employee-owned), and we continue to build and grow sustainably to build value for our homeowners. If you’re interested in partnering with us, you can learn more about our Vacation Rental Management. 

While most of our properties are homes designed for group travel as mentioned above, we also have cozier rentals and even boutique hotels, because sometimes you just want to get away without the crowd. Most importantly, we’re ever-growing to fit the needs of the modern-day traveler, meaning we’re adding new properties in new destinations all the time. 

So, where will you go next?

Top 10 San Diego Airbnbs with the Best Ocean Views

When it comes to coastal cities, San Diego and its beaches check all the boxes. Think: 70-and-sunny almost every day, endless beach access, and epic sunsets that look like they were painted just for you. But beyond the weather (hello, sunshine!), San Diego is known for world-class surfing, fresh seafood, and buzzy beach neighborhoods.

Whether you’re into riding waves, bike paths along the boardwalk, sipping cocktails with ocean views, or just watching the surfers do their thing from a balcony lounger, there’s no better place to park it for a week (or two). 

With easy access to restaurants, parks, and all the coastal adventure you can dream of, San Diego isn’t just a destination—it’s your beach state of mind. And with homes like these? You’re already halfway to golden hour bliss.

Sea Ridge

Sleeps 6 guests

Sunshine, salty air, and a pool that practically kisses the ocean—Sea Ridge brings all the “West Coast, best coast”. Perched right above the Pacific in Bird Rock, this luxe three-bedroom stunner is perfect for slow mornings, golden hour dinners, and spontaneous dips in your saltwater pool. When your backyard is the ocean, you’ve officially peaked, indeed a beach home dream come true.

Waking up to the sound of waves and sipping wine with the horizon in sight is what a coastal vacation should always feel like.

  • Direct, panoramic ocean views from the backyard, primary suite & main living areas
  • Saltwater pool, hot tub & patio with built-in grill and fire pit
  • Spa-style ensuite with soaking tub and walk-in shower
  • Located in Bird Rock, just minutes from La Jolla Village
  • Pet-friendly with driveway parking

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Beachcliff 2

Sleeps 2 guests

Watch the surf while you sip your mimosa at Beachcliff 2, your front-row seat to Pacific magic. Perfect for solo travelers or couples looking for peace, sunshine, and salty breezes, this by-the-sea villa lets you experience unfiltered, wave-crashing views right from your patio—no hiking or hustling required! With this view upon waking up, let the ocean soundtrack lull you into full relaxation mode. 

The place where time slows down and the waves put on a show as the sun goes down on the horizon.

  • Sweeping panoramic views of the Pacific from your backyard
  • Located steps from Sunset Cliffs Nature Park and 1 mile from Ocean Beach
  • Fully equipped kitchen for beach snacks & seaside meals
  • Close to OB Pier, local food spots, & epic sunset strolls
  • Quiet, peaceful unit in a laid-back coastal neighborhood

We also have other Beachcliff units! Check out Beachcliff 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Zanzibar

Sleeps 4 guests

Ocean views from the couch? Yes, please! Zanzibar is a top-floor beachfront escape in the heart of Pacific Beach, where the vibes are laid-back and the sunsets are full send. Whether you’re sipping your morning coffee from the private balcony or heading upstairs to the shared rooftop patio for golden hour with your crew, this place is made for long, sunny days and salty-air nights.

Steps from the sand and floor-to-ceiling windows that practically beg for sunset toasts. When you’re not barefoot in the sand, lounge and wonder if life really gets better than this.

  • Shared rooftop patio with grill and outdoor dining area
  • Panoramic oceanfront seating in the living room
  • Fireplace available for use
  • Full kitchen with updated appliances
  • Walkable to PB bars, cafés, and the iconic Crystal Pier

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Seascape

Sleeps 10 guests

Walls of glass, vaulted ceilings, and blue water in every direction — Seascape is what happens when architecture takes the view seriously. Sunlight pours through this Del Mar stunner all day, the beach is a short walk down the hill, and by evening everyone drifts out to the stone patio where the firepit and the Del Mar sunset do the rest. When the sky finally goes dark, there’s a movie theatre inside waiting for round two.

Golden hour here isn’t a moment, it’s the whole afternoon. Bring a group, pour something cold, and let the Pacific handle the entertainment.

  • Blue water views framed by walls of glass and soaring vaulted ceilings
  • Outdoor stone patio with firepit for Del Mar’s famous sunsets
  • Chef’s kitchen, two dry bars, and an in-home movie theatre
  • Ping pong table in the garage and EV charging available
  • Short walk to the beach, minutes from Torrey Pines State Reserve

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Ocean Blvd Apt 4

Sleeps 2 guests

Wake up to uninterrupted ocean views, roll out of bed barefoot, and be literally steps from the sand. If this sounds like your kind of getaway, then Ocean Blvd Apt 4 is the best move. Set right on the lively boardwalk of Pacific Beach, this cozy house is your ticket to sun-drenched days, salty air, and unforgettable sunsets. Sipping an iced latte from a beachside café or watching surfers catch morning waves from your window is exactly where you need to be.

Views like this are what summer dreams are made of. It’s your private beach perch in the heart of PB—ideal for lazy mornings, people-watching, and soaking up that golden hour glow.

  • Prime beachfront location on the Pacific Beach boardwalk
  • Cozy bedroom and living area
  • Full kitchen for beach snacks and casual meals
  • Walkable to bars, restaurants, and buzzing PB nightlife
  • Part of a larger complex with 10 total units (Ocean Blvd Apts 1–10)

Planning a group trip or need more space? Ask us about our other Ocean Blvd Apt units: 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 for more information!

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Mission Point 2

Sleeps 8 guests

Ocean breeze? Check. Walk-to-the-beach vibes? Double check. Mission Point 2 is your laid-back launchpad for living that classic SoCal summer of sun and surf. Lazy days feel productive, and every night ends with a cheers. Just a 5-minute stroll from Mission Beach, this upper-level unit brings you closer to shoreline sunsets and morning boardwalk coffee runs, all while giving your group a chill space to unwind.

Located near the beach with a peekaboo coastal glimpse and the kind of balcony breeze that pairs perfectly with happy hour.

  • Private balcony with grill and outdoor seating
  • Fully equipped kitchen with modern appliances and an island
  • Open-concept living and dining area
  • Pet friendly with an additional fee
  • Just a short walk to Mission Beach and Belmont Park

Coming with your extended family or friends? Check out Mission Point 1! You may rent these 2 houses together, too, through a buyout for extra fun!

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Cove Watch

Sleeps 7 guests

Watch the waves roll in as Cove Watch isn’t just an ocean view—it’s an ocean wow, just above La Jolla’s postcard-worthy coastline. This home wraps you in sweeping vistas from the moment you arrive. Sip your summer soda on the terrace or settle into the couch by the picture window, the Pacific is always front and center—crashing, shimmering, and completely stealing the show. Indeed, your go-to for golden hour hangouts or post-beach lounging.

Every room gives you a front-row seat to La Jolla’s rugged coastline, and the terrace? It’s the spot for sunset stunners.

  • Panoramic ocean views from the terrace
  • Private pool, courtyard, and fire pit for lounging
  • Stunning workspace desk with big windows
  • Outdoor dining chairs and a BBQ grill
  • 4-minute drive to La Jolla Shores Beach and restaurants

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Avalon I

Sleeps 6 guests

Looking for an ocean breeze and skyline tease? Avalon I brings laid-back San Diego charm with a view. This top-floor stunner is located just above the city buzz, giving you open skies, peek-a-boo coastal glimpses, and golden-hour light that makes everything glow. The open layout of this property is made for easy hangs with your favorite people as you cook, sip, or chill without missing a moment.

Get just enough coastal sparkle to pair with your classic croissant, sunset cola drinks, or lazy-day lounging.

  • Peek-a-boo ocean views and city skyline from the balcony
  • Featured on the Emmy-winning show Staycation!
  • Fully equipped kitchen with modern appliances
  • Designated parking space
  • Prime location near Balboa Park, Little Italy, and San Diego Zoo

Wanna bring the crew? We’ve got Avalon II, Avalon III, and Avalon IV available too—rent one, or take over the whole building!

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Bay View I

Sleeps 12 guests

Let’s talk front-row living. Bay View I drops you right on the edge of the water—no need to crane your neck for a view here. From your sunny kitchen to your private patio, it’s all waterfront, all the time! You can start as early as having a walk along the bay, grabbing tacos nearby, and wrapping the day with a glass of wine while the water turns gold at sunset. It’s the kind of place where flip-flops count as formalwear and the soundtrack is seagulls and sailboats.

You’re not just because you’re near the bay—you’re on it! Floor-to-ceiling views, peaceful mornings, and Insta-worthy sunsets every night.

  • Directly on the bay with unobstructed water views
  • Private balcony with front-row sunset seats over Mission Bay
  • Close to Pacific Beach, Crystal Pier, and local hotspots
  • Dedicated compact parking spot
  • Perfect for couples, small families, or a laid-back solo escape

Want even more ways to bring the crew to the beach? Bay View I is just part of a trio! If you’re planning a group trip and want to stay close, but not too close, then book Bay View II & Bay View III together for added fun on your group-friendly setup! 

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

Maven

Sleeps 15 guests

For a chill yet luxurious experience with a side of ocean breeze, Maven is your West Coast muse. This sleek SoCal home lets you take in stunning Pacific views right from the second-story balcony of Ocean Beach, where mornings start with not just a stunning sunrise but also beach waves. A hammock nap under the palms by the afternoon and by golden hour, you’ll be clinking glasses with your loved ones under fairy lights in your private backyard.

From the upstairs balcony to the breezy yard at the back, this one nails that toes-in-the-sand energy with just the right splash.

  • Ocean, sunrise, and sunset views from the second-floor balcony
  • Private backyard with a hammock and cornhole game
  • Patio with outdoor dining setup and BBQ grill
  • A chic chef’s kitchen with lots of storage!
  • Steps from Ocean Beach Tide Pools, cafes & sunset spots

👉 Book on Airbnb | Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price!)

San Diego Ocean Views Are Worth Waking Up Early For

Sure, any beach trip is a good one—but what sets these San Diego Airbnbs apart is the ocean view. Not just a view, but the kind that makes your morning coffee taste better, your sunset photos look like postcards, and your whole vacation feel just a little bit more magical.

From La Jolla’s cliffside drama to Pacific Beach’s buzzing boardwalk, these homes give you front-row seats to the Pacific without even changing out of your pajamas. Whether you’re watching dolphins from your balcony, grilling with friends as the sky turns pink, or falling asleep to the sound of waves, these stays are all about bringing the outdoors in—and making every beach day feel endless.

If you’re looking for activities after waking up early in this dreamy place, check out our guide on the best things to do in San Diego.

The Only Thing Missing? You.

Pack your beach towel, leave your worries behind, and let San Diego show you why coastal living never goes out of style. Explore all of our San Diego stays and book your oceanfront escape today! 

How Much Can Professional Interior Design Boost Your Airbnb Revenue in 2026?

A beautifully staged Airbnb doesn’t just photograph well. It performs better in search, commands higher nightly rates, and converts more browsers into bookings. In a marketplace where guests scroll through dozens of listings in minutes, professional airbnb interior design can be the difference between blending in and standing out.

But how much does design actually impact revenue? From higher occupancy and premium pricing to stronger reviews and repeat stays, strategic upgrades can materially shift your property’s earning potential. In this post, we break down how professional interior design influences Airbnb performance and what kind of return hosts can realistically expect.

TLDR:

  • Professional design lifts ADR by 10-25%, with top performers seeing 40-60% gains in competitive markets.
  • Properties with quality photography after design work see 10-20% revenue increases immediately.
  • A 1-point review score increase lets you raise prices 11.2% without losing bookings.
  • Design investments typically pay back within 6-12 months through higher rates and occupancy.
  • AvantStay’s in-house design team manages 2,300+ properties with award-winning staging that maximizes ADR.
Screenshot 2026-02-17 205023.png

The Real ROI of Professional Interior Design for Airbnb Revenue

Professional interior design delivers measurable returns for your rental property. Property owners who invest in strategic design refreshes typically see ADR increases between 10-25%, with high-performing properties in competitive markets pushing gains to 40-60%. A property earning $200 per night can jump to $250-$320 after a thoughtful redesign.

The revenue impact extends beyond nightly rates. Professional-quality imagery paired with strong design can lift bookings by 24% and total revenue by 40%. When your listing photos showcase a cohesive, well-appointed space, potential guests convert at higher rates because they can visualize their stay before booking.

For a property generating $75,000 annually, a 40% revenue increase translates to an extra $30,000 per year. That kind of lift typically pays back design investment within 6-12 months.

Property Performance Tier

Baseline Annual Revenue

Typical ADR Increase

Revenue Lift Range

Additional Annual Income

Investment Payback Period

Standard Market Property

$50,000

10-15%

10-20%

$5,000 – $10,000

12-16 months

Mid-Tier Market Property

$75,000

15-25%

24-40%

$18,000 – $30,000

8-12 months

Competitive Market Property

$100,000

20-30%

30-45%

$30,000 – $45,000

6-10 months

High-Demand Market Property

$150,000

25-40%

35-50%

$52,500 – $75,000

6-8 months

Premium Destination Property

$200,000

40-60%

45-60%

$90,000 – $120,000

4-6 months

How Interior Design Quality Directly Impacts Nightly Rates

Design quality sets your nightly rate ceiling. Guests pay 20-40% more for properties that deliver a boutique hotel experience versus generic rentals with standard furnishings. The difference comes down to how your space makes potential bookers feel when they view your listing photos.

Premium design creates perceived value that supports higher pricing. Thoughtful color palettes, curated artwork, and intentional furniture placement signal to guests they’re booking something special rather than comparing your rates to budget options nearby. They mentally place your property alongside boutique hotels at $300-500 per night.

This pricing power sustains strong occupancy because superior design attracts guests who prioritize experience and book further ahead for milestone celebrations, corporate retreats, or memorable getaways where the space matters.

The Link Between Design and Booking Conversion Rates

Design quality determines whether a searcher becomes a booker. That first photo of a striking living room or outdoor space creates the scroll-stop moment that separates your property from competitors.

Strong visual storytelling keeps visitors engaged longer and reduces bounce rates. Guests who explore multiple photos of a well-designed space convert at higher rates because they can picture their stay.

Abandoned inquiries drop when design tells a clear story. Inconsistent styling raises quality concerns that kill bookings. Properties that photograph well see faster booking decisions because guests feel confident, spend less time comparison shopping, and have clear expectations from the start.

Professional Photography as the Bridge Between Design and Revenue

Your design investment means nothing until professional photography translates it into bookings. Spaces with upgraded photography after completing design work see 10-20% performance increases. For a property generating $50,000 annually, that delivers $5,000 to $10,000 in added revenue without changing anything physical. At $100,000 in revenue, quality documentation adds $10,000 to $20,000.

Guests scan hundreds of listings in minutes, giving each photo three seconds of attention. Poor lighting, awkward angles, or amateur composition waste the budget you spent creating an exceptional space. Properties joining our portfolio often feature quality furnishings shot poorly, creating a disconnect where the space looks better in person than online. This gap suppresses both occupancy and rates.

Design Elements That Drive the Highest Revenue Gains

Living rooms deliver the strongest return because they appear first in photo galleries and shape expectations for your entire listing. Guests booking group stays make decisions based on gathering spaces, making oversized sectionals, statement lighting, and conversation-friendly layouts worth the investment.

Primary bedrooms influence bookings for properties targeting couples or multi-generational families. Hotel-quality bedding, blackout window treatments, and spa-inspired en-suite bathrooms justify higher nightly rates and help you compete with luxury hotels.

Outdoor living areas generate outsized revenue in destination markets. Fire pits, dining spaces, pool areas, and lounge seating create photo opportunities that drive social sharing. Properties with exceptional outdoor design can command higher rates than comparable homes without outdoor investment, particularly where weather supports year-round use.

The Cornell Study Connection: Design, Reviews, and Pricing Power

Cornell’s Center for Hospitality Research found that a 1-point increase in online review scores lets properties raise prices by 11.2% without losing bookings. For rental owners, this creates a direct path: better design produces better guest experiences, which generate higher ratings, which unlock pricing elasticity your competitors can’t access.

Review scores function as pricing permission slips. A property averaging 4.7 stars that climbs to 4.9 stars can increase rates from $200 to $222 per night while maintaining occupancy. Over 200 annual bookings, that ratings improvement adds $4,400 in revenue without changing your calendar.

Design drives this cycle because guests review what they see and experience. Spaces that exceed expectations generate enthusiastic reviews mentioning specific details: the kitchen layout, bedroom comfort, or outdoor setup. Those specifics convince future bookers to pay your asking rate.

Why Traditional Vacation Rentals Underperform Without Professional Design

Traditional vacation rentals face a professionalization problem. Guests booking in 2026 have spent years staying in properties managed by hospitality-first operators, creating expectations that owner-occupied furniture and personal decor can’t meet. Your rental competes against properties with dedicated design budgets and professional staging, making amateur aesthetics a revenue liability.

Search algorithms on Airbnb and Vrbo prioritize listings with high engagement metrics: click-through rates, time spent viewing photos, and booking conversion. Amateur design produces weaker photos that guests scroll past, pushing your listing down in search results regardless of your pricing or calendar availability. Lower visibility means fewer bookings even if your property offers good value.

Market saturation makes design quality the tiebreaker. Most markets added inventory over the past three years, giving guests more options at every price point. Properties without professional staging blend into search results, forcing owners to compete on price alone or partner with professional management.

How AvantStay’s Award-Winning Design Approach Maximizes Property Performance

We built our in-house design team to solve the challenge property owners face: capturing design-driven revenue gains without managing contractors, procurement, or staging logistics. Our designers handle the complete transformation process, from concept to installation, turning your property into a bookable destination that commands higher rates.

Our approach centers on experiential spaces that guests photograph and share. We create moments: fire pit lounges, chef-ready kitchens, game rooms with foosball and pickleball courts, and outdoor amenities for guests. These features justify rate premiums and generate the visual content that stops scrollers mid-search.

Across 2,300+ properties, we’ve refined what works. Our designs consistently lift both ADR and occupancy because we’re optimizing for booking conversion, not personal taste. Every furniture placement, lighting choice, and color palette serves one goal: making your property the one guests choose and remember.

Screenshot 2026-02-17 204328.png

Final Thoughts on Creating Rental Spaces That Command Premium Rates

Your property’s earning potential depends on whether guests see it as special or generic when they’re scrolling through options. Investing in how to design luxury rental spaces pays off because it gives you pricing power that survives market downturns and seasonal slowdowns.

We help property owners execute these transformations through our vacation rental management services without the typical headaches of coordinating contractors and staging. The properties that win bookings in competitive markets are the ones where every photo tells guests they’re getting an experience, not just a place to sleep.

FAQ

How quickly can professional design investment pay for itself in rental revenue?

Most design investments recover costs within 6-16 months when you factor in ADR increases of 15-25% and occupancy improvements of 8-12%. A property earning $80,000 annually that gains $18,400 in new revenue from design upgrades will recoup a $25,000 investment in about 16 months.

What room improvements deliver the highest revenue returns?

Living rooms generate the strongest returns because they appear first in your listing gallery and influence booking decisions for group stays. Primary bedrooms with hotel-quality finishes justify higher rates for couple-focused properties, while outdoor living spaces can command 15-30% rate premiums in destination markets with year-round favorable weather.

Why do well-designed properties maintain higher occupancy during slow seasons?

Properties with professional staging see 8-12% higher year-round occupancy because thoughtful design attracts bookings when guests have more options and scrutinize quality more carefully. Your shoulder-season months become revenue opportunities instead of vacancy gaps, and better photos push your listing higher in search algorithms.

How does design quality affect my property’s search ranking on Airbnb and Vrbo?

Platform algorithms prioritize listings with high engagement metrics like click-through rates and time spent viewing photos. Professional design produces striking imagery that keeps visitors engaged longer and converts at higher rates, pushing your property higher in search results regardless of pricing or calendar availability.

Can design improvements help me raise rates without losing bookings?

Yes—better design creates pricing power through improved guest experiences and review scores. Research shows a 1-point increase in ratings lets you raise prices by 11.2% without occupancy loss, and guests willingly pay 20-40% more for properties delivering boutique hotel experiences versus generic rentals with standard furnishings.

2026 Owner’s Guide: Selling Your Vacation Rental as Real Estate vs Turnkey Business

As a vacation rental property owner, you’ve built more than just real estate—you’ve created a revenue-generating business. When it’s time to sell your vacation rental, you face a critical decision: sell the property as bare real estate and let buyers build their own operations, or package everything as a turnkey business and command a premium. The math isn’t always obvious. Sometimes selling as straight real estate nets more by avoiding preparation costs. Other times, a properly documented operation can add 25% to your sale price. Your market dynamics, property performance, and buyer pool determine which strategy maximizes your return.

TLDR:

  • Turnkey vacation rentals command 15-25% premiums over real estate-only sales by packaging proven operations and immediate cash flow.
  • You need two years of financial records, booking calendars, and documented vendor relationships to justify turnkey pricing.
  • Properties with declining occupancy or regulatory uncertainty sell better as real estate without operational data in negotiations.
  • Tax treatment differs significantly: turnkey sales trigger depreciation recapture on furnishings while real estate allows 1031 exchanges.
  • AvantStay-managed properties transfer with verified revenue data, Marriott Bonvoy distribution access, and systems optimizing 2,300+ properties.

What It Means to Sell Your Vacation Rental as Real Estate vs. a Turnkey Business

When you sell your property as real estate, you’re transferring title to the physical asset. The buyer gets the structure, land, and permanent fixtures. They build the business themselves.

Selling as a turnkey business packages the property with operational infrastructure: furnishings, linens, kitchen equipment, guest management systems, active booking calendars, and documented revenue history. The buyer inherits a functioning income stream immediately with established house rules already in place.

One requires the buyer to build a business. The other delivers an existing operation with proven performance data and cash flow.

The Financial Premium of Turnkey Sales

The dollar difference between selling as real estate versus turnkey can be substantial if you structure the deal correctly.

Turnkey properties typically command 15-25% premiums over comparable unfurnished homes. On a $1.5 million property, that’s $225,000 to $375,000 in additional value, reflecting what buyers will pay for immediate cash flow without furnishing and launching operations from scratch.

The premium isn’t automatic. Buyers evaluate whether your documentation justifies the price through audited financials, consistent occupancy records, and forward-booking calendars. Calculate whether the premium covers your preparation investment to find the sweet spot.

Who Buys Turnkey Vacation Rentals vs. Real Estate Only

Turnkey buyers are investors seeking passive income streams who lack the time or expertise to furnish, photograph, and launch operations themselves. Many manage remote portfolios and need properties generating cash from day one.

Real estate buyers include primary residence seekers, developers planning renovations, or investor-operators who prefer building their own systems. They view existing furnishings and operations as irrelevant to their goals.

Your buyer pool shapes pricing strategy. Turnkey buyers pay premiums based on revenue multiples, while real estate buyers negotiate around comparable sales and property condition.

Market Conditions That Favor Turnkey Sales

Rising investor appetite creates favorable conditions for turnkey sales. Projections show that short-term rentals in the U.S. will see nearly 8 million more users added within the next five years, while demand growth continues outpacing supply at 7.0% versus 4.7% year-over-year.

This supply-demand imbalance makes properties with proven performance especially valuable. Investors competing for limited inventory pay premiums to avoid construction and operational delays.

Turnkey sales work best when interest rates favor investor purchases, your market shows strong forward bookings, and comparable properties trade at revenue multiples exceeding typical real estate valuations.

Documentation Requirements for Selling as a Turnkey Operation

Buyers purchasing turnkey rental properties expect detailed records proving the business performs as advertised. Financial statements covering at least two years of operations establish baseline revenue and expense patterns, while monthly profit and loss statements reveal seasonal trends and operating margins.

Occupancy data validates your property’s market position. Include booking calendars showing confirmed reservations, average daily rates by season, and occupancy percentages that demonstrate consistent performance throughout the year.

Property management agreements, vendor contracts, and service provider relationships form part of the operational package. Document your cleaning arrangements, maintenance providers, and specialized vendor relationships that keep operations running. Include login credentials for listing channels, property management software, and guest communication systems.

Screenshot 2026-02-02 204521.png

Tax Implications of Each Sales Approach

Selling as real estate triggers standard capital gains tax on appreciation. Properties held over a year qualify for long-term rates, and you may defer gains through a 1031 exchange by reinvesting in similar real estate.

Turnkey sales add complexity. The IRS treats furnishings, equipment, and fixtures separately from underlying property. Depreciation recapture on these items counts as ordinary income at higher rates than capital gains.

Your allocation between real estate and business components affects taxes, making revenue management expertise valuable during the sale process. Buyers prefer assigning more value to depreciable assets for faster write-offs. Your goal is maximizing capital gains treatment on the real estate portion.

1031 exchanges grow more complex with turnkey sales since only real estate qualifies for deferral. Business components create immediate taxable events.

The Role of Professional Management in Turnkey Value

Properties with established management infrastructure sell faster and at higher prices because buyers inherit systems that already work. When you transfer active vendor relationships, trained cleaning crews, maintenance protocols, and guest communication workflows, the new owner sidesteps the three-to-six-month learning curve that erodes cash flow.

Professional management creates documented operational consistency. Buyers review your standard operating procedures, vendor contracts, and performance metrics to assess whether the business will maintain revenue after ownership transfer. Properties with professional vacation rental management often command stronger valuations because buyers trust the systems.

Management companies that stay with the property through ownership transfer preserve booking continuity and guest relationships, protecting forward revenue and preventing operational gaps.

Active Bookings and Revenue Continuity During Sale

Forward bookings demonstrate revenue potential to buyers but create liability if you can’t deliver after closing. Your sale contract must clarify who handles existing reservations during ownership transition.

Most turnkey transactions include assignment clauses transferring all bookings, deposits, and guest obligations to the buyer at closing. You hand over reservation calendars, prepaid amounts, and communication history for each guest.

The cleanest approach splits responsibility at closing. You fulfill all stays with check-in dates before ownership transfer. The buyer inherits bookings with arrival dates after closing, receiving corresponding deposits and guest contact information.

Cost-Benefit Analysis: Preparation Investment vs. Sale Premium

The math determines whether turnkey preparation makes financial sense. If your property needs $50,000 in furnishings and documentation but turnkey premiums in your market average 15% on a $800,000 property, you gain $120,000 for $50,000 invested.

Properties already furnished with quality pieces, documented operations, and strong revenue history require minimal additional investment. The premium becomes nearly pure profit.

Properties needing complete furnishing packages, system buildouts, and performance track records may not justify preparation costs. If your market shows weak turnkey demand or your property needs six months establishing booking history, selling as real estate eliminates preparation expenses.

When Selling as Real Estate Makes More Strategic Sense

Properties with declining occupancy rates or shrinking margins lose turnkey appeal since buyers won’t pay premiums for struggling operations, making your choice of management partner critical to maintaining value. If your booking trends show downward trajectories, presenting as real estate removes underperforming data from negotiations.

Scenario

Sell as Turnkey Business

Sell as Real Estate Only

Strong occupancy with 2+ years of documented revenue growth

Best option – command 15-25% premium with proven performance data and forward bookings

Leaves money on table by not monetizing established operations and cash flow history

Declining bookings or shrinking profit margins

Poor choice – underperforming data weakens negotiations and reduces buyer confidence

Best option – removes negative operational data from buyer evaluation

Property needs $50K+ in furnishings and system setup

Only worthwhile if market premium exceeds preparation investment by significant margin

Best option – avoid preparation costs and sell based on property attributes alone

Market facing regulatory uncertainty or pending STR restrictions

Poor choice – operational value becomes questionable when future rental viability is uncertain

Best option – attracts buyers planning long-term rentals or primary residence use

Professionally managed property with AvantStay infrastructure

Best option – verified revenue data, Marriott Bonvoy access, and established systems justify premium pricing

Underutilizes documented performance and distribution advantages built into the operation

Outdated furnishings requiring complete refresh

Poor choice – buyers discount asking price by replacement costs, negating turnkey premium

Best option – let buyer implement their own design vision without paying for outdated assets

Marketing Strategies for Each Sales Approach

Marketing your vacation rental property requires different strategies depending on your approach. Turnkey listings belong on investor-focused channels where buyers evaluate cap rates and cash-on-cash returns. Think vacation rental brokerages, investment property platforms, and 1031 exchange networks.

Real estate sales perform better through traditional MLS listings that attract primary residence buyers and developers. Your photos should highlight location, architectural features, and neighborhood amenities.

Turnkey messaging leads with financial data: annual gross revenue, occupancy percentages, expense ratios, and net operating income. Real estate marketing focuses on property attributes such as lot size, finishes, views, and renovation potential while letting buyers build their own financial models.

How AvantStay’s Infrastructure Maximizes Turnkey Sale Value

Properties managed through our infrastructure come to market with advantages that command premium valuations. Our Lighthouse portal provides buyers complete documentation: verified revenue data, occupancy trends, and operational costs across every property in our $5 billion portfolio.

The Marriott Bonvoy partnership delivers tangible value buyers recognize. Access to 140 million members creates distribution most independent operators can’t replicate, justifying higher asking prices.

Our award-winning design work and proprietary revenue management algorithms become part of the sale package. Buyers inherit systems already optimizing pricing across 2,300+ properties, removing the trial-and-error phase that costs money and bookings.

Screenshot 2026-02-02 204552.png

Final Thoughts on Your Vacation Rental Exit Strategy

The math behind selling vacation rental property as turnkey versus real estate changes based on your documentation, furnishings, and local market conditions. Properties with established operations and proven cash flow attract investor premiums, while those needing significant preparation or facing operational challenges often perform better as straightforward real estate sales. Your property’s specific circumstances will show you which path maximizes value.

FAQ

How much more can I expect to sell my vacation rental for as a turnkey business?

Turnkey vacation rentals typically command 15-25% premiums over comparable unfurnished properties, translating to $225,000 to $375,000 additional value on a $1.5 million property when you have solid documentation, consistent occupancy records, and forward bookings.

What documentation do buyers need to see for a turnkey sale?

Buyers expect at least two years of financial statements, monthly profit and loss reports showing seasonal trends, booking calendars with confirmed reservations, occupancy percentages, property management agreements, vendor contracts, and login credentials for all listing channels and software systems.

When should I sell my vacation rental as real estate instead of turnkey?

Sell as real estate if your property shows declining occupancy rates, faces regulatory uncertainty or pending restrictions, has outdated furnishings requiring replacement, or needs significant investment to establish performance history that won’t justify the turnkey premium in your market.

How do active bookings transfer to the buyer at closing?

Most turnkey transactions include assignment clauses that transfer all forward bookings, deposits, and guest obligations to the buyer at closing—you fulfill reservations with check-in dates before ownership transfer while the buyer inherits bookings arriving after closing with corresponding prepaid amounts and guest information.

Can I still do a 1031 exchange when selling my vacation rental as turnkey?

Yes, but it’s more complex since only the real estate portion qualifies for tax deferral under 1031 exchanges, while furnishings, equipment, and fixtures are treated as business components that create immediate taxable events subject to depreciation recapture at ordinary income rates.

AvantStay vs Inspirato: Which Model Maximizes Your Luxury Rental Returns in 2026?

The travel club vs direct booking decision matters more than most property owners realize when they first start researching Inspirato. You’ll see them described as a luxury vacation service, which sounds similar to property management until you dig into how they actually operate. Inspirato leases properties from owners at predetermined rates, restricts those homes to members paying thousands annually, and profits from the spread between your fixed payment and what their subscribers spend. If you want to capture real market demand instead of fixed lease income, you need to see exactly how these business models affect your bottom line.

TLDR:

  • Inspirato is a travel club for vacationers, not a property management solution for owners.
  • AvantStay maximizes your property revenue through dynamic pricing across 50+ booking channels.
  • Properties using data-driven pricing earn 10.7% more RevPAR than fixed-rate approaches.
  • You get real-time transparency via Lighthouse portal showing all revenue, expenses, and bookings.
  • AvantStay manages 2,300+ luxury properties with tech-enabled operations and Marriott Bonvoy access.
Screenshot 2026-02-09 145009.png

What is Inspirato?

Inspirato operates as a members-only luxury travel club serving affluent vacationers, not property owners or managers. The service charges subscribers a monthly membership fee (ranging from around $600 to over $2,000 depending on the tier) plus nightly rates for stays at their curated collection of vacation homes, hotels, and resorts.

Think of Inspirato as the travel equivalent of a country club. Members pay for access to a portfolio of vetted properties and experiences rather than owning or managing real estate themselves. The company sources inventory through partnerships with property managers and hotels, offering these accommodations to their subscriber base.

For property owners considering how Inspirato compares to management services, the distinction is clear: Inspirato is a demand-side travel product for consumers, not a supply-side solution for property management, revenue optimization, or real estate services.

What is AvantStay?

We built AvantStay to solve a different problem entirely. Instead of serving travelers looking for vacation stays, we manage luxury vacation rental properties on behalf of owners who want to maximize their investment returns without the operational headaches.

Our full-service management approach covers everything from guest acquisition and booking management to housekeeping, maintenance, and 24/7 support. Property owners hand us the keys, and we handle the rest. We list your property across multiple booking channels, including our direct booking site and our partnership with Homes & Villas by Marriott Bonvoy, which gives you access to over 160 million potential guests.

Revenue optimization sits at the core of what we do. Our proprietary pricing algorithm analyzes thousands of data points including local events, seasonal demand, and market conditions to adjust rates dynamically. We provide complete transparency through Lighthouse, our owner portal, where you can track real-time performance metrics, revenue, and property status whenever you want.

Business Model and Revenue Structure

Inspirato typically leases properties from owners at fixed rates, then sells access to their membership base. The company profits from the spread between what they pay owners and what members pay for stays, creating a buffer between your property and actual market demand.

AvantStay operates on a transparent revenue-share structure. When your property earns more, we earn more. There’s no middleman membership model or fixed lease payments that cap your upside.

Your property gets exposed to the full open market through multiple distribution channels, not a closed subscriber base. Our dynamic pricing responds to real-time market conditions rather than predetermined membership rates. If there’s a major event in your area and demand spikes, you capture that premium immediately. This alignment matters because our financial success depends entirely on maximizing your property’s revenue performance.

Distribution and Guest Access

Inspirato restricts your property to members paying a membership costs of up to $40,000 per year, creating a limited guest pool of travelers who must justify that membership cost before considering your home.

We list your property across 50+ booking channels at once. Your home reaches guests on Airbnb, Vrbo, Booking.com, Google Vacation Rentals, and through our exclusive Marriott Homes & Villas by Marriott Bonvoy partnership. That Marriott connection alone gives you access to 160 million loyalty members who can earn and redeem points at your property.

This multi-channel approach captures demand from business travelers, families, wedding groups, and corporate retreats without membership barriers. Broader exposure drives higher occupancy rates and stronger revenue performance regardless of market conditions.

Revenue Management and Pricing Control

Inspirato’s subscription model locks properties into predetermined member rates regardless of market demand. When a major event drives hotel prices up 200%, your property earns the same bundled rate since members already paid their annual fee, causing you to miss the revenue spike entirely.

AvantStay’s proprietary algorithm adjusts pricing daily based on local events, flight patterns, booking velocity, and competitor rates. When demand surges, rates rise automatically. During slower periods, strategic pricing keeps calendars filled rather than sitting empty.

The financial impact is measurable. Properties using dynamic pricing earn 10.7% more RevPAR compared to static pricing approaches, compounding across ownership years.

You maintain complete visibility into pricing decisions through Lighthouse. Every rate adjustment includes the underlying data, explaining why your property is priced at $450 tonight and $890 next weekend. You can override suggestions if needed, though most owners find the algorithm consistently outperforms manual pricing.

Technology and Owner Transparency

Inspirato’s tech focuses on member booking experience rather than owner operations. Property owners working with Inspirato typically receive basic performance reports without real-time visibility or granular operational data.

Lighthouse gives you full operational control from your phone. You can view live booking calendars, review detailed financial statements showing every revenue line item and expense, track maintenance requests from submission to completion, and block personal dates instantly without contacting our team.

Every metric updates in real time. If a guest books your property at 2 AM, you see the reservation, rate, and revenue impact immediately. Monthly statements break down cleaning costs, maintenance expenses, and commission structures with complete line-item transparency.

Butler, our guest-facing app, handles concierge requests and guest management that would otherwise require owner involvement. When guests request mid-stay cleaning or chef services, Butler manages the entire transaction without pulling you into operational details.

Operational Control and Property Standards

Inspirato’s lease model requires properties to meet strict club portfolio standards with limited flexibility for personal use during multi-year contract terms.

With AvantStay, you keep full ownership control while our local field teams handle daily operations including cleaning, maintenance, and guest issues through 24/7 support infrastructure. When issues arise at any hour, we resolve them directly.

Our design team can help transform properties to boost revenue potential, but you approve every decision. Personal use remains flexible through Lighthouse, where you block dates instantly without minimum notice requirements or lease restrictions.

Screenshot 2026-02-09 145148.png

Why AvantStay is the Better Choice

Inspirato works for owners who want predictable lease payments over revenue maximization and accept limited exposure to a subscription-only guest pool. The lease model offers simplicity if you prefer hands-off fixed income without tracking market performance.

AvantStay is the better choice if you treat your property as a revenue-generating asset. You get open-market distribution across 50+ channels instead of membership-only access. You receive data-driven pricing that captures market upside during high-demand periods, plus institutional-grade operations with complete transparency through real-time performance dashboards.

Our interests align with yours because we succeed only when your property succeeds. There’s no spread between what you earn and what guests pay, no lease cap limiting your upside, and no incentive to prioritize membership experience over your financial performance.

Feature

Inspirato

AvantStay

Business Model

Leases properties at fixed rates for members-only travel club

Revenue-share property management with open market distribution

Guest Access

Restricted to paid members only (up to $40,000 annual membership)

Open market across 50+ booking channels plus 160M Marriott Bonvoy members

Pricing Strategy

Predetermined member rates regardless of market demand

Dynamic pricing algorithm adjusting daily based on real-time market conditions

Revenue Performance

Fixed lease payments that cap upside during high-demand periods

10.7% higher RevPAR through data-driven pricing that captures demand spikes

Owner Transparency

Basic performance reports without real-time operational data

Real-time Lighthouse portal with live bookings, financials, and complete line-item visibility

Personal Use Flexibility

Limited flexibility during multi-year lease contract terms

Instant date blocking through portal without minimum notice requirements

Distribution Channels

Members-only subscriber base

Airbnb, Vrbo, Booking.com, Google Vacation Rentals, Marriott Bonvoy, and 45+ more channels

Operational Control

Strict club portfolio standards with lease restrictions

Full ownership control with 24/7 support and local field teams handling operations

Final Thoughts on Travel Clubs vs Property Management

The travel club comparison makes one thing clear: Inspirato serves travelers, not property owners looking to maximize returns. Your property becomes inventory for their subscription model, earning predetermined rates while market demand fluctuates around you. We take a different path by treating your home as a revenue asset, using dynamic pricing and multi-channel distribution to capture every opportunity. You get complete transparency through real-time dashboards that show performance, not quarterly summaries.

See how our vacation rental management works for owners who want control without operational headaches.

FAQ

How do I decide between Inspirato’s lease model and AvantStay’s revenue-share approach for my property?

Consider your primary goal: if you prefer fixed, predictable lease payments and don’t want to track market performance, Inspirato’s model offers simplicity. If you want to maximize revenue through open-market exposure and dynamic pricing that captures demand spikes, AvantStay’s performance-based structure aligns our success directly with yours.

What’s the main distribution difference between these two services?

Inspirato limits your property to their members-only subscriber base, while AvantStay lists your home across 50+ booking channels including Airbnb, Vrbo, and our exclusive Marriott Bonvoy partnership with access to 160 million potential guests. This broader exposure drives higher occupancy without membership barriers restricting your guest pool.

Who is each service best suited for as a property owner?

Inspirato works for owners who want a hands-off lease arrangement with fixed income and don’t mind restricted access to a subscription-only guest pool. AvantStay is built for owners who treat their property as a revenue-generating investment and want real-time transparency, data-driven pricing, and maximum market exposure.

Can I still use my property for personal stays if I work with AvantStay?

Yes, you maintain full ownership control and can block personal dates instantly through Lighthouse without minimum notice requirements or lease restrictions. Unlike lease models that limit flexibility during multi-year contract terms, you keep complete scheduling control while we handle all guest-facing operations.

What happens to my revenue during high-demand periods like major local events?

With AvantStay, our pricing algorithm automatically adjusts rates when demand spikes, capturing premium pricing immediately—properties using dynamic pricing earn 10.7% more RevPAR on average. Under Inspirato’s membership model, your property earns predetermined rates regardless of market conditions, meaning you miss revenue spikes even when hotel prices surge 200%.

18 Best Restaurants in Coachella Valley

Located in California’s northern Riverside county, Coachella Valley has some of the best eating establishments in California. With growing popularity due to music festivals, film festivals, and sporting events, resort cities like Rancho Mirage, La Quinta, and Palm Springs are home to some of the best food California has to offer.  

Our list of the best restaurants in Coachella Valley will help you find dishes certain to please any palate. From sleepy patio breakfasts to happy hour appetizers and elegant entrees prepared by executive chefs, read on to see what culinary delights await.

Sloan’s 

Located in Indio, California, this popular American-style eatery serves comfort food in hearty portions. Their specialties include traditional french toast, honey-dipped fried chicken, and the popular ribeye dinner with made-to-order onion rings. Breakfast is served at 7 a.m., with an early dinner finishing the day by 8 p.m.; takeout is available for those who want to dine on the go.

Sloan’s in Coachella Valley

The Vintage Coffee House 

This quaint, locally owned coffee shop can be found on Jefferson Street in Indio, not far from the golf courses and polo club. Delicious handcrafted coffee and tea drinks decorate the menu with an enticing array of pastries, snacks, and sandwiches. Consistently high ratings and reviews give this spot a definite thumbs up. Open 6 a.m.- 4 p.m. daily. 

Taco Shop 760 

No list of the best restaurants in Coachella Valley would be complete without this locally owned and operated gem that uses fresh ingredients from the surrounding area. Open from 8 a.m.- 9 p.m., you’re able to enjoy authentic Mexican food and drinks from sunup to sundown. Can you say, “tacos for breakfast?!”. The original location is off of Highway 111 in Indio, however, due to its popularity, two more locations are available to enjoy –  46490 Calhoun St in Indio (yes, this one is inside a convenience store/butcher shop) and 48975 Grapefruit Blvd in Coachella. 

The Cantina 

Located at the stunning El Dorado Polo Club in Indio, this restaurant offers American and Mexican dishes enjoyed on an outdoor patio that delivers one of the most exquisite and unique dining experiences in the Coachella Valley. 

Whether watching the polo action or enjoying the breathtaking mountain view from the field-side outdoor seating and bar, the menu offers a variety of drool-worthy, sharable small plates, salads, sandwiches, and specialty cocktails. Make sure to check when it’s open as operating hours depend on the season. 

Food Dept 

While not technically a restaurant, we had to include this idea. The Food Dept is the place to go for a customized, one-of-a-kind dining experience while staying in the Coachella Valley. Chef Stephen Lee, known for his appearance on FOX’s MasterChef, Season 6, crafts a menu to suit any occasion, from a simple picnic, a weekend brunch, or an evening of formality. 

Based in Palm Springs, Food Dept will travel to your residence or location for an incredible, curated experience that will leave you wanting more. 

Chez Pierre Bistro 

Located in Palm Desert, Chez Pierre Bistro offers authentic French fine dining in the desert. With an eclectic menu and extensive wine list, the reviews and ratings all point towards a 5-star memory.  

We recommend reservations, as the wait time can be lengthy due to the popularity of this restaurant by locals and travelers alike. Open from 5- 9:30 p.m. daily.

Il Giardino 

The greater Palm Springs area, home to Leonardo DiCaprio, offers exhilarating vibes and an enticingly beautiful landscape that provides an unforgettable backdrop to some of the best restaurants in Coachella Valley. 

Il Giardino’s authentic, homemade offerings are prepared by Italian chefs who pay extra attention to taste and presentation. From an afternoon snack to a full dinner complete with wine and dessert, Il Giardino’s dining room is open from 5-9:00 p.m., Monday through Saturday, and closed on Sundays. 

Eddie V’s 

Touted as an excellent seafood restaurant in Palm Desert, Eddie V’s also has the reputation of being a delectable steakhouse, serving some of the most highly rated steaks in the area. Fresh seafood and hand-cut steaks are only some of the menu’s highlights. 

Mini filet mignon sandwiches are available daily during Happy Hour, and gluten-free options are listed from appetizers through full meals. Open daily at 4:00 p.m., dinner ends at 10:00 p.m., except Fridays when hours extend until 11:00 p.m. 

Farm 

Don’t let the name or the rooster fool you. This lovely Palm Springs eatery brings the flavor of Southern France right to your table. Locally sourced and made fresh daily, the menu changes frequently and has offerings such as crepes, french press coffee, and Croque Madame for early-hour diners. 

Dinner is prix fixe with selections such as seared crab cakes, duck cassoulet, and a vast array of signature cocktails. Open from 8:00 a.m.- 2:00 p.m. for the best breakfast and lunch, the restaurant reopens from 5:30- 9:30 p.m. for dinner.

Le Vallauris 

Housed in a downtown Palm Springs historical building, this classic French restaurant offers dining alfresco for a romantic setting both indoors and out. Chef Jean-Paul Lair prepares dishes around a whiteboard á la carte menu, a three-course prix fixe dinner, or a Gourmet prix fixe option. The menus change every Thursday. 

The wine selection is excellent, and selections will pair perfectly with any meal. Open daily from 5- 9:00 p.m., with special Sunday brunch hours from 11:00 a.m.- 2:00 p.m. 

Le Vallauris in Coachella Valley

IW Coffee 

This Indian Wells spot serves coffee made from small batches of locally roasted beans from Joshua Tree Coffee Company. Specialty coffee drinks, teas, pastries, bagels, and their ever-popular avocado toast highlight the menu with friendly service that will leave you smiling. 

Gluten-free options and sugar-free options are available, as well as cozy indoor and outdoor seating. Open daily from 6:30 a.m.- 5:00 p.m.

IW Coffee in Coachella Valley

Workshop Kitchen & Bar 

The Palm Springs location mirrors its sister location in Los Angeles. Owned by Chef Michael Beckman, Chef de Cuisine Beren Ekine-Huett, and Sous Chef Matt Berman, they specialize in an exotic mix of dishes from small plate appetizers to a dry-aged 18 oz ribeye dinner for two. 

The bar is a true adventure in creativity, and foodies will rave about this James Beard awarding winning restaurant. Workshop Kitchen and Bar is open from 5- 10:00 p.m. daily. 

Wilma & Frieda 

Voted the best breakfast, brunch, and farm-to-table menu over multiple years is this delightful restaurant named after two grandmothers. 

The menu explores comfort food with a twist, and features items like a short rib scramble and  blackberry custard french toast. With locations in Palm Springs and Desert Springs on the Gardens on El Paseo, Wilma & Frieda is open daily from 8:00 a.m.- 2:00 p.m., while its Palm Springs location has dinner hours Thursday through Saturday from 5- 9:00 p.m.  

Soul of Mexico 

Ready for the best margaritas in the Coachella Valley? Then you’ve come to the right place. Located off of Jefferson Ave in Indio, this locally owned and operated spot adds taste and authentic flair to their menu items with selections such as a trash burrito (a little bit of everything!), enchiladas, a kid’s menu for the smaller guests, and fried ice cream to finish the night.   

Locally owned and operated, the staff Remember to try their Tamarindo Margarita or a Soul-Strong Margarita. Open daily from 11:00 a.m.- 9:00 p.m. 

Soul of Mexico in Coachella Valley

Pho Vu Restaurant 

If pho is what you’re craving, then look no further. Located in La Quinta, this casual dining atmosphere offers dine-in or takeout options, including pho (noodle soup), bun (vermicelli bowls), bahn mi (sandwiches), com dia (rice plates), and other Vietnamese specialties. Known for its friendly service, this gem always hits the spot. Open daily from 11:00 a.m.- 9:00 p.m. 

Kennedy’s Store & Deli 

Follow the locals! This La Quinta spot is easy to miss in a location with bountiful places for Mexican food. However, don’t ignore this taco stand. 

There is no seating, but don’t let that deter you from grabbing an order for an impromptu picnic in the beautiful area surrounding La Quinta. Where else can you find a shrimp and octopus cocktail, a cold beer, tamales, burritos, and freshly made-to-order tacos ready in a snap?! Answer: Nowhere! 

Open from 6:00 a.m.- 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday and 8:00 a.m.- 5:00 p.m. on Sunday. 

Copley’s on Palm Canyon 

Featured on OpenTable’s top 100 list for outdoor dining restaurants, Chef Copley defines their menu flavors as upscale American cuisine with nuances borrowed from Europe and the Tropics. 

Situated in a lovely cottage formerly owned by Cary Grant, this stellar restaurant offers unrivaled outdoor seating perfect for any size dinner party. Because it’s only open for three hours a day (5:30- 8:30 p.m.), reservations are highly recommended. 

Copley’s on Palm Canyon 

Raspados Esmereldas 

Every list needs a dessert shop, and this one is no different. This sweet treat restaurant is located in Indio and operated by a husband and wife team. It has an incredible flavor selection of raspados made with fresh fruits and local ingredients, perfect for cooling off during those hot weather days. 

You can swing by after dining at one of the other restaurants on this list, or you can make a whole meal out of dessert! 

With a reputation for welcoming service, scrupulously clean conditions, and raspados that cannot be beaten, they are open daily from 11:00 a.m.- 9:00 p.m.

Final Thoughts

With endless culinary possibilities, the Coachella Valley clearly offers some of the best in California cuisine. From freshly brewed coffee companies to comfort food cafes and James Beard award winning eateries to innovative Mexican fare, we’re certain you’ll find your next favorite on our list. Your palate will thank you. 

Planning a trip and not sure where to stay? Be sure to check out our plentiful selection of Coachella Valley vacation rentals.

30 Best Things To Do in Fort Lauderdale: The Venice of America

Fort Lauderdale is a year-round oceanfront getaway in South Florida with endless activities for couples, families, and friends to enjoy year-round.
In fact, whether you’re a local or just visiting for spring break or a weekend, there are so many cool things to experience in and around this beachside city that it can be hard to decide what to do first.

Twenty-five miles north of Miami, Fort Lauderdale is just a short drive from Miami’s lively nightlife, award-winning restaurant scene, and unparalleled shopping districts, but it has the benefit of fewer crowds.

That makes Fort Lauderdale an idyllic place to spend some time lounging in the Sunshine State’s perfect weather, exploring the many nearby attractions, or taking in its picturesque canals, while never feeling too far removed from Miami’s buzzing and diverse international energy.

So, if you’re planning a trip to South Florida or Fort Lauderdale, we’ve got you covered —from kayak adventures and airboat tours to the best shopping, entertainment, and outdoor experiences.
With this list of the 30 best things to do in Fort Lauderdale, you’ll be perfectly prepared to experience all of the fun in the sun that you can handle in the “Venice of America.”

Let’s jump in!

swimming at Fort Lauderdale beach is a must-do thing to do in Ft Lauderdale

1. Swim at Fort Lauderdale Beach

Fort Lauderdale Beach is a must-visit if you’re passing through South Florida. This seven-mile stretch of white sand and crystal blue ocean—famous for its reputation as a Spring Break Mecca—is within walking distance of Las Olas Boulevard (#3 on this list) and close to many of Fort Lauderdale’s top-rated restaurants like Gianni’s Table. 

You can enjoy swimming, jet skiing, snorkeling, stand-up paddle boarding, sunbathing, and more at Fort Lauderdale Beach without ever running out of things to do. 

The Fort Lauderdale Beachfront promenade also has scenic walking and biking paths lined with palm trees and benches along the ocean, making it the perfect spot to stop for a little sightseeing or indulge in some ice cream.

2. Explore the Everglades

The Everglades are not technically in Fort Lauderdale. But this iconic National Park is located just west of the city and is absolutely worth visiting especially if you’re a nature lover or looking for adventure. 

The Everglades wilderness comprises the largest area of contiguous wetlands in America and is the perfect place to get face-to-face with South Florida’s spectacular beauty, birdlife, and wildlife, or maybe even spot an alligator or a Florida Panther, among other fun things. 

Everglades National Park protects 1.5-million hectares of wetlands from environmental harm and there are multiple interpretive centers and exhibits throughout the Park that explain to visitors the importance and rarity of this vital, tropical ecosystem. Families, couples, and friends looking for a little more of an adrenaline-boosting experience also can enjoy airboat tours, kayak rides, or an alligator safari through the Everglades.

shopping on Las Olas Blvd is at the top of the things to do fort lauderdale list

3. Shop on Las Olas Boulevard

You can’t go to downtown Fort Lauderdale without taking a stroll down Las Olas Boulevard. Shopping along Las Olas—frequently referred to as the Rodeo Drive of South Florida—is one of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale because it has everything you need to shop until you drop. 

Swanky stores, boutique shops, and iconic brands line this manicured street near the ocean. And when hunger or thirst strikes, there are dozens of nearby restaurants and bars to satiate your cravings and fuel your second wind. You also might just spot a celebrity or two. 

4. Suntan at Hollywood Beach

Hollywood Beach is one of the popular Fort Lauderdale beaches. The soft sand makes Hollywood Beach an ideal spot to unfurl a blanket or towel and enjoy a picnic or tanning session. Be sure also to bring your bathing suit since the clear blue Atlantic Ocean will beckon you in especially if you visit in the middle of the day. 

Hollywood Beach boasts a beautiful 2.5-mile boardwalk in addition to the beach itself which is a hub of activity, restaurants, and bars attracting both locals and visitors year-round.

a cultural thing to do in fort lauderdale is to attend a show at the broward center for performing arts

5. Enjoy a Show at the Broward Center for the Performing Arts

The Broward Center for the Performing Arts is one of Fort Lauderdale’s cultural icons. This playhouse is one of the most visited in the world and hosts over 700 performances each year, making it an ideal place to spend an afternoon or evening if you ever want to get out of the sun.

The Broward Center for the Performing Arts is located on the scenic banks of the New River, so you can admire the spectacular view before and after you enjoy one of the shows. If the Broward Center is fully booked, check out the nearby Parker Playhouse, which is another Fort Lauderdale cultural hotspot where you and your travel companions can experience South Florida’s emerging arts scene and enjoy a show.

6. Visit the Hugh Taylor Birch State Park

One of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale if you love the outdoors is a day trip to Hugh Taylor Birch State Park. This state park spans 180 acres of preserved land where visitors and residents can picnic on the beach or grass, camp under the stars, hike along nature trails, witness spectacular wildlife, or go on a guided tour. 

Hugh Taylor Birch State Park is open year-round from 8:00 a.m. until sunset, and the entrance fee to the park is under $10 per vehicle. Just be sure to book your tour tickets in advance to ensure you get the time slot of your preference, especially if you want to stay out of the sun in the middle of the day.

dine with friends at the S3 restaurant for a tasty thing to do in fort lauderdale

7. Dine at S3 (Sun Surf Sand)

S3 (Sun Surf Sand) is one of the top-rated restaurants in Fort Lauderdale that serves up award-winning seafood, steak, and sushi. The restaurant opened its doors in Fort Lauderdale in 2013 and has been a favorite spot for locals and visitors ever since. 

S3 has gorgeous views of Fort Lauderdale Beach and the Atlantic Ocean while offering artfully crafted food that’s designed to be shared for a culinary experience that everyone at the table can be a part of. 

Each plate served up at S3 includes delicious cuts of premium meat, freshly caught fish, and locally sourced ingredients so you’re guaranteed to never go home from here hungry.

8. See Animals at Flamingo Gardens

Flamingo Gardens in Fort Lauderdale is a family-friendly, exotic, and exciting thing to do. Why? Because there are few animals more photogenic or statuesque than the bright pink flamingo. 

Flamingo Gardens is technically a botanical garden, but it’s also an aviary (a.k.a. bird) zoo that provides a peaceful escape and unique opportunity to experience South Florida’s wild nature without ever having to leave Fort Lauderdale.

Flamingo Gardens is home to dozens of native “Champion” trees (state record holders in size, width, and age) as well as hummingbird species and countless rare plants. Be sure to have your camera handy as you wander through the scenic pathways and mangrove forests.

shopping at sawgrass mills is a popular thing to do in fort lauderdale

9. Go Shopping at Sawgrass Mills

Sawgrass Mills in Fort Lauderdale is the largest single-story outlet mall in America, so remember to charge your Fitbit or Apple Watch before you go to get credit for all the steps you’ll take while shopping at the hundreds of stores. 

Sawgrass Mills features dozens of famous retail brands like Balenciaga, Armani, Burberry, and many more, while also offering a vast selection of excellent food options throughout the mall. If you prefer to pay full price for luxury brands, you can also head to The Galleria at Fort Lauderdale for one of South Florida’s most famous, premium shopping experiences.

10. Explore Butterfly World

Butterfly World is exactly what it sounds like: a butterfly sanctuary with over 20,000 colorful butterflies and birds. Butterfly World is the perfect attraction to visit when you’re exploring Fort Lauderdale if you want to do more than just shop or lay on the beach.

Whether you’re traveling with friends, a partner, or family, Butterfly World offers guided educational tours or you can also wander around and explore at your own pace. The South Florida Adventure Pass includes entry to Butterfly World as well as three other top outdoor destinations to visit in Fort Lauderdale, including Flamingo Gardens, Sawgrass Recreation Park, and the Museum of Discovery and Science.

surfing is a popular thing to do in fort lauderdale

11. Learn To Surf

Make vacation memories and get your adrenaline pumping by taking a surfing lesson in Fort Lauderdale. Pompano Beach is one of the best spots to try this watersport because the waves are consistent and not too forceful. However, you can enjoy surfing along nearly any Fort Lauderdale beach. 

If you’re not quite ready to ride the waves on a surfboard yet, try taking a paddleboarding lesson instead to get your feet wet. Paddleboarding lets you get out onto the water, but the large board is easier to stay upright on than a surfboard and there typically aren’t any waves involved. 

12. Embark on a Seaplane Tour

If sightseeing is on your travel bucket list, then a seaplane tour is a must-do when visiting Fort Lauderdale. You can fly over Fort Lauderdale for 30 minutes and soak in the views as you soar through the sky, getting a unique vantage point of the crystal clear the Atlantic Ocean, white sand beaches, and towering palm trees of South Florida.

A seaplane tour of Fort Lauderdale is more expensive than your standard boat sightseeing tour, but it will be a memory that your entire travel group will remember for years to come.

one thing to do in fort lauderdale is experience the city from the water

13. Enjoy a Boat Cruise

Fort Lauderdale has endless boat cruise options that allow you to experience South Florida’s coastline, beaches, bays, and canals from the water. A sightseeing cruise is one of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale because it shows off this beach city from a new vantage point and allows you to get out on the water without actually getting in it.

Las Olas Gondola operates romantic boat tours in a fleet of Venetian-style gondolas, while the Jungle Queen Riverboat is a multi-deck ferry for large sightseeing tours along Fort Lauderdale’s waterfront. 

Fort Lauderdale is also known as the yachting capital of the U.S. So, don’t miss the chance to hop onto one of the city’s luxury yachts if you’re looking for a fast-paced on-the-water experience.

14. Kayak Along the Venetian Isles

There’s no better way to explore the “Venice of America” and Fort Lauderdale’s intricate system of canals than in a single or tandem kayak. 

You can rent a kayak or book a group kayaking tour depending on your comfort level. Whatever you choose, experiencing Fort Lauderdale by kayak lets you go at your own pace as you meander through the crystal-clear waterways and allows you to see some of South Florida’s most expensive waterfront mansions in a unique way.

the Bonnet Museum and House is a scenic indoors and outdoors thing to do in Fort Lauderdale

15. Visit the Bonnet House Museum and Gardens

The Bonnet House Museum and Gardens is a historic home museum in the heart of Fort Lauderdale. The house was built in 1920 and was formerly the home of two famous American artists, Frederic and Evelyn Bartlett. 

The Bonnet House Museum shows off the artists’ furnished home and also includes many of their original works of art still decorating the walls. 

The gardens are a space of tranquility amidst the city. The brightly colored flowers beg to be photographed, while the manicured gardens offer a calming place to relax and rejuvenate after a busy day at the beach canoeing, in a kayak, or on a seaplane tour.

16. Learn about South Florida History at the Historic Stranahan House Museum

The Historic Stranahan House Museum is the oldest standing house in Broward County, which includes Fort Lauderdale. This historic home was built in 1901 and was the residence of two of Fort Lauderdale’s first residents, Frank and Ivy Stranahan.

Enjoy a guided tour through the museum and Stranahan house, while hearing stories about one of Fort Lauderdale’s founding families and learning more about the history of this bustling, up-and-coming city.

17. Go Sightseeing on the Community Shuttle

Formerly known as the Sun Trolley, the Community Shuttle is an easy and effortless way to get around Fort Lauderdale. It’s free to ride and has links and stops throughout the city, so it’s perfect for visitors who want to self-guide themselves on a tour of Fort Lauderdale’s top sights and attractions.

Whether you use the Community Shuttle for sightseeing or as cheap transportation, it’s a convenient way to check off multiple items on this list of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale. Especially if you aren’t driving into town or don’t want to rent a car.

treating yourself to a delicious meal at casa d'angelo is a popular fort lauderdale thing to do

18. Try a Meal at Casa D’Angelo

Casa D’Angelo is one of Fort Lauderdale’s best restaurants where you can indulge in delicious Northern Italian cuisine and a large wine selection in an elegant, upscale atmosphere. 

Casa D’Angelo’s food is award-winning, its service impeccable, and it’s the original location of the now famous brand started by chef Angelo Elia, which currently has other locations throughout the U.S. If you’re a foodie—or just spent all day working up an appetite being out and about around town—Casa D’Angelo is a can’t-miss Fort Lauderdale culinary icon.

an outdoors thing to do in fort lauderdale is drink at the tiki bar

19. Have Fun on a Floating Tiki Bar

Fort Lauderdale Cruisin’ Tikis proves that boat tours in the Venice of America come in all shapes and sizes. On this tiki bar boat cruise, you and your friends can enjoy drinks, live entertainment, and experience Fort Lauderdale’s scenic waterways all at the same time. 

Cruisin’ Tikis has boat tours with jazz music under the stars as well as cruises that depart morning, afternoon, and at sunset. You can also custom charter a tiki bar boat for a private party which will make for a waterfront event that you and your traveling companions will remember for the rest of your lives.

20. Try Something Delicious at The Katherine

One of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale is to experience its world-class, up-and-coming culinary scene. The Katherine is a new restaurant in Fort Lauderdale that opened its doors in 2021 and has quickly established itself as one of the city’s most coveted reservations. 

This Argentinian Steakhouse serves up premium cuts of meat in artfully plated dishes. The skilled chefs can also accommodate allergies and food intolerances as well as whip up something special for the kids. Don’t pass up the decadent dessert menu when you’ve finished dinner either.

if you're looking fort a cultural thing to do in ft lauderdale then definitely make a stop at the NSU Art Museum

21. See Art at the NSU Art Museum

The NSU Art Museum in Fort Lauderdale is one of the places to visit in the city if it rains or you need a few hours out of the sun. The exhibitions and art installations are inspiring and educational, and they are sure to keep everyone in your travel group entertained. 

The art gallery has permanent and rotating exhibitions so that visitors who have explored the NSU before can always find something new. 

After browsing the paintings, sculptures, and digital art, head to the onsite cafe and gift shop to pick up treats and souvenirs.

jockeys racing at gulfstream park

22. Win Big at the Gulfstream Park Racing and Casino

If you’re feeling lucky during your getaway to Fort Lauderdale, head to the Gulfstream Park Racing and Casino in nearby Hallandale Beach to experience the energy of a real-life horse race, a pulse-pounding casino night, or to catch some live entertainment or a show. 

The Gulfstream Park Racing and Casino are also home to several excellent restaurants so you can easily spend an entire afternoon or evening here (or both) without running out of things to do.

23. Open Your Mind at the Museum of Discovery and Science

The Museum of Discovery and Science in Fort Lauderdale is an excellent activity for the entire family to enjoy. This interactive museum and science center has hands-on exhibits for kids and kids-at-heart to learn from. 

The Museum of Discovery and Science includes an onsite IMAX 3D theater, a prehistoric Florida section, and interactive exhibits about Florida’s rare flora, fauna, and ecosystems. For outdoor lovers, the Museum of Discovery and Science is an excellent activity to pair with a visit to Flamingo Gardens or the Everglades.

24. Pretend to be a Pirate on a Bluefoot Pirate Adventure

Bluefoot Pirate Adventures is one of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale, especially if you are visiting with children. This exciting boat tour takes the whole family out to sea on a replica pirate ship, where you’ll take orders from your captain, learn pirate lingo, and even battle another pirate ship with water cannons. 

This interactive tour gets you and your travel group out onto Fort Lauderdale’s beautiful crystal clear waters while making endless vacation and Instagram-worthy memories that your kids will love. 

25. Have a Blast at Flippo’s Family Center

Flippos Family Center is an indoor playground that spans 9,000 square feet of interactive fun and offers families the perfect place to visit in Fort Lauderdale if it’s raining, too hot outside, or you’re just looking for something unique to do. At Flippo’s Family Center, you and your kids can slide down mega slides, play in the laser maze, cannonball into ball pits, climb, jump, and play. 

Children ages one to 14 are welcome to run around and blow off some steam while parents can enjoy drinks and snacks in the comfortable seating areas.

family in a flat-bottomed boat. seeing alligators is a popular thing to do in fort lauderdale

26. See alligators at Sawgrass Recreation Park

Sawgrass Recreation Park is a beautiful destination near Fort Lauderdale that your entire family will enjoy. The Sawgrass Recreation Park is in the Florida Everglades and offers unique tours through miles of jaw-dropping scenery and wetland wilderness. 

An airboat ride at Sawgrass Recreation Park is also one of the best ways to see an alligator because these flat-bottomed boats with a giant fan on the back instead of an engine are designed to explore shallow waters like the Everglades.

drinking a beer at Invasive Species is a popular Fort Lauderdale thing to do

27. Have a Beer at Invasive Species Brewing

After a long day of exploring, head to Invasive Species Brewing and try one—or a few—of this craft brewery’s delicious beers. 

You never know what to expect at Invasive Species Brewing because their beer selection constantly rotates based on the experiments they conduct in their taproom, and their menu adjusts weekly based on which seasonal ingredients are available.

The brewery and bar are also decorated with taxidermied native animals on nearly every free wall space for a unique and laid-back atmosphere that perfectly captures the South Florida outdoor vibe.

28. Play a round of golf

Fort Lauderdale is home to some of South Florida’s best golf courses, so you have unending options to choose from if you like to hit the greens on vacation. Enjoy a scenic spot to practice your shots as well as clubhouses with epic views. 

The private Grand Oaks Golf Club is one of Fort Lauderdale’s most renowned courses, but golfers must have a membership or know someone who’s a member to play here. Other respected golf courses in Fort Lauderdale include: 

enjoying a fancy cocktail at Blue Martini is a popular fort lauderdale thing to do

29. Have a Drink at the Blue Martini

The Blue Martini is a sophisticated bar and nightclub in Fort Lauderdale on Sunrise Boulevard at the Galleria Mall. For anyone visiting Fort Lauderdale over the age of 21, this bar and nightclub is a must-visit spot. 

The Blue Martini is open Wednesday to Sunday nights with Happy Hour between 2 p.m. and 7 p.m. They also have live music almost around the clock, which will get you and your travel companions onto the dance floor. If you’re traveling in a large group, you can also host private events here.

30. Rent an epic vacation home

One of the best things to do in Fort Lauderdale is to rent a vacation home with a pool, comfortable amenities, water views, and a space for your furry friends to run around. There are so many options of amazing rentals for families, friends, and couples that give you more privacy than a hotel room as well as the comfort of feeling like you’re at home.

Whether you’re looking for a vacation rental near your favorite beach or you want to rent a home that’s closer to one of your must-see attractions while you’re in town, Fort Lauderdale has rental options suited to any type of traveler.

Conclusion

Fort Lauderdale is chock-full of fun activities and things to do for couples, groups, and families. Travelers searching for history and culture will adore the Historic Stranahan House Museum and the Broward Center for the Performing Arts. Meanwhile, adventure lovers will get a thrill out of jet skiing, an airboat tour, or exploring Fort Lauderdale’s canals by kayak or paddleboard.

If you prefer a slower pace, enjoy lounging on the many amazing Fort Lauderdale beaches or shopping at outlet malls and boutique shops. Whatever you choose, you’re in for a great time in the “Venice of America.”

10 Best Big Bear Cabins for Large Groups & Reunions

Planning a group getaway to Big Bear? If you’re organizing a family reunion, friends’ retreat, or multi-generational vacation, finding the right place to stay can make all the difference. 

Fortunately, Big Bear Lake is packed with spacious cabins perfect for large groups—think 5+ bedrooms, big kitchens, open-concept living areas, game rooms, and private hot tubs.

To help you skip the endless scrolling, we’ve rounded up the 10 best Big Bear cabins for large groups and reunions. These vacation rentals sleep 10+ guests comfortably and come with standout amenities, from lakeside decks to cinematic game rooms. 

So grab your crew and get ready—these cabins are built for memory-making. 

Curated Reads to Check Out: 

Bearpaw 

Sleeps 11 guests | 5 Bedrooms & 5 Baths

With a fresh, modern design and thoughtful layout, Bearpaw is comfortable and stylish for groups looking to relax in the mountains. Guests love the open-concept kitchen and living space, perfect for hanging out as a group, and the upstairs bedrooms feel more like a resort than a cabin. The property includes a ready-to-go hot tub, ample natural light, and refined finishes that feel upscale without losing the cozy cabin vibes.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Ready-to-use hot tub and fireplace for relaxation
  • Adult and kids’ play zone with foosball and a card table
  • Nearby Big Bear Lake and Ski Beach Park

From Our Valued Guests:

“The place is gorgeous, my friends and I really enjoyed our stay. Clean and with plenty of room for 10 of us”.

“Absolutely loved this house and the location. The home felt cozy, but also plenty of room for all of our guests. The layout was perfect for hanging out as a group and a very social kitchen-living room setup. The upstairs bedrooms felt like a resort vacation. Loved the crisp colors and clean finishes when so many cabins in big bear have a little too much log feel and not enough natural light. The hot tub was warm and ready to go when we arrived and super easy to use. Would stay here again in a heartbeat.”

Check Availability ⟶

Starlight Retreat

Sleeps 12 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 3 Baths

Just minutes from local shops and restaurants, Starlight Retreat is a crowd-pleaser for family groups. The spacious living room and big windows are ideal for gathering, while the upstairs loft gives younger guests their own fun zone with theater-like reclining chairs and a ping-pong table. With its convenient location and welcoming layout, it’s easy to see why families come back for more.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Expansive 3-story decks offering panoramic mountain views
  • Loft game room with wet bar and entertainment space
  • Luxurious master suite featuring a Jacuzzi tub and dual-sided fireplace

From Our Valued Guests:

“We had a wonderful time in Big Bear. Thank you to AvantStay for hosting us!”

“Cabin was great for the whole family. We really enjoyed hanging out in the living room and the young ones enjoyed the upstairs area. Location was great and near local shops and restaurants.”

Check Availability ⟶

Zen Den

Sleeps 9 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 3 Baths

True to its name, Zen Den is a serene hideaway with lake views, clean interiors, and spacious living. Set on a hill, it offers breathtaking views and captivates an Instagrammable backdrop of the shimmering lake, which is just a short walk from town (though be ready for a steep return!). This home is ideal for families and best for groups that want quiet mornings, social evenings, and plenty of space to spread out.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Spacious layout with a cozy wood-burning fireplace and gourmet kitchen
  • Entertainment options include foosball, pool/hockey combo table, and multiple decks
  • Prime location within walking distance to Big Bear Village and the lake

From Our Valued Guests:

“Our family loved staying at Zen Den. It was spacious, comfortable and clean with everything we needed. The AvantStay Team was very responsive to our requests, always in a friendly manner. The house has a lot of steps, but the reward is a breathtaking view of the lake from the front. It is very near town and is within walking distance. But the return is up a very steep hill. There are many restaurants and bars in town, some with entertainment. Overall, a great place for a family vacation.”

“Beautiful home. Very big and accommodating for our group. We’d definitely stay here again!”

Check Availability ⟶

Eagle Ridge Retreat

Sleeps 15 guests | 5 Bedrooms & 3 Baths

Eagle Ridge Retreat offers a peaceful perch with incredible views of the surrounding forest and lake. The expansive, open-concept living and dining areas are complemented by oversized windows that bring the outdoors in, while the spacious deck makes it easy to gather for drinks, games, or just soaking up the view. Its close proximity to the lake, just five minutes away, makes it convenient for water activities and lakeside strolls.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Expansive 3,700 sq ft log cabin with wrap-around decks and scenic views
  • Loft area equipped with a poker table and entertainment options
  • Near Big Bear Lake, shops, and ski resorts

From Our Valued Guests:

“Great location to stay, everything was close by around the area, cabin was huge and roomie”

“Our family had a wonderful time in this cabin! The views were breathtaking, the home was spacious, clean and comfortable. Less than a 5 minute drive to the lake. Definitely recommend ☺️

“We loved the home! It was a great place to get together and spend time with family and friends. The view from the deck was spectacular.”

Check Availability ⟶

Dawn and Dusk

Sleeps 15 guests | 7 Bedrooms & 5 Baths

With room for big getaways and plenty of hangout zones, Dawn and Dusk is perfect for larger groups that want a fun and social space. The home’s game-ready amenities and large common areas make it easy to keep everyone entertained. Located close to both the village and the slopes, this cabin is convenient and spacious. It’s a favorite for snow trips, reunions, and celebratory getaways.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Fully remodeled 4,500 sq ft cabin 
  • Entertainment galore with game room, movie theater, and multiple living areas
  • Walking distance to the lake, marinas, and Big Bear Village

From Our Valued Guests:

“Great place to stay! They were very communicative and the place was as advertised. It was in a good location and had a lot of amenities and activities to do in and around the property.

“My friends and I absolutely loved our stay! The bnb was huge and accommodated all 14 of us very nicely. We had the best time on our annual snow trip and would 100% do it again! The hosts were very nice and easy to get ahold of. 10/10 in my experience:)”

Check Availability ⟶

Shoreline Lakehouse

Sleeps 10 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 4 Baths

If your group loves lakefront views and plenty of space to unwind, Shoreline Lakehouse should be at the top of your list. With a well-maintained log cabin aesthetic and every bedroom featuring its own bathroom, this rental delivers on both comfort and convenience. The outdoor space is especially appealing, offering quiet places to relax and areas for kids or teens to play. Guests love the stunning mountain and lake views the most. 

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Direct lakefront access with private dock and expansive backyard
  • Game room featuring a bar and poker table for indoor fun
  • Multiple decks and patios with a hot tub and fire pit

From Our Valued Guests:

“It’s a beautiful place, great location, they let me do late check out which won me over and would stay here again.”

“This lovely well maintained and well stocked log cabin was everything my family hoped for and exceeded our expectations! It was just the right size for our family and we all appreciated having a bathroom co-joining each bedroom. The outdoor space was perfect for all the range of activities our family( ages from a 2 yr. old to grandparents) wished to engage in! The view of the lake and surrounding mountains was exquisite! Thank you for sharing your cabin with my family!!”

Check Availability ⟶

Penticton Lodge

Sleeps 14 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 4 Baths

Located just a short drive from downtown Big Bear and nearby parks, Penticton Lodge offers seclusion and accessibility. The decor is cozy and inviting, with large windows that bring in natural light and frame mountain views. Whether you’re celebrating a special occasion or just enjoying a weekend away, this home has that comfort and scenic charm. Many guests say it’s the kind of cabin that becomes a family tradition, thanks to its peaceful vibe and easy layout.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Vaulted cathedral ceilings with floor-to-ceiling windows showcasing mountain vistas
  • Master suites, each with private decks and luxurious amenities
  • Game room equipped with bunk beds and futons, perfect for kids or extra guests

From Our Valued Guests:

“Did a family outing and had a wonderful time! Location was spot on, in between any type of activity you plan to do all within 10-15 min drive. Host group was responsive and attentive. Would highly recommend!”

“Penticton Lodge is a great home for our family short weekend trip in Big Bear. We loved the Lodge! It is perfectly decorated and very homey. Big windows that shows the views of the mountains, love the scenic views and we had great pictures. Easy to find on the location, quiet and private. Close to downtown and some parks. Thank you Avantstay.. we had a great time.”

“Had a wonderful time celebrating our son bday. Would definitely come back to this location. Lovely views, very enjoyable. Everything was close by which made it very convenient and comfortable.”

Check Availability ⟶

Gambler

Sleeps 10 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 3 Baths

Gambler is a centrally located gem with easy access to the lake, shops, and restaurants. Its spacious cabin layout is perfect for families or multi-family groups who want to be close to everything while still having space to unwind. With plenty of amenities and a well-stocked kitchen, this rental makes hosting a breeze. Our past guests love how clean the place is and how smooth our check-in process is, which sets the tone for a great stay.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Well-equipped with modern amenities and a hot tub
  • Indoor games available, such as a pool and card table 
  • Close proximity to Big Bear Lake and local attractions

From Our Valued Guests:

“Property was clean, check-in/out process was easy, and we loved all the amenities! The location was walking distance from the lake and many other fun places. We would definitely book with AvantStay again and maybe even the same property. Huge thanks to AvantStay for making our trip so great! :)”

“Was surprised how big and spacious the cabin was. My family and I really enjoyed the stay there. Can’t wait to go back again.”

Check Availability ⟶

Big Bear Castle

Sleeps 15 guests | 6 Bedrooms & 5 Baths

Looking for something a little over-the-top? Big Bear Castle delivers a royal experience in the woods. This large and uniquely styled home features luxurious finishes, tons of space for dining and lounging, and amenities such as a hot tub and indoor games. Whether you’re celebrating a birthday, planning a ski weekend, or just want to treat your group to something special, this home makes an impression. Plus, it’s close to the ski areas! 

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Unique castle-themed architecture offering a one-of-a-kind stay
  • Private hot tub and easy access to skiing and outdoor activities
  • Spacious back patio with outdoor dining perfect for gatherings or celebrations

From Our Valued Guests:

“Everything was perfect. AvantStay team was always responsive and friendly.”

“Very nice location. I spent my birthday dinner. Very cool that can give you options for check in and check out and with private chefs and much more. Thank you for your place.”

“Great house. Easy access to skiing. Hot tub was great.”

Check Availability ⟶

Koda

Sleeps 10 guests | 4 Bedrooms & 3 Baths

A dream cabin for multigenerational groups, thanks to its beautiful lake access, sprawling outdoor space, and layout that works for guests of all ages. Koda is modern and well-equipped, with plenty of indoor amenities like a fireplace, hot tub, and game options. It’s peaceful, private, and just a short drive to everything Big Bear has to offer. Whether you’re sipping morning coffee by the lake or gathering around the fireplace, this home makes quality time easy.

Experience The Best of This Home:

  • Multiple dining setup areas, may it be indoor or outdoor
  • Modern cabin interiors and a fully equipped kitchen
  • Stunning lake views with a cozy atmosphere and ample outdoor space

From Our Valued Guests:

“Beautiful Lakeview and lake access, cozy atmosphere, and so much land! The perfect cabin getaway- my family ages 3-85 all enjoyed their stay and couldn’t wait to come back. They’re already asking to make it an annual trip to the exact cabin. The Airbnb came with lots of amenities (hot tub, games, fireplace, etc.)”

“Beautiful, super clean and modern property. Convenient to everything in big bear. Owners were very responsive regarding questions and needs during our stay. Thank you!”

Check Availability ⟶

What Activities Can Your Large Group Do in Big Bear?

Big Bear Lake is a haven for group adventures year-round, offering a diverse array of activities that cater to all ages and interests. Whether you’re planning a family reunion, a friends’ getaway, or a corporate retreat, there’s something for everyone to enjoy.

1. Water Adventures on Big Bear Lake

From April through October, Big Bear Lake becomes a playground for water enthusiasts. Groups can indulge in activities like paddleboarding, kayaking, pontoon boating, wakeboarding, and sailing. With 23 miles of shoreline, there’s ample space for everyone to relax or engage in water sports. 

2. Thrilling Mountain Activities

For those seeking adrenaline-pumping experiences, Big Bear Mountain Resort offers a variety of activities. Groups can enjoy zip-lining, rock climbing, mountain biking, and hiking. In the winter months, the resort transforms into a snowy paradise with skiing, snowboarding, and snow tubing. 

3. Unique Group Experiences

Big Bear boasts several attractions perfect for group bonding. You can test your teamwork at Mountain Room Escapes or embark on an off-road adventure with Big Bear Off-Road Experience. These activities provide memorable experiences that strengthen group connections.

4. Scenic Exploration and Relaxation

The Scenic Sky Chair at Snow Summit offers breathtaking views of the surrounding mountains, making it a must-do for groups seeking a more relaxed activity. Additionally, the village area provides a charming setting for shopping, dining, and leisurely strolls.

5. Culinary Delights and Nightlife

After a day of adventures, groups can unwind at local eateries and bars. The Village Sports Bar, for instance, is a popular spot for groups to enjoy live music, games, and a vibrant atmosphere. 

With such a wide range of activities and attractions, Big Bear Lake ensures that every group can create unforgettable memories together.

For more inspiration on planning your group getaway, check out our guide on the best things to do in Big Bear and the top 15 Big Bear Airbnbs, which highlights accommodations that offer the ultimate relaxation & peaceful escape.

Related Articles:

Cabin Goals, Unlocked.

Reuniting with the whole fam, rallying your college crew, or finally taking that long-overdue group getaway, Big Bear is the ultimate backdrop—and these cabins are the main event. 

Lakeside hangs, late-night hot tub soaks, game room showdowns, and fireside chats that stretch into the stars. With space for everyone and vibes for days, your next unforgettable trip starts here.

Need help picking the perfect place? Our Guest Experience Team is just a call or text away—(833) 442-8268.

Explore all Big Bear stays → 

Frequently Asked Questions

1. Are pets allowed in AvantStay Big Bear cabins?

Some AvantStay properties in Big Bear are pet-friendly, while others are not. Pet policies can vary by home, so it’s essential to review the specific property’s details before booking. If you’re considering bringing a pet, please check the listing’s pet policy or reach out to our Guest Experience team for assistance. You can contact us 24/7 via SMS at 833-442-8268 or through our Help Center for more information.

2. Is air conditioning available in Big Bear cabins?

Most cabins in Big Bear do not have air conditioning due to the area’s mild summer temperatures. However, some properties may offer A/C or provide fans for guest comfort. If air conditioning is a priority for your group, you need to ensure that you verify this amenity in the property’s description before booking a house.

3. What parking regulations should we be aware of in Big Bear?

Street parking is generally prohibited in Big Bear. Each of our properties will have a designated number of parking spaces, and if not, we include this information in our property listings.  Exceeding parking limits can also result in fines. Additionally, parking RVs at vacation rentals may or may not be allowed. Always adhere to the parking guidelines provided by your rental to avoid any issues. If you need to clarify the parking situation of the home you want to book, always feel free to contact us! 

10 Best Vacation Rentals with Game Rooms and Arcade Machines

Vacations are perfect for relaxing, enjoying happy hours, reading a good thriller, and catching up with old friends until you’ve gotta bring the kids. While they can be harder to entertain, the kids will absolutely love these vacation rentals with game rooms and arcade machines.

Whether you’re looking for a vacation rental with a hot tub, pool, sauna, or just a good TV, these homes are sure to check all the boxes on your dream vacation checklist. Because who doesn’t have one of those?

Best Vacation Homes with Game Rooms and Arcades

1. Ever After – Davenport, FL

Welcome to Ever After, a Davenport vacation home with pop culture vibes and where magic comes to life. The highlight of this home is the themed rooms, perfect for geeks, nerds, fans, and dreamers of all kinds. Located in a gated community just minutes from Disney World and Universal Studios, this home is thoughtfully designed to cater to all ages, from princess rooms to Harry Potter fans.

★ Best House Features:

  • 10 bedrooms and 8 bathrooms for 22 guests
  • Futuristic game room with foosball, air hockey, arcade games, and Star Wars theater
  • Private screened-in pool, covered patio, plus access to community pool, basketball court, and mini golf

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“Our family had the best time ! The kids were obsessed with the Disney-themed bedrooms and spent hours in the game room, while the adults loved relaxing by the private pool in the evenings. The kitchen was fully stocked. Having multiple bathrooms meant everyone had their own space. The gated community felt safe and welcoming, and the location made getting to Disney and Universal simple. We couldn’t have asked for a better place to stay and would 100% come back!” – Charles Albert G.

➜ Book Now

2. Game Farm Villa – Hudson Valley, NY 

Nostalgia is in; boring vacations are out. Bring the ultimate game experience to your vacay at Game Farm Villa in the Hudson Valley. This home is a sprawling 12,000 sq ft estate designed for family-friendly trips that can comfortably fit 28 people. With endless entertainment options not just for adults, kids will also be thrilled by the expansive recreation room with turf, two bounce houses, and countless games to have fun. 

★ Best House Features: 

  • 10 beds and 20 bathrooms for 28 guests
  • Private pool, complimentary hot tub, and sauna are also available
  • Game room with a pool table, arcade machines, and basketball hoops

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest:

“This was an awesome family vacation in a lovely location. We never left the property as there was plenty to do for all ages from 2 to 83. The yard and pool, fire pit, game room were big hits. The beds were so comfortable and rooms dark and well insulated from neighboring rooms and temperatures were individually controlled. The kitchen with 2 ovens and 2 dishwashers and lots of space was fabulous for cooking large meals. Highly recommend !” – Linna R.

➜ Book Now

3. Sunset Shores Resort – Mooresville, NC 

Come to Sunset Shores Resort for the ultimate lakefront experience. This magnificent resort features two gorgeous homes with over 11,000 square feet of luxury living space situated on 500 feet of pristine Lake Norman shoreline. If you’re seeking relaxation or adventure, this property has unparalleled privacy and resort-style amenities, offering multiple entertainment zones both indoors and outdoors, making it perfect for large groups and family reunions.

★ Best House Features:

  • 13 bedrooms and 12 bathrooms for 38 guests across two homes
  • Private beach area, 3 docks, boat ramp, boardwalk, multiple fire pits, and full bar area
  • Multiple game rooms with pool tables, arcade machines, shuffleboard, air hockey, and ping pong

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“Property was Amazing! It Fit our needs completely. We had 27 people staying at the property and it was big enough that we weren’t running into each other! Fire Pit & the outdoor Fire place was a hit. Property manager was in constant contact with us! Thank You!”  – Ted B.

➜ Book Now

4. Park View – Palm Springs, CA 

Tucked away in the desert, you’ll find Park View just minutes from Downtown Palm Springs. This beautiful three-bedroom home is ideal for small families and groups seeking relaxation and entertainment. The property has stunning mountain views, creating an oasis perfect for soaking up the California desert sun. With its prime location and thoughtful amenities, it is a perfect home for an unforgettable Palm Springs retreat.

★ Best House Features:

  • 3 bedrooms and 2 bathrooms for 6 guests
  • Private pool, hot tub, outdoor fire pit, and outdoor kitchen with patio seating
  • Pool table and detached game room with foosball & arcade machines

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: “We had a great time, very relaxing. Exceeded our expectations. We had a few questions about the pool and spa and a few other things and they were always responsive. House was spotless. We cooked a lot and the kitchen had everything we needed. We are already talking about coming back!” – Courtney H.

➜ Book Now

5. Calico Scallop – Destin, FL 

Next stop, Destin. Calico Scallop is a chic coastal haven that is perfect for group getaways. If you are looking to make the most of your Destin vacation, this home puts you just steps away from the pristine Crystal Beach Park. The property seamlessly creates an atmosphere where memories are made effortlessly, whether you’re here for family fun, a friend’s getaway, or a special celebration. 

★ Best House Features:

  • 5 bedrooms and 5 bathrooms for 14 guests
  • Private pool, hot tub, pack and play, and high chair are available
  • Two game areas: upstairs lounge with foosball and shuffleboard, plus game garage with turf putting green, ping pong, and arcade machines

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“The property was well maintained and had many options for the children and adults to have fun. Any questions or concerns that we had were easily communicated to the management team who quickly answered and resolved everything. Overall a great experience!” – Richard B.

➜ Book Now

6. Marco Polo Lodge – Smoky Mountains, TN

A four-level Smoky Mountain cabin where the fun is stacked floor by floor. Marco Polo Lodge gathers up to 28 guests against a backdrop of misty mountain views, with decks on nearly every level for morning coffee, sunset grilling, and long conversations that outlast dinner. Downstairs is where the kids disappear to — and where the adults follow about an hour later. Great Smoky Mountains National Park, Dollywood, and Ripley’s Aquarium are all a short drive away, with over 800 miles of trails waiting whenever the group is ready to move.

★ Best House Features:

  • 8 bedrooms and 9 bathrooms for 28 guests, every bedroom ensuite with its own TV
  • Game room with billiards, foosball, and classic arcade games, plus a theater room with futons that double as extra sleeping space
  • Private indoor pool for year-round swimming, bubbling hot tub, multiple decks, and double dining tables built for big group meals

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“”It was a great place to stay for a larger group. Every bedroom had its own bathroom attached which was very convenient. The management company was very responsive.” – Mridula

➜ Book Now

7. Slice of Heaven – Temecula, CA

Offering breathtaking views and a serene escape from the hustle and bustle of everyday life, Slice of Heaven is a peaceful 20-acre property in Temecula. This 2,500 sq ft modern home features stunning views of Lake Skinner, rolling hills, and mesmerizing sunsets. Located just 20 minutes from some of the best wineries in the region, this tranquil retreat is the best place to relax, truly unwind, and reconnect with nature while having fun adventures.

★ Best House Features:

  • 3 bedrooms and 3 bathrooms for 11 guests
  • Game room with full-size pool table, Pacman and NBA arcade game machines, 110″ projector screen, and ping pong table
  • 6-person jacuzzi, private sports court, and 360° view tower overlooking Lake Skinner

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“This place was absolutely amazing. It’s a little far from civilization, but absolutely worth it. There’s so much peace and quiet and privacy. It has everything you need and then some. They think about everything, stuff for the kids, games, and the hot tub is amazing. The company that manages is absolutely amazing. Can’t wait to stay there again!” – Steven L.

➜ Book Now

8. Makaha Villa – Waianae, HI

Add this new tropical escape to your vacation list: Makaha Villa in Oahu‘s prestigious gated Makaha Valley community. Nestled in a quiet cul-de-sac, this sunny 4-bedroom haven offers breathtaking mountain and ocean views from an oversized outdoor space, positioned just a 7-minute drive from the famous Makaha Beach. You’ll enjoy unparalleled privacy and exclusive access to upscale community amenities that make your Hawaiian experience memorable.

★ Best House Features:

  • 4 bedrooms and 2 bathrooms for 10 guests
  • Game room with foosball, pool table, mini putting green, and basketball arcade game
  • Community pool, fitness center, communal spa, plus private outdoor space 

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“We had an amazing time in Oahu! We were surrounded by beautiful scenery, peace, and quiet. The house was amazing and had everything we needed and more! We were sad to leave for sure, but would absolutely book again through AvantStay! Thank you for a wonderful place to stay while on vacation!” – Maria M.

➜ Book Now

9. Villa del Gallo – Bermuda Dunes, CA

Villa del Gallo brings opulent desert luxury with a game room that doesn’t quit. This Coachella Valley estate features a sleek 9-piece game room plus a sun-drenched backyard built for big-group hangs. With both a main house and a separate casita, your crew gets all the privacy of a compound without splitting up the party.

★ Best House Features:

  • 7 bedrooms (main house + casita) and 5 bathrooms for 16 guests
  • Private pool, hot tub with in-water sun loungers, colossal firepit, rooftop terrace, putting green
  • Loaded game room with mini basketball hoops, air hockey, foosball, pool table, shuffleboard, poker table, two arcade games, and a full bar

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“I 100% recommend this stay! The home was absolutely beautiful & there is so much to do with the pool, game room & ping pong table outside! Every room was decorated so beautifully & I really felt like we were staying at a luxury Airbnb.” – Isabella

➜ Book Now

10. Haven Grove – St. Augustine, FL

We solemnly swear we saved something special for last. Haven Grove is a bright, cheerful, and newly remodeled bungalow. It perfectly captures the magic of America’s oldest city, St. Augustine. Located just a 5-minute walk from pristine Atlantic beaches and two blocks from stunning Tolomack River sunsets, this home offers the rare opportunity to experience both oceanfront and riverside beauty. 

★ Best House Features:

  • 4 bedrooms and 3 bathrooms for 8 guests
  • Converted garage with putting green, table tennis, arcade games, and a synthetic turf lounge area
  • Hot tub, fire pit, tiki bar, hammock, and screened-in back porch

★ Hear from Our Recent Guest: 

“This vacation gateway is a dream come true for anyone looking to relax by the sea. This house is perched just few minutes walk from quiet, sandy beach, offering breathtaking view. Surrounded by towering exotic trees and vibrant tropical plants, the property is an oasis of peace and natural beauty.” – Mariusz J.

➜ Book Now

Benefits of Game Rooms for Families and Friends

Vacation rentals with game rooms and arcade machines go beyond just providing a place to stay. But they create opportunities for fun, connection, and lasting memories. Whether it’s kids battling it out in arcade games, parents enjoying a round of pool, or the whole group bonding over multiplayer challenges, these home additions will make sure that everyone is entertained and engaged throughout the trip.

Entertainment and Bonding for Families and Groups During Vacations

Game rooms serve as natural gathering spaces that bring people together through interactive activities, collaboration, and friendly competition. Unlike passive entertainment, gaming requires face-to-face interaction, eliminating everyday distractions and strengthening relationships.

These spaces offer something for everyone, from competitive players to casual participants, ensuring no one feels left out of the vacation fun. Pool tournaments, arcade challenges, and multiplayer gaming sessions create memorable moments and shared stories that families and friends will treasure for years.

Weather-Proof Fun with Indoor Entertainment Options

Game rooms provide guaranteed entertainment regardless of weather conditions, serving as the perfect backup plan when outdoor activities aren’t possible. Whether facing unexpected storms at coastal destinations or extreme temperatures at mountain retreats, families can spend hours enjoying arcade games, tournaments, and gaming sessions without feeling trapped indoors.

Even during perfect weather, game rooms extend entertainment into evening hours, offering relaxed fun that doesn’t require leaving the property.

Nostalgia and Multi-Generational Gaming Experiences

Perhaps the most magical aspect of vacation game rooms is their ability to bridge generational gaps through shared gaming experiences. Classic arcade machines and pinball tables allow grandparents to share stories and teach strategies from their youth, while younger generations introduce older family members to modern gaming systems. 

This creates natural learning opportunities and mutual respect across age groups. Many families develop new traditions around game room activities, from annual tournaments to special gaming challenges, strengthening bonds and creating anticipation for future vacations together.

Even More Amenities

If arcade games aren’t your thing, hundreds of our vacation rentals come equipped with classic games like billiards, shuffleboard, ping pong, and more. And we have so much more to offer when it comes to extraordinary amenities.

Check out these other posts where we get into more of what makes AvantStay a cut above the rest:

Game Over for Boring Vacations – Book with AvantStay!

Why settle for another ordinary getaway when you could unlock the ultimate vacation experience? 

AvantStay’s luxury home rentals have premium game rooms that turn downtime into game time, rainy days into tournament days, and family gatherings into legendary competitions. 

From classic arcade machines that’ll transport you back in time to family-friendly gaming setups that’ll blow your mind, we’ve curated our best homes where every guest becomes a winner.

Ready to press start on memories that’ll last a lifetime? Your high score vacation is just one click away with AvantStay, and every stay is an achievement worth unlocking. Book a home with us today!

➜ Book Now

Why Where You Stay Can Make or Break a Trip (The Case for Not Skimping on Accommodation) 2026

When you’re splitting costs across a group, it’s tempting to focus on saving a few hundred dollars on your rental. But that cheaper option usually reveals its true cost after you arrive: the location that looked close on the map adds daily commutes, the kitchen that seemed functional is missing what you need to actually cook, and the host who was responsive before booking has gone silent now that you need help. The case for not skimping on accommodation becomes clear when you add up the time lost, stress accumulated, and experiences missed because your home base wasn’t actually working for you. Spending appropriately on where you stay often means spending less overall while actually enjoying your trip.

TLDR:

  • Your accommodation drives trip quality through location, comfort, and service responsiveness.
  • Groups save money with vacation rentals vs. hotels: often $750+ per night for comparable space.
  • Poor sleep, long commutes, and missing amenities compound into trip-ruining frustration.
  • Professional management delivers consistent cleanliness and 24/7 support across every property.
  • AvantStay manages 2,300+ luxury vacation homes with full-service operations and technology-powered convenience.

Location Determines Your Daily Experience

Where you stay sets the rhythm for your entire trip. A poorly chosen location turns what should be a relaxing getaway into a series of compromises, with hours lost to traffic and spontaneous plans abandoned because they’re too far out of reach.

Think about how your day actually unfolds. You wake up, head out to experience the area, and return to recharge. If your rental is 45 minutes from the beach you wanted to visit daily, or an hour from the ski slopes, you’re losing time that could be spent actually enjoying yourself. That commute adds up fast over a week-long stay.

Location shapes spontaneity too. A well-situated property lets you grab breakfast at that local cafe everyone raves about, walk to a sunset viewpoint, or make last-minute dinner reservations downtown without a second thought. Poor placement locks you into rigid schedules built around drive times and parking availability.

Aerial view of a luxurious vacation rental property in an ideal location, modern architecture nestled near a pristine beach with turquoise water, surrounded by palm trees and lush greenery, walking distance to coastal attractions, golden hour lighting, premium residential area with mountain backdrop in distance, inviting outdoor pool and patio visible, perfect proximity to both nature and amenities, aspirational vacation destination aesthetic

Comfort and Amenities Set the Tone for Your Trip

A poor night’s sleep on vacation ripples through everything that follows, sapping the energy you need to see the sights, connect, or simply enjoy the moment. When you’re investing in a trip, the last thing you want is to drag yourself through it because the bed was terrible or the air conditioning gave up.

The right amenities remove friction before it starts. A functional kitchen lets your group gather over coffee instead of wasting an hour hunting down breakfast. Quality bedding and blackout curtains deliver the rest you actually need. Hot water that lasts through multiple showers means no one begins their day irritated.

Cutting corners here creates problems that compound. A sagging couch feels manageable on day one but unbearable by day four. Missing basics like sufficient towels, reliable WiFi, or a working coffee maker turn small annoyances into ongoing frustrations, especially across a group and multiple days.

Service Quality Impacts Stress Levels

Things go wrong on trips. Locks malfunction, appliances quit, questions arise at midnight. The difference between a minor hiccup and a ruined vacation comes down to who’s on the other end when you reach out for help.

Responsive service absorbs stress before it spreads. A water heater failure handled within an hour becomes a story you laugh about later. The same problem ignored for 12 hours becomes the defining memory of your trip, overshadowing every positive detail about the property itself.

Guest satisfaction depends on cleanliness, listing accuracy, communication responsiveness, check-in ease, location, and amenity quality. But cleanliness and communication sit at the top because they signal whether someone’s actually accountable. When something breaks and no one answers, stress compounds across your entire group. When help arrives immediately, problems stay small and forgettable, just as clear house rules prevent issues before they start.

Budget Allocation Can Enhance the Entire Journey

Spending more on your rental often means spending less overall. Accommodation accounts for 40 to 50% of travel budgets, but treating it as the foundation of your trip changes the economics across everything else.

A property with a full kitchen removes the need to eat out three times a day. When you’re traveling with a group, cooking even half your meals can save hundreds of dollars. Proximity to attractions cuts Uber costs, parking fees, and gas expenses that quietly drain budgets over a week. Those savings add up faster than you’d expect.

Time has value too. A centrally located property with the amenities you actually need means fewer errands, less driving, and more hours spent doing what you came for.

Different Accommodation Types Serve Different Group Needs

Hotels work fine for solo travelers or couples. For groups, the economics break down quickly. Four hotel rooms at $250 each means $1,000 per night with everyone scattered across floors, no common space to gather, and no way to cook a meal together. A single vacation home with four bedrooms costs less while keeping everyone under one roof.

Group travel requires shared spaces that hotels can’t provide. You need a kitchen where everyone can cook breakfast together, a dining table where eight people can sit comfortably, and living areas where conversations can stretch into the evening without disturbing strangers through thin walls.

Different groups have different requirements beyond square footage. Families with young kids need multiple bathrooms, childproofing, and outdoor space where children can play safely. Corporate teams need reliable WiFi, presentation-ready TVs, and quiet areas for focused work. Friend groups want entertainment like pool tables, hot tubs, and outdoor kitchens that turn the property into the destination.

Specialty accommodations matter more than most people think. Pet-friendly properties command 22% higher rates on average, while accessible accommodations for guests with disabilities see 67% higher loyalty rates. When your property matches your needs exactly, you’re willing to pay more and return again.

Factor

Hotels (4 Rooms)

Vacation Rental (4 Bedrooms)

Nightly Cost

$1,000+ for four separate rooms at $250 each

$600-$800 for entire property with shared spaces

Common Space

No shared gathering areas; limited to individual rooms or public hotel spaces

Full kitchen, oversized dining table, multiple living areas for group activities

Meal Flexibility

Requires eating out for all meals or limited in-room options; adds $150+ daily for group

Full kitchen lets you cook together; saves $500-$1,000+ weekly on dining out

Privacy & Noise

Separate rooms across floors with thin walls; strangers in adjacent rooms

Entire group under one roof with private outdoor space and no shared walls

Amenities Included

Basic room amenities; pool tables, hot tubs, and entertainment require visiting common areas

Property-specific features like pools, fire pits, outdoor kitchens, game rooms exclusively for your group

Check-in Experience

Front desk coordination during business hours; potential wait times during peak periods

Smart lock access with flexible arrival times; app-based check-in eliminates waiting

Design and Atmosphere Create Lasting Memories

Luxurious vacation rental interior with an oversized wooden dining table set for a group gathering, modern comfortable furniture arranged around a cozy fireplace, warm ambient lighting from designer fixtures, large windows showing evening sky, elegant contemporary decor with natural textures, inviting atmosphere perfect for creating memories, premium home aesthetic, warm color palette

The spaces where memories happen matter more than most people realize. A beautifully designed property creates a backdrop that lifts every moment, from morning coffee to late-night conversations. People photograph and share spaces that inspire them, and those images become part of the trip’s story long after everyone returns home.

Thoughtful design encourages interaction in ways generic spaces never do. An oversized dining table pulls groups together for meals that stretch into hours. A fire pit naturally gathers people as the evening cools, much like lakeside properties create natural gathering spots. Well-chosen furniture and lighting create pockets where conversations deepen instead of scattering across a bland room.

Aesthetic details signal care and intention. When a property feels curated instead of thrown together, guests relax into the experience differently. They’re more present, more willing to linger, more likely to build the kinds of moments they came for in the first place.

Technology and Convenience Define Expectations

Today’s travelers expect tech that gets out of the way. Smart locks, app-based check-in, and instant communication aren’t extras. When you arrive tired from travel, coordinating key handoffs or tracking down property managers wastes precious time you’d rather spend relaxing.

Properties with strong tech infrastructure see 20% fewer guest service issues and 18% higher satisfaction scores. Smart thermostats adjust from your phone. Digital guidebooks answer questions instantly. Contactless entry means you’re unpacked while others wait for check-in instructions.

Compare that to manual systems where emails go unanswered for hours, WiFi passwords disappear, and time zone differences delay responses. Each friction point chips away at your vacation before it starts.

Safety and Cleanliness Are Non-Negotiable

You can’t relax if you don’t feel safe. Security features like smart locks, exterior cameras, and monitored noise levels protect both your belongings and your peace of mind. Properties in questionable neighborhoods or lacking basic safety infrastructure put your group at risk no matter how nice the interior photos look.

Cleanliness isn’t about appearances. It’s about health, comfort, and trust. 81% of guests rank cleanliness as one of the top factors affecting their accommodation choice, and for good reason. A property that looks clean but smells musty, has stained linens, or shows visible dirt in corners tells you no one’s paying attention to what matters.

Professional operators use standardized checklists and inspection protocols between every stay. Independent hosts might clean thoroughly or might not, and you won’t know until you unlock the door. That inconsistency creates anxiety during booking and disappointment on arrival. Rigorous standards cost more to maintain, but they remove the gamble.

Professional Management Delivers Consistency at Scale

The vacation rental marketplace suffers from an inconsistency problem. One listing might be spotless with instant support; the next could disappoint with an unresponsive host. Individual property owners manage to their own standards, creating wildly variable experiences even within the same neighborhood.

Professional operators solve this by controlling the entire property lifecycle. Every home receives the same rigorous inspection. Every guest reaches the same support team. Every cleaning follows identical protocols. What works gets replicated across hundreds of properties instead of being trapped in a single well-run listing.

When every touchpoint is managed internally, quality stops being a gamble. The property you see is the property you get.

Final Thoughts on Making Smart Accommodation Decisions

Your lodging choice ripples through every part of your trip. Where you stay affects how much time you waste in traffic, whether your group can cook together or eat out for every meal, and if broken appliances become minor inconveniences or vacation-ruining stress. The right property does more than house you. It gives you back time, money, and energy to spend on what you actually came for.

How does location affect the overall cost of your vacation?

A centrally located property reduces transportation costs like Ubers, parking fees, and gas that add up quickly over a week, while proximity to attractions gives you more time to enjoy activities rather than sitting in traffic. The savings on daily commuting often offset a higher nightly rate.

What amenities should groups prioritize when booking accommodation?

Groups benefit most from a full kitchen for shared meals, multiple bathrooms to avoid morning bottlenecks, and common spaces like oversized dining tables and outdoor areas where everyone can gather comfortably. These features turn your rental into a hub for connection rather than just a place to sleep.

Why does professional management matter more than individual host reviews?

Professional operators apply the same inspection protocols, cleaning standards, and support systems across their entire portfolio, eliminating the inconsistency you face with individual hosts who manage to their own varying standards. You get predictable quality instead of gambling on whether this particular host maintains their property well.

How much should accommodation represent in your total travel budget?

Accommodation typically accounts for 40 to 50% of travel budgets, but investing more here often reduces overall spending since properties with full kitchens, central locations, and included amenities eliminate the hidden costs of eating out every meal and constant transportation. The right property pays for itself through savings elsewhere.

What’s the difference between booking a vacation home versus multiple hotel rooms for groups?

A vacation home keeps your entire group under one roof with shared spaces for cooking and gathering, typically costing less than booking multiple hotel rooms that scatter everyone across floors with no common area. Four hotel rooms at $250 each means $1,000 per night with no kitchen, while a comparable four-bedroom home costs less and functions as your trip’s social hub.

Best Places to Visit in Utah

Utah is a state of contrasts, from stunning red rock landscapes to snow-covered mountains, offering outdoor adventures that few places can match. Visitors come year-round to explore its natural beauty, unique cities, and countless activities. Whether you’re wandering desert valleys or alpine peaks, every corner of Utah tells a story.

The cities themselves make excellent bases for exploring the surrounding attractions while offering their own character. Salt Lake City, the state capital, combines rich history with vibrant culture. And Park City brings world-class skiing and renowned film festivals to the mountains.

Utah’s Top Destinations

Ready to start planning your Utah getaway? Book your stay at AvantStay properties in Utah for comfortable accommodations near the state’s top attractions. Here’s a guide to help you choose the best spots to visit:

About Utah: The Beehive State

Utah became the 45th state on January 4, 1896, after nearly five decades as a territory. Its long journey to statehood stemmed from disagreements between federal authorities and local leaders. Despite the delays, Utahns built thriving communities across the desert landscape.

The state’s name likely honors the Ute tribe, meaning “people of the mountains,” though some scholars suggest it comes from an Apache word for “those that are higher up.” From ancient times to today, Utah’s towering peaks have shaped life here.

Mormon pioneers, led by Brigham Young, arrived in the Salt Lake Valley in 1847, designing irrigation systems that turned dry land into productive farms. Long before European contact, Native peoples like the Ute, Paiute, Shoshone, Goshute, and Navajo tribes thrived here. Ancient groups such as the Anasazi left behind cliff dwellings that continue to fascinate modern visitors.

The completion of the transcontinental railroad at Promontory Summit in 1869 transformed Utah, attracting settlers and shaping the state’s economy. Today, tourism, technology, and outdoor recreation define Utah’s vibrant economy.

Utah’s Mighty Five National Parks

Utah’s five stunning national parks—Zion, Bryce Canyon, Arches, Canyonlands, and Capitol Reef—offer incredible red rock landscapes and outdoor adventures year-round. From hiking scenic trails to photographing dramatic canyons, these natural wonders make Utah a bucket-list destination for nature lovers.

Zion National Park

Zion Canyon showcases towering sandstone cliffs carved by the Virgin River over millions of years. Famous trail like The Narrows draws hikers from around the world, with shuttle access available most of the year.

Scenic drives, accessible paths like Pa’rus Trail, and iconic routes like the Zion–Mount Carmel Highway offer incredible views. With Springdale at the entrance and year-round access, it’s one of the most visited parks in the U.S., making advance planning essential.

Arches National Park

Arches National Park holds more than 2,000 natural stone arches, including the world-famous Delicate Arch. Visitors explore landmarks through the Windows Section, Devil’s Garden, and viewpoints along the 36-mile scenic drive.

With Fiery Furnace hikes requiring permits and summer heat often above 100°F, spring and fall make the best times to visit. Close to Moab’s amenities, the park offers dramatic red rock scenery with sunrise and sunset lighting up the formations.

Bryce Canyon National Park

Bryce Canyon National Park amphitheaters are filled with thousands of hoodoos—tall, thin rock spires unlike anywhere else on earth. Popular viewpoints like Sunrise Point and Sunset Point overlook the colorful landscape.

Trails such as Queens Garden and Navajo Loop take visitors among the formations, while the park’s high elevation brings cooler summers and snowy winters. Its clear night skies and scenic overlooks make Bryce a year-round favorite.

Canyonlands National Park

Shaped by the Colorado and Green Rivers, Canyonlands National Park spreads across four districts, each with a unique landscape. Island in the Sky offers the easiest access with famous sights like Mesa Arch and Grand View Point.

The Needles and The Maze provide deeper backcountry experiences, with White Rim Road offering challenging overland travel. With fewer visitors than other Utah parks, Canyonlands delivers wide-open views and a true sense of wilderness.

Capitol Reef National Park

Capitol Reef National Park‘s defining feature is the Waterpocket Fold, a 100-mile geological wrinkle forming cliffs, canyons, and colorful layers. The historic Fruita area preserves pioneer orchards, scenic drives, and ancient petroglyphs.

Hiking trails like Hickman Bridge and backroads to Cathedral Valley offer stunning views with fewer crowds than other parks. With Torrey nearby for lodging and exceptionally dark skies, Capitol Reef is perfect for quiet exploration.

Top Cities and Towns to Discover in Utah

Beyond the parks, Utah’s charming cities and towns blend outdoor recreation with local culture and history. Explore Park City’s mountain town vibes, Salt Lake City’s urban attractions, or Moab’s adventure sports scene for unforgettable experiences.

Salt Lake City

Nestled at the foot of the Wasatch Mountains, Salt Lake City offers easy access to ski resorts and hiking trails. Temple Square stands at the heart of downtown, surrounded by beautiful gardens and historic buildings. The Natural History Museum of Utah brings fossils and geology exhibits to life for all ages.

The walkable streets are filled with restaurants, shops, and nightlife, while venues from the 2002 Winter Olympics remain for sports enthusiasts. Families enjoy Liberty Park’s playgrounds, ponds, and green spaces, and Red Butte Garden offers a tranquil escape. With multiple airports and highways nearby, Salt Lake City serves as an ideal starting point for exploring the state.

Park City

In winter, Park City transforms into a snowy paradise with Park City Mountain Resort and Deer Valley Resort offering world-class skiing. Historic Main Street preserves mining-era, now home to galleries, shops, and restaurants.

Each January, the Sundance Film Festival brings filmmakers and celebrities to town. During summer, hiking, mountain biking, and zip-lining fill the outdoors. Utah Olympic Park preserves Olympic history with thrilling demonstrations and activities. Just 45 minutes from Salt Lake City, Park City perfectly comes with big-city amenities.

Moab

Surrounded by dramatic red rock formations, Moab is an adventure hub. The Colorado River invites rafting and kayaking, while mountain bikers flock to trails like the Slickrock Trail. Arches and Canyonlands National Parks are just a short drive away.

Downtown offers restaurants, galleries, and shops in a compact area, though the town swells during peak seasons. Nearby Dead Horse Point State Park rewards visitors with incredible overlooks. Moab has earned its reputation as the Southwest’s outdoor recreation headquarters.

St. George

St. George is Utah’s southwestern corner, which stays warm year-round and is perfect for winter escapes. Snow Canyon State Park showcases red rock formations ideal for hiking and climbing, and Zion National Park is less than an hour away.

Historic homes, St. George Temple, and golf courses make the town appealing for history buffs and outdoor enthusiasts alike. Nearby Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park also offers a unique desert experience. And St. George works wonderfully as a winter escape from colder climates.

Ogden

Ogden has a railroad history with a lively modern downtown centered on Historic 25th Street, full of restaurants, bars, and eclectic shops. Union Station explores the region’s train heritage, while nearby Ogden Canyon and Pineview Reservoir offer quick access to scenic drives and summer water activities.

Snowbasin Resort delivers world-class skiing, and the Bear River Migratory Bird Refuge attracts wildlife lovers year-round. With more affordable living costs than other Wasatch Front cities, Ogden maintains a friendly, relaxed atmosphere that makes visitors feel welcome.

Provo

Home to Brigham Young University, Provo has a young, energetic vibe with cultural events, museums, and a growing downtown filled with new restaurants and entertainment. The Provo River and Provo Canyon offer fishing, scenic drives, and recreation throughout the year.

Mount Timpanogos provides trails for every skill level, while Utah Lake creates space for sailing and paddleboarding. Festivals, concerts, and the BYU Museum of Art keep the city’s cultural scene active, all with the Uinta Mountains just a short drive away.

Cedar City

Cedar City proudly lives up to its “Festival City” nickname, especially during the Utah Shakespeare Festival. Southern Utah University enriches the small town with arts, education, and performances, while the historic downtown offers cozy shops and cafés.

Just outside town, Cedar Breaks National Monument and Brian Head Resort provide easy access to hiking, skiing, and scenic views. More affordable than busy tourist destinations, Cedar City serves as a comfortable base for exploring national parks and enjoying its strong arts community.

Logan

Surrounded by mountains, Logan offers four-season recreation, scenic drives through Logan Canyon, and a charming downtown filled with Victorian-era buildings. Utah State University anchors the community with events, museums, and cultural programs.

Close to Bear Lake and its famous summer activities, the town comes with outdoor adventure and agricultural heritage. With local attractions like the American West Heritage Center and nearby Beaver Mountain for skiing, Logan keeps a small-town feel while offering plenty to explore.

Torrey

Torrey is a quiet, scenic town just minutes from Capitol Reef National Park, known for its peaceful atmosphere and friendly local cafés. Situated along Scenic Byway 12, it provides one of the most beautiful drives in the country.

Visitors enjoy access to remote hiking trails, red rock landscapes, locally made art, and stunning dark skies perfect for stargazing. Torrey offers a calm, less crowded base for exploring southern Utah’s hidden gems.

Green River

Positioned along I-70, Green River is a convenient stop for travelers heading between Utah’s national parks. The river invites fishing and floating, while the John Wesley Powell River History Museum shares stories of early exploration.

Known for its annual Melon Days festival and proximity to Crystal Geyser and remote Canyonlands areas, Green River offers budget-friendly lodging and wide desert views. It’s a practical, simple base for outdoor adventures.

Planning Your Visit: What You Need to Know

Best Time to Visit

Utah welcomes visitors year-round, but conditions vary widely by season. Summer brings extreme heat to southern destinations like Moab, while spring and fall offer the most comfortable hiking weather with lighter crowds. Winter transforms northern Utah into a snow-filled ski haven, with resorts like Park City receiving hundreds of inches of powder; meanwhile, southern parks remain open but may have icy trails that require extra caution.

Getting Around

Most people need a car to explore Utah since public transportation remains limited outside Salt Lake City. Fortunately, the state maintains excellent roads connecting all major destinations throughout the region. Scenic byways like Highway 12 and Highway 128 turn the drive itself into an attraction.

Booking Ahead

Planning ahead becomes essential for accommodations during peak seasons and major festival times. Park City lodging fills up fast when the Sundance Film Festival takes over in January. Gateway towns near national parks often sell out completely on summer weekends and holidays.

Staying Safe and Prepared

Utah’s high desert climate makes hydration and sun protection essential, as elevation and dry air intensify sun exposure and fatigue. Many popular trails and attractions now require permits or timed reservations, such as Fiery Furnace, and several backcountry areas. So checking park websites and planning ahead is key to avoiding unexpected closures or restrictions.

Utah Has Something for Everyone

The state truly offers activities suited to every fitness level and personal interest. Families discover easy walks and accessible viewpoints alongside challenging backcountry routes for experienced hikers. Cultural attractions in cities perfectly complement the natural wonders found in parks.

Make Utah Your Next Destination

Utah’s diverse landscapes create unforgettable experiences that draw people back year after year. The Mighty Five national parks showcase nature’s artistic power through millions of years of geology. Cities and towns also provide comfortable bases with their own attractions and character.

If you seek adventure sports, peaceful hikes, or cultural exploration, Utah delivers. The state has natural beauty, and each region offers something different to discover.

Don’t wait to experience everything Utah has to offer. Book your stay with AvantStay’s premier Park City vacation rentals and start planning your perfect Utah getaway. 

Sonder Alternatives: Best Aparthotel and Rental Options in 2026

The aparthotel management landscape shifted overnight when Sonder filed Chapter 7 bankruptcy in November 2025. Property owners who relied on their master-lease model suddenly had vacant units and zero transition support. The smartest hybrid hotel rental operators learned from that disaster and built revenue-share models that actually align with your property performance, eliminating the structural risk that bankrupted Sonder while delivering the institutional-grade operations your portfolio demands.

TLDR:

  • Revenue-share models align operator incentives with property performance, avoiding Sonder’s fatal fixed-lease structure.
  • Sonder’s bankruptcy left aparthotel owners with terminated leases and vacant units needing immediate repositioning.
  • Full-service management requires dynamic pricing, design optimization, and 24/7 operations in one partner.
  • Multi-channel distribution across 50+ platforms reduces dependency risk that collapsed Sonder’s Marriott-focused model.
  • AvantStay manages 2,300+ luxury properties with $5B AUM using tech-enabled operations and transparent owner portals.

What Is Sonder and How Does It Work?

Sonder operated as a tech-enabled aparthotel company that leased residential units and hotel spaces in urban markets, then re-rented them to travelers through digital booking channels. The company’s core model revolved around signing master leases with property owners, where Sonder took on the responsibility of furnishing, managing, and marketing the units while paying fixed rent to landlords regardless of occupancy.

The operational approach centered on standardization and tech integration. Sonder equipped properties with keyless entry systems, installed consistent furnishings across units, and provided guests with an app for check-in, support requests, and service coordination. This created a middle ground between traditional hotels and peer-to-peer rental marketplaces, offering travelers hotel-like consistency without front desk operations.

For property owners and managers, the Sonder model meant handing over long-term lease commitments to a single operator who managed all guest interactions, maintenance, and revenue operations. The company absorbed vacancy risk and operational overhead in exchange for lease control and the ability to set nightly rates above the fixed monthly rent paid to landlords.

Sonder wound down operations in November 2025 and entered Chapter 7 bankruptcy liquidation, leaving property owners and partners searching for alternative operators who could fill the aparthotel management gap.

Why Consider Sonder Alternatives?

Sonder’s abrupt shutdown in November 2025 left property owners and managers with terminated leases, disrupted cash flow, and vacant units requiring immediate repositioning. The company’s collapse wasn’t just a market exit but a complete operational halt through Chapter 7 liquidation, meaning no transition period or partnership continuity for the thousands of units in its portfolio.

The financial warning signs were severe. Sonder’s stock price plummeted from $200 to under $1 as the company struggled with prolonged system integration challenges tied to its Marriott partnership. These tech integration failures drained capital while simultaneously limiting distribution effectiveness, creating a cash crunch the company couldn’t survive.

For property owners evaluating alternatives, Sonder’s failure exposes critical structural risks in the aparthotel management space. Master-lease models create fixed rent obligations that operators must pay regardless of occupancy or market conditions. When demand softens or operational costs exceed projections, these rigid commitments become unsustainable liabilities.

The collapse underscores what property owners should prioritize in replacement partners: diversified distribution channels that don’t rely on a single booking platform, revenue-share arrangements that align incentives between owner and operator, and demonstrated financial reserves to weather market volatility. You need management partners with balance sheet strength and operational models that share risk rather than concentrating it on one party.

Best Sonder Alternatives in December 2025

AvantStay: Best Overall Alternative

We operate a tech-enabled portfolio of over 2,300 luxury properties using a revenue-share model that aligns our success directly with yours. Instead of Sonder’s failed master-lease approach, we earn only when your property performs, eliminating the structural risk that collapsed their business.

Our full-service management includes dynamic pricing across 75+ seasonal adjustments annually, award-winning interior design optimization, and institutional-grade operations. You get multi-channel distribution through 50+ OTAs plus exclusive premium partnerships with Marriott Homes & Villas and Capital One Premier Collection that Sonder could never stabilize.

The Lighthouse owner portal delivers real-time transparency on revenue, occupancy, and maintenance. Our 24/7 guest support includes concierge services and smart-home monitoring for risk management. We handle everything from permit coordination to neighbor relations with local field teams backed by national resources.

We’re the strongest Sonder replacement because we combine the operational sophistication aparthotel owners expect with a financially sustainable model built for luxury homes in leisure markets.

Vacasa

Vacasa manages approximately 40,000 properties across North America following its 2025 Casago merger. They offer full-service operations with local teams, centralized pricing tech, and distribution across major OTAs, including Airbnb, Vrbo, and Booking.com.

Their strength is geographic coverage and complete hands-off management for mid-market vacation rentals. However, massive scale means less personalized attention per property. Service quality fluctuates by market, and they lack the design expertise and luxury positioning that aparthotel properties require. Management fees typically run higher than ours for comparable service levels.

Evolve

Evolve runs a hybrid half-service model, charging around 10% of booking revenue. They handle marketing, pricing, and guest communication while you manage cleaning, maintenance, and on-site operations yourself.

This works for hands-on owners living near their properties who want marketing support while retaining operational control. But Evolve cannot provide the full-service, single-point accountability that aparthotel buildings need. You’re still coordinating vendors and handling operational issues directly.

onefinestay

Now part of Accor, onefinestay operates ultra-luxury rentals with white-glove concierge services in major global cities. They’re extremely selective, focusing on distinctive, high-character properties rather than scalable aparthotel operations.

Their prestige positioning serves owner-occupied second homes beautifully but lacks operational scalability for building owners with multiple standardized units. Limited U.S. coverage outside gateway cities makes them unsuitable for most aparthotel portfolios.

Top Villas

Top Villas distributes over 18,000 luxury homes across 150+ destinations with a strong Florida presence. They excel at marketing and guest acquisition through dedicated travel planners and concierge services.

However, they’re primarily a distribution layer, not a full operator. On-ground operations typically fall to local third-party managers or owners, creating fragmented accountability that cannot replace the integrated operations aparthotel buildings require.

Feature Comparison: Sonder vs Top Alternatives

The table below compares critical operational features across Sonder and leading alternatives, helping you evaluate which management partner best fits your aparthotel or rental property portfolio.

Feature

Sonder

AvantStay

Vacasa

Evolve

onefinestay

Top Villas

Operational Status

Bankrupt/Ceased Operations

Operating

Operating

Operating

Operating

Operating

Business Model

Master-lease (fixed obligations)

Revenue-share

Revenue-share

Revenue-share

Revenue-share

Marketing/Distribution

Full-Service Operations

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

No

On-Site Management

Was centralized/remote

Local + centralized

Local teams

Owner-managed

High-touch local

Third-party local

Dynamic Pricing Technology

Yes

Yes (75+ seasons)

Yes

Yes

Limited

Limited

Design & Staging Services

Yes

Yes

Limited

No

Selective

No

Owner Portal/Transparency

Yes

Yes (Lighthouse)

Yes

Yes

Limited

Yes

Multi-Channel Distribution

Was Marriott-focused

50+ channels including Marriott

Major OTAs

Major OTAs

Accor + OTAs

Global networks

24/7 Guest Support

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

The most critical differentiator is business model structure. Sonder’s master-lease approach created fixed rent obligations that became fatal when occupancy declined. Revenue-share models align operator incentives with your property performance, sharing both upside and downside risk.

Why AvantStay Is the Best Sonder Alternative

We designed our business to avoid the structural flaws that led to Sonder’s bankruptcy and Marriott deal collapse. Our revenue-share model means we only succeed when your property performs, aligning our financial incentives completely with yours rather than locking you into fixed-obligation leases that concentrate risk.

The aparthotel management sector demands operators who can deliver both tech sophistication and operational excellence. We provide both through our Lighthouse portal, offering real-time revenue tracking, occupancy analytics, and maintenance visibility that aparthotel owners require for portfolio oversight. Our dynamic pricing analyzes over 75 seasonal factors to optimize rates, while our award-winning design team maximizes property appeal and ADR potential.

What separates us from half-service providers is complete operational ownership. We handle guest communication, cleaning coordination, maintenance dispatch, and 24/7 support through our Butler concierge app. You get the integrated property management system that aparthotels need without operational fragmentation.

Our multi-channel distribution spans 50+ booking platforms, including exclusive partnerships with Marriott Homes & Villas and Capital One Premier Collection. With $5 billion in assets under management across 2,300+ properties, we have the financial stability and operational track record that former Sonder partners should demand.

Final Thoughts on Selecting Your Next Aparthotel Operator

The right aparthotel management partner combines operational excellence with a business model that aligns your success with theirs. Sonder alternatives like ours eliminate fixed-rent obligations in favor of revenue-share arrangements that distribute risk appropriately between owner and operator. Your portfolio deserves a partner with multi-channel distribution, award-winning design capabilities, and the financial stability to weather market shifts. Connect with our property partnerships team to see how we can optimize your aparthotel units.

FAQ

Why did Sonder fail, and what should you learn from it?

Sonder collapsed due to its master-lease model that created fixed rent obligations regardless of occupancy, combined with the failed Marriott system integration that drained capital. Property owners should prioritize revenue-share partnerships that align incentives and operators with diversified distribution channels plus proven financial reserves.

When should you consider switching from your current aparthotel operator?

If your operator uses a master-lease model that concentrates vacancy risk on them rather than sharing it with you, or if they rely heavily on a single booking channel without diversified distribution. Also consider switching if you lack real-time transparency into revenue, occupancy, and maintenance performance.

What features matter most when evaluating Sonder replacement partners?

Prioritize revenue-share models over fixed-lease arrangements, multi-channel distribution across 50+ platforms, including premium partnerships, full-service operations with local field teams, real-time owner portals for transparency, and demonstrated financial stability with substantial assets under management.

How does a revenue-share model protect property owners better than master leases?

Revenue-share arrangements align your operator’s success directly with your property performance, sharing both upside potential and downside risk. Unlike master leases, where operators pay fixed rent regardless of market conditions, revenue-share partners only earn when your property generates bookings, eliminating the structural risk that bankrupted Sonder.

Can aparthotel properties transition quickly to new management after operator failure?

Yes, but speed depends on having a full-service operator ready to assume all functions, including guest communication, cleaning coordination, maintenance dispatch, and 24/7 support. Half-service providers that leave operations to you create gaps, while integrated operators can take over immediately with minimal disruption to cash flow.

Shop, Ski, and See: 35 Best Things To Do in Park City

You and your crew just might end up leaving Park City, Utah in better shape than you arrived. Aside from being a primo skiing and snowboarding hotspot, the city’s main street is an adventure itself given all the uphill climbs involved in visiting its vast retail shops, art galleries, restaurants, and bars. If walking uphill is a battle, just hop on the city’s free shuttle bus, available year-round, or grab your snowshoes and enjoy the workout.

Another added bonus? There’s no reason to leave your fur babies behind. Lovingly referred to as “Bark City” by puppy parents of all stripes, this skier’s paradise is also a dog-friendly destination. Four-legged family members are welcome at many lodging properties, such as the AvantStay Picasso property, not to mention all the dog parks and dog-friendly trails surrounding the area.

One thing that’s impossible to find in Park City? A bad meal. Despite the town’s small population, this dining mecca boasts over 100 restaurants that attract foodies throughout the year. Locally sourced menus provide restaurant-goers with the full Park City dining experience, highlighting the agricultural and culinary chops the city has to offer. Everyone from vegetarians and meat lovers to sushi fanatics and pasta diehards can find something they like with Park City’s wide variety of options. Aside from the food itself, the views from these restaurants make for the perfect spectator spot. Relax and watch the parade of vacationing families, couples, and locals strolling past. Or just let the Rocky Mountain air kiss your face while you admire the purple mountains’ majesty.

Where to eat in Park City

1. Five5eeds is a breakfast spot owned by Australians who wanted to elevate the city’s breakfast scene. They offer tons of breakfast dishes, but the most recommended are the pulled pork benedict, mushrooms on quinoa toast, or a plate of Moroccan Shakshuka (baked eggs, feta, and a spice dip known as dukkha).

2. The Eating Establishment is a longtime local’s favorite that serves traditional breakfast foods all day. Some menu items include a loaded baked potato omelet, farfalle, and egg scramble, or you can go full-throttle southern and order a plate of biscuits and gravy.

3. Stop for lunch at RIME Seafood + Raw Bar after some skiing, or grab some food to go and keep on adventuring! RIME’s also has a sister property in St. Regis Deer Valley, RIME Seafood & Steak, which is open year-round.

4. On Historic Main Street, 350 Main offers seasonal favorites including a citrus vinaigrette splashed over orange slices, raspberries, and garden-fresh salad, best enjoyed with a glass of crisp rosé. For those looking to get their veggies in without eating leafy greens, they also offer an amazing plate of corn-on-the-cob served on a bed of orange-red Romesco sauce topped with a chartreuse cream of basil aioli.

5. Hearth & Hill is perfect for shareable plates of potato pierogies, or harvestable options such as an ahi poke bowl or winter salad. Cauliflower enchiladas are recommended, but if you’re starving it might be best to opt for short-rib pastrami.

6. Courchevel Bistro’s French chef, Clement Gelas, uses some of his native favorites to inspire his cuisine. A Talisker Club – the only four-club private community in the city, Courchevel Bistro was named for Park City’s sister city in the French Alps and is situated within the historic Coal & Lumber building where Main Street meets Heber Avenue.

7. Twisted Fern sources local, creative culinary ingredients meant to impress. Begin with a trout salad before biting into a black bean lentil burger – and save room for a plant-based dessert of lemon olive oil cake with strawberry-rhubarb compote and candied pistachio.

8. Dine in a private, heated bubble on the roof at the Kimball Terrace while enjoying the view of the mountains and street views from the rooftop.

Best bars

9. Head to St. Regis Bar to sip its signature 7452 Mary, an enticing blend of the St. Regis Bar’s famous Bloody Mary mix and Five Wives Vodka locally-distilled from Utah mountain spring water, served with a black salt rim and a wasabi-celery foam. Chef Matthew Harris also offers light fare to munch on in this modern mountain lounge.

10. Hearth & Hill is a locals’ gathering spot that offers guests the immersive experience to make-your-own Old Fashioned. You may prefer a Dragonfly Rita concocted with rabbit & grass tequila, alpine preserve, smoked pitaya and dragon fruit jam, lime, agave, and mint. This cocktail was a 2020 fan favorite of the Park City Cocktail Contest. There’s also food offered, whether shareable – potato pierogi, for example, or harvestable options such as an ahi poke bowl or winter salad. Cauliflower enchiladas are considered feast-able, but if you’re truly hungry, it might be best to opt for short-rib pastrami.

11. The Umbrella Bar at Canyon’s Village is a classic outdoor deck spot in the Resort Village, offering 360-degree views from its unique glass enclosure and a massive outdoor deck with a view of the village music stage. Along with a menu that features specialty hot dogs and burgers, there’s an extensive beer selection featuring draft and craft brews.

Best ski resorts in Park City

12. Outdoor activities are in full effect at Deer Valley Resort, a ski-only winter spot. Book your stay at AvantStay’s Scarlet property, a mere five minutes from Deer Valley Resort.

13. Park City Mountain is the largest ski resort in the country and the ideal place for snowboarders to enjoy in the winter months, and hikers, mountain bikers, alpine sliders, or eagle coasters in the summer. With over 400 miles of trails for hiking and biking, there’s plenty of terrain for visitors to enjoy some recreation.

Things to do for non-skiers

Within this ski-obsessed destination, there are several options to hit the slopes. You can book a place adjacent to the lifts, such as AvantStay’s Slopeside. But you don’t have to be a ski enthusiast to enjoy this destination.

14. Park City Wine Festival is a premier gathering event for master winemakers, culinary greats, and distinguished guests to play, wine, and dine. Lots of food, wine, and locally-made products are showcased during this ultimate food and wine experience that takes place annually at the end of September. Satisfy your palate with wine and food tastings and educate your palate during seminars and outdoor adventures with food and wine on the itinerary.

15. Savor the Summit, Park City’s biggest outdoor dinner party will return in 2024 to resume the annual June event that offers diners a unique celebration of fabulous food, drink, and live music right in the middle of Main Street. Park City’s best restaurants showcase their culinary talents in an open-air community celebration that requires no ticket to purchase. You do, however, need to make a reservation directly with a participating restaurant of your choice.

16. Park City Farmer’s Market is a seasonal market held on Wednesdays, from noon to 5 p.m. at Park City Resort from June through the end of October. This space is a great way to meet like-minded organic food enthusiasts on a “no-spray” quest – and to stock up on fresh local goods from Utah farmers and vendors. Arrive hungry to enjoy food truck offerings!

17. Park City Museum is open Wednesday through Sunday and provides the perfect introduction for newbies. Here, you’ll learn about the city’s rich history and culturally significant sites. You’ll realize why it has won numerous awards, accolades, and inclusion in national and international travel guides as a Top Ten attraction.

18. Sundance Film Festival, perhaps the most famous annual event, takes place here for seven days each year, beginning at the end of January. This is a place to rub elbows with celebrities during premieres, events, artist talks, and cutting-edge exhibitions. Adventurous audiences and indie film lovers are welcome to celebrate exciting new talent and creative visionaries.

19. For more than 50 years, the Park City Kimball Arts Festival has been a highly anticipated event. Lasting for three days in early August, more than 50,000 attendees converge on Main Street to browse and purchase art from a festival that ranks among the top art festivals in the country for artist sales and attendee experience.

20. Year-round action sports for all ages and levels are held at Woodward Park City, the ideal stop for beginners trying to learn something new. This state-of-the-art indoor action sports hub also spans more than 60 acres of outdoor action sports and mountain parks. If your interests include skiing, snowboarding, tubing, mountain biking, or skateboarding, this is the place to visit.

21. All Seasons Adventures provides instruction, high-quality gear, beverages, snacks, and a personalized experience focused on customer service. Fly fishing, trap shooting, and horseback riding are some summer activities offered here and wintertime options include snowshoeing winter fly fishing, and dog sledding.

22. Wasatch Excursions offers guided and non-guided ATV, UTV, and Snowmobile rentals.

23. Park City Yoga Adventures offers Zen-inducing yoga experiences such as silks yoga in a barn, outdoor yoga, and SUP yoga in a geothermal crater.

24. Escape Room Park City is the place to test your puzzle-solving skills through one of several experiences. Gather your friends to see how well you can work together to escape.

25. Summit Bike Share electric bike stations around town are available for use every day from spring through fall. This mode of transportation is a fun way to tour the area without worrying about the hills. There are annual and monthly memberships for those who want to ride the bikes regularly, or you can pay per ride. There’s an Official Summit Bike Share App where you can access membership information and bikes, and you can find this information at any station kiosk located near the bike docks.

26. Alpine Slide is meant for adrenal-rush seekers. Park City Mountain Village has a 3,000-foot luge-like track deemed one of the longest alpine coasters in the world, with multiple paths to choose from so sliders can experience a different ride each time.

27. Utah Outdoor Adventures is the place to sign up for customized snowshoeing experiences. This company focuses on outdoor experiences for small private groups.

Where to shop

28. Take a stroll along the picturesque Historic Main Street, the perfect place to window shop, peek inside a quirky gallery or two, and enjoy some downtime.

29. If you’re seeking souvenirs or sporting goods, you’ll want to stop for some retail therapy at the Resort Center at Park City Mountain Resort and Silver Lake Village at Deer Valley Resort. If you’re in the market for outdoor and travel clothing that ranges from base layers, lifestyle, and outerwear to help keep you cool and dry in the summer heat, head to Smartwood at the Resort Village at Canyons Resort.

30. For chain stores and more diverse shops, Redstone is the spot to browse through major retailers, fine shops, and food markets such as World Market, Whole Foods, and Bed Bath & Beyond. This is also where you can stop for dinner and a movie.

31. Outlet shopping is a fun sport unto itself, and there’s an outlet mall six miles north of the city on SR 224 with over 65 stores that include Nike, Polo Ralph Lauren, and J Crew.

32. Park Silly Sunday Market is a great way to spend your Sunday if only to people-watch and browse the unique artisan goods for sale. Bread, pies, hot dogs, and more farm-friendly food options are at every turn in this delicious open-air market open from early June through September, with street performers and music to entertain.

More fun

33. High West Distillery, founded in 2006, was the first to open in Utah following Prohibition. In fact, it was the first legal distillery since 1870 — even before Prohibition!). In 2016, Whisky Advocate named High West its “Distiller of the Year.” Plan a stop here to take an educational whiskey tour and experience a tasting.

34. Park City was a key location during the 2002 Salt Lake City Winter Olympic Games, where events included aerials, freestyle moguls, and alpine slalom ski events: snowboarding halfpipe; bobsledding; luge; and ski jumping. Today, U.S. Ski & Snowboard calls Park City home, and many of our nation’s Olympians use the city for training at Utah Olympic Park. Summer offerings include extreme tubing, alpine slides, bobsledding, ropes courses, and zip-lining. Two museums, the Alf Engen Ski Museum and the Eccles Salt Lake 2002 Olympic Winter Games Museum are free to visit and open year-round.

Whether you’re looking for a snow-filled getaway, a summertime adventure, or just a happy atmosphere with 19th-century architecture to admire, Park City is the place to be. It’s perfect for novice skiers/snowboarders and pros alike, as well as shopaholics, culinary buffs, museum-goers, and festival junkies. Book a stay at one of AvantStay’s Park City properties to experience the fun yourself.

Desert Destination: AvantStay’s 49 Things To Do in Scottsdale

No photograph will ever do a Sonoran desert sunset justice. It’s one of those things you have to experience in person. In Scottsdale, appreciate the rich spectrum of fiery corals, vibrant pinks, and deep purples reflected across the sandy Arizona landscape. And don’t experience it alone. Gather your loved ones – the more the merrier – and delight in all the things to do Scottsdale offers.

Scottsdale’s picturesque appeal extends beyond its natural landscapes. Between the rustic remnants of the Wild West and the city’s storied architectural legacy, you’re never at a loss for gorgeous scenery. There’s a reason Frank Lloyd Wright found Scottsdale so captivating.

Speaking of scenery, Scottsdale’s art scene is thriving. Make sure to hit up the Historic Art District, visit the galleries, and soak up the city’s vibrant culture.

Sure, there’s no shortage of great barbecue pits, Tex-Mex joints, and taquerias. And they are certainly satisfied. But Scottsdale offers a sophisticated, upscale dining scene as well, along with elegant cocktail lounges and an exciting club scene.

Or you can just relax in one of the city’s many spas. There’s no wrong way to enjoy Scottsdale. The only mistake is not visiting at all.

Old West hangouts

1. Scottsdale’s Museum of the West is considered an Old Town gem. Its mission is to immerse guests in the unique story of the Greater American Western region, highlighting the past and how it’s shaped our future. Considered the nation’s “Best Western Museum” by True West Magazine, this non-profit space showcases fine art, rare historic artifacts, and cultural treasures.

The modern exterior of Scottsdale's Museum of the West

2. Channel your inner cowboy at the family-owned MacDonald’s Ranch. Explore almost 3,000 acres of land on a trail ride by horse, stagecoach, or hay wagon, and then saddle up for a cowboy cookout.

3. The renowned Heard Museum is known for its exceptional Native American art and culture, both contemporary and historical. Every February, the Heard hosts the annual World Championship Hoop Dance Competition. Every March, they host the Heard Museum Guild Indian Fair & Market.

4. Scottsdale’s Country Western bars are perfect for visitors who enjoy live music and a colorful ambiance. Old Town’s Rusty Spur Saloon is filled with cowboy memorabilia and a few barstools, perfect for having a laugh with your friends. The Handlebar J Restaurant & Saloon has live music, headlining the famous Herndon Brothers Band Wednesday through Sunday. Frank Lloyd Wright’s Taliesin West is as legendary as the architect himself.

5. The natural beauty of the Sonoran Desert inspired him to settle down here each winter season, which led him to eventually open an architectural school, Taliesin West. Today, daily tours are available for those who’d like to peek inside Wright’s ingenious designs and innate ability to seamlessly blend indoor and outdoor spaces.

Best of the West dining

6. Bryan’s Black Mountain Barbecue is sure to satisfy a cowboy-sized hunger. The Food Network named Bryan’s with the best ribs in Arizona. More specialties at this hotspot in nearby Cave Creek include beef brisket and barbecue chicken. A vegetarian favorite is a plate of “pulled” squash, and Bryan’s famous Baked Potato Salad is highly recommended.

Front welcome sign for Bryan's Black Mountain Barbecue

7. Hand Cut Chop House is an Old Town chop house known for its fully grass-fed and grass-finished beef. For dessert, the house-made warm butter cake served with roasted peaches, caramel sauce, and sweet cream ice cream is drool-worthy.

8. Before dinner at LON’s at the Hermosa Inn, be sure to stop by the adjacent Last Drop bar to grab a cocktail. When you’re ready, head over to LON’s for some Arizona cuisine prepared with fresh, local ingredients by Chef Jeremy Pacheco.

9. Scottsdale’s favorite, Fat Ox, is sure to whet your appetite. Scottsdale’s Chef Matt Carter is known for his modern riffs on classic Italian dishes such as a 25-layer lasagna. For dessert, you’ll be hard-pressed to decide between the Meyer Lemon Tart or Gianduja Frangelico Tiramisu.

10. Post-stroll downtown, Sel is a worthy stop for fine dining. Chef Branden Levine serves cuisine that’s described as progressive contemporary American, serving a la carte or four-course, prix fixe meals.

11. Reserve a table at Old Town Tortilla Factory for a seat on the patio under the shade of 100-year-old pecan trees. You’ll want to arrive hungry to devour plates of Southwestern cuisine. Try a red chile pork chop with house-made ancho raspberry sauce, or pollo margarita chicken with cheese and roasted pepper stuffing topped with citrus tequila sauce.

Fairy lights surround the back patio of Old Town Tortilla Factory in Scottsdale

12. South of Old Town, Los Sombreros is all about authenticity, beginning with its cantina-style aesthetic. Its rustic cuisine includes classic homemade guacamole, crab enchiladas, mole poblano, and slow-roasted pork carnitas. When the server asks about dessert, be sure to say yes to the decadent Mexican chocolate pie.

13. At the helm of House Brasserie, Chef Brandon Jedd showcases his cutting-edge, modern American cuisine plates of House Carolina BBQ, Jerk Tomahawk Pork Chops, and Linz Umami Filet Mignon. Dine indoors in elegance, or more casually on the shaded, outdoor patio.

14. Elements restaurant at Sanctuary Resort on Camelback Mountain offers spectacular sunset views from its perch on the mountain. Food Network star, Chef Beau MacMillan, puts his best menu forward. The farm-fresh American cuisine incorporates sustainable seafood, hormone-free meats, and locally sourced organic produce.

15. Vegetarians will rejoice at FnB Restaurant in Old Town, with a wide range of unique, veggie-based menu offerings, among non-vegetarian options. James Beard Award winner Chef Charleen Badman leads the charge with a seasonal menu of fresh, locally-sourced ingredients and carefully curated artisan meats and cheeses. There’s also a pairing option with the Arizona wine program.

16. If you’re in the mood for modern Latin cuisine, you’ll want to take time to dine at The Mission, located in Old Town. Chef Matt Carter has crafted a 12-ingredient tableside guacamole and menu items that include roasted pork shoulder tacos and Linz bone-in ribeye with a sherry glaze.

A high-level interior view of The Mission in Scottsdale
Courtesy of The Mission’s Facebook

17. Virtú Honest Craft is located in Old Town’s Bespoke Inn. It’s the place for contemporary Mediterranean cuisine crafted by Chef Gio Osso. Order the hazelnut-crusted scallops and you won’t be disappointed. Or try the Moroccan-spiced lamb with smashed chickpeas and minted eggplant for a truly Mediterranean option.

18. Ocean 44 sources its seafood from around the world. This upscale, contemporary restaurant focuses on its relaxed space and menu of specialties such as New Bedford scallops, Alaskan king crab, and Wagyu filets.

19. If you’re craving pizza and beer, Craft 64 is the place to go. With more than 30 local beers on tap – and a few house brews – you’ll want to hang out here while you munch on homemade mozzarella and thin-crust, wood-fired pizza.

20. Carnivores will want to take a seat at Maple & Ash to bite into the Butcher’s Reserve 35-Day Dry-Aged Eisenhower, a 40-ounce porterhouse cooked to perfection directly on the coals. If you’re one of those diners who embraces the chef’s recommendation, go ahead and order the “I Don’t Give a F*@K” and leave it to the professionals to serve up your surprise dish.

21. In Paradise Valley, El Chorro’s classic menu options are as comforting as the scenery between Camelback and Mummy mountains – especially at sunset. Locals love the grilled filet mignon and old-fashioned broaster fried chicken plates. Try to resist an order of sticky buns. Good luck!

Indoor bar at El Chorro in Scottsdale

22. Weft & Warp Art Bar + Kitchen inside the Andaz offers a side of Camelback Mountain views with every order. Recommended plates include the Scallop Risotto with blackberry coulis or the Faroe Island Salmon with charred leeks and sweet corn puree.

Where to get your cardio

23. Get your heart pumping and hike Pinnacle Peak Summit Trail in the Sonoran Desert. This iconic north Scottsdale peak offers an exciting hike with steep switchbacks to the summit. You’ll be rewarded with stunning views of Scottsdale’s iconic, saguaro-studded landscape and massive granite rock formations. Ranked moderately difficult, the trail is approximately 3.5 miles round trip with a cumulative elevation gain of 1,300 feet.

24. The free Scottsdale ArtWalk has been a Scottsdale tradition for more than 45 years. Special exhibits, artist receptions, and live entertainment are offered from 7 p.m. to 9 p.m. every Thursday. For artistic explorations during the day, download the free Public Art Walking Tour. With the tour, spend an hour strolling Old Town discovering 10 beautiful works of art.

Two women look at paintings and other artwork within a gallery at Scottsdale's ArtWalk

25. The urban McDowell Sonoran Preserve has more than 225 miles of scenic shared-use trails in the McDowell Mountain foothills. One of the Preserve’s seven trailheads, The Gateway, leads to plenty of paths, some of which are even ADA accessible (Bajada Nature Trail). For a more challenging trail, head to Windgate Pass Trail.

26. Bring your step tracker to Scottsdale’s Fashion Square, where you’re sure to log several miles of shopping, with a bit of dining in the mix for much-needed fuel. Shops include A|X Armani Exchange, Anthropologie, Beach Bunny Swimwear, the Apple Store, and more. Enjoy happy hour options at Kona Grill (sushi and sake) and Nobu, two great spots for some upscale dining, as well as Francine, which offers more French Mediterranean on its menu.

Things to do in Scottsdale for golfers

27. Desert Golf awaits, and there are approximately 200 area courses in Scottsdale. Start at the high-caliber TPC Scottsdale and enjoy some classic rock music on the driving range.

28. Tee off on either of the Grayhawk par-72 courses. The Talon course may require some prior desert golfing experience, but the Raptor course is more traditional.

29. Troon North’s Pinnacle and Monument courses were designed by British Open Champion Tom Weiskopf. Tee up here for stunning views and challenging courses.

30. Re-designed from 27 to 18 holes by local architect Phil Smith, The Phoenician Golf Course is the newest in the area.

The Phoenician scenic golf course in Scottsdale surrounded by mountains and a reflection body of water

31. Want to play better golf? Allow the experts at Cool Clubs to analyze your swing characteristics and custom-fit you to a new set of high-quality clubs. Amateurs and advanced golfers alike are welcome.

Best spots for sightseeing and sips

32. Old Town Scottsdale is a walkable adventure to peruse specialty boutiques, art galleries, an arts district, and exhibitions at the Scottsdale Museum of Contemporary Art (SMoCA). Or, sip your way along the Scottsdale Wine or Ale trail before working up an appetite for dinner.

33. Once you’ve built up a thirst, AZ88 is the place to stop for a filled-to-the-rim martini (or two!) on the patio that overlooks Scottsdale Civic Center Park. Contemporary art displays provide unique surrounding visuals at this watering hole and present the perfect opportunity for people-watching.

34. The Scottsdale ArtWalk on downtown’s main street happens every Thursday evening from 7 p.m. to 9 p.m., with artist receptions and live entertainment. You can also download the walking tour and stroll for an hour or so to discover 10 works of art in the area on your own time.

35. At the Musical Instrument Museum, you’ll discover unique instruments and music from around the world. High-tech headphones, multimedia displays, and a hands-on Experience Gallery to play guitars, gongs, and gamelans are sure to get you jazzed.  

Stringed instruments hang on the walls of a display area within the Musical Instrument Museum in Scottsdale

36. Enjoy an air balloon ride to experience the Sonoran desert landscape at sunrise. Once landed, your basket buddies will toast to your first flight with a flute of champagne. Arizona Balloon Safaris in nearby Cave Creek is one of several options to book a flight.

37. Desert Botanical Garden in nearby Phoenix is worth the time to immerse yourself in the 50,000-plus desert flora among 140 acres. Once you’ve walked around a bit, take a seat at Gertrude’s, the garden restaurant on the property, to grab a bite to eat.

38. All things are aflutter at Butterfly Wonderland, a rainforest experience set in a tropical paradise with fluttering butterflies from all over the world.

39. Take a day trip to one of the world’s most amazing natural wonders, the Grand Canyon. Located north of Scottsdale, it’ll take you just over three hours to drive there.

40. Get in the fast lane at Octane Raceway with high-speed karts awaiting you in the driver’s seat. If you love virtual reality, you’ll want to stop at the Velocity VR arena. More fun includes mini-bowling and a full arcade to connect with your inner pinball wizard.

41. The Scottsdale Civic Center Mall is an urban oasis that offers the best people-watching among its almost three acres of picturesque public space. You may love this spot as much as Robert Indiana, the artist who built a L-O-V-E sculpture in the park. Museums, shops, and restaurants are within walking distance.

The letters L, O, V, & E, sculpted into a red statue in the Scottsdale Civic Center Mall

Cultural activities in Scottsdale

42. The late Italian architect Paolo Soleri created an art studio/architectural experiment with Cosanti. Mobiles made of earth-formed concrete in dome shapes seem to defy gravity, and they provide an enchanting backdrop for Soleri’s bronze wind bells that are transformed into modern art. You can actually watch the bronze pour if you call ahead for pour times.

43. The downloadable Scottsdale Architecture Driving Tour is a laid-back way to explore the Sonoran Desert’s rugged mountains, lush arroyos, and desert flora. You’ll see what inspired world-renowned architects to create nearly 40 masterpieces you’ll spot on this tour.

44. The McCormick-Stillman Railroad Park is a must-stop for old railway train aficionados. Entrance to the Railway Museum is free with park admission, and worth the stop to view the various memorabilia from the historic Peoria Depot, the Roald Amundsen Pullman Car, and more.

45. The OdySea Aquarium Voyager is new to this aquarium and offers complimentary admission to aquarium ticket holders. Take a seat in the stadium theatre with 46-foot viewing windows to watch the world’s only revolving aquarium experience.

Children watch two sharks swim within the OdySea Aquarium in Scottsdale

46. Save an evening to catch a performance at the Scottsdale Center for the Performing Arts, which offers traditional and contemporary arts through live performances from artists and speakers who create expressions of cultural heritage and diversity of thought.

Sonoran spa time

47. Spa Avania, located inside the spacious Hyatt Regency Scottsdale Resort and Spa at Gainey Ranch, is a comforting, quiet spot to heal, restore, and replenish yourself. The unique Desert Essence Body Wrap uses cactus flower-infused materials to rejuvenate your skin (minus the needles, of course). Apparently, trehalose, a natural sugar bacteria found inside a cactus plant, hydrates and holds onto the moisture in your body.

48. The lakeside Inspire Day Spa is the perfect spot for relaxing massage services for men and women. The effects of Margarete add to the successful results of their signature Inspire Massage, the most popular on the menu.

A woman receives a massage at a spa

49. Inspire Day Spa’s sister property, New Serenity Spa was voted the number-one spa in Scottsdale by USA Today. No matter which service you book, you’ll definitely leave with smoother, healthier-looking skin.

Whether you’re looking to relax or get your adrenaline pumping, Scottsdale is filled with tons of opportunities for both. Enjoy all that the land has to offer for nourishing your body from the inside out. Escape to this desert paradise to heal, explore, and discover new things! Book one of AvantStay’s Scottsdale properties to experience this land yourself.

23 Best Things to Do in Malibu in August 2026

Malibu is a beautiful coastal city located in Southern California. With its stunning beaches, picturesque mountains, and iconic attractions, Malibu is a popular travel destination for visitors from all over the world. In this blog post, we’ll explore the top 23 things to do in Malibu from outdoor adventures to wine tasting, from museums to shopping. 

What makes Malibu especially unique is how much variety it packs into one stretch of coastline. In a single day, you can surf legendary waves, hike canyon trails with sweeping ocean views, explore world-class art and history, and end the evening with a glass of local wine at sunset. It’s a destination that balances laid-back beach culture with elevated experiences, making it just as perfect for quick weekend trips as it is for longer group getaways.

Whether you’re visiting for adventure, relaxation, or a little of both, Malibu delivers something unforgettable in every season.

TLDR:

  • Malibu offers year-round rental demand with 23+ attractions from Surfrider Beach to wine tasting.
  • Properties near iconic spots like Malibu Pier and Leo Carrillo State Park command premium rates.
  • Group-optimized rentals with outdoor spaces and multiple suites maximize occupancy and revenue.
  • AvantStay manages 2,300+ luxury properties in Malibu and 100+ cities with tech-enabled operations.
  • Professional management and tech-driven pricing help owners capture peak summer ADR while sustaining occupancy across shoulder and winter seasons.

1. Visit the iconic Surfrider Beach

Surfrider Beach is one of the most famous beaches in Malibu, and for good reason. It’s known for its world-class waves and beautiful scenery, and is a popular spot for surfing, swimming, and sunbathing. Whether you’re an experienced surfer or just looking to relax on the beach, Surfrider Beach is a must-visit destination.

Source: Sandee

2. Experience the tidepools at Leo Carrillo State Park

Leo Carrillo State Park is a beautiful coastal park that offers a wide range of outdoor activities. One of the highlights of the park is the tidepools, which are home to a variety of sea creatures like crabs, starfish, and anemones. It’s a great spot for kids and adults alike to experience and learn about the marine ecosystem.

3. Go scuba diving or snorkeling 

We recommend diving in the crystal clear waters of Point Dume State Beach, a scenic beach that offers some of the best scuba diving and snorkeling in Malibu. The crystal clear waters provide excellent visibility, and there’s a diverse array of marine life to discover, including kelp forests, sea lions, and colorful fish.

Source: Malibu Beach Inn

4. Go kayaking or paddle boarding in Malibu Lagoon State Beach

Malibu Lagoon State Beach is a peaceful beach that’s perfect for kayaking and paddleboarding. The lagoon is a great spot for beginners, as the water is calm and shallow. It’s also a great spot for birdwatching, as the lagoon is home to a variety of shorebirds and waterfowl.

5. Take a sunset horseback ride with Malibu Riders

Malibu Riders offers horseback rides in Malibu State Park and Zuma Canyon. The horses are gentle and well-trained, and the views of the ocean and coastline are stunning. It’s a great way to experience the natural beauty of Malibu.

Source: Malibu Riders

6. Hike the trails in Malibu Creek State Park

Malibu Creek State Park is a beautiful park that offers a wide range of hiking trails. The park is home to several filming locations, including the set of the TV show MAS*H. The trails offer stunning views of the mountains and canyons, and there are plenty of opportunities to spot wildlife like deer and coyotes.

7. Go rock climbing at Malibu Creek State Park

Malibu Creek State Park is also a great spot for rock climbing, with over 100 climbing routes to choose from. The park offers a range of climbs for all skill levels, from easy boulder problems to challenging multi-pitch routes. There are several guide companies in Malibu that offer rock climbing lessons and guided climbs.

Source: Food for Hunters

8. Take a bike ride on the scenic Pacific Coast Highway

The Pacific Coast Highway is one of the most iconic roads in the world, and it offers stunning views of the ocean and coastline. Biking along the PCH is a great way to take in the scenery and get some exercise at the same time. There are several bike rental companies in Malibu that offer rentals by the hour or day.

9. Go wine tasting

Malibu has its own wine region, with several wineries offering tastings and tours. Check out Malibu Wines or Rosenthal Winery for a great experience. 

Source: Malibu Discovery

10. Take a helicopter tour

For a unique and unforgettable experience, take a helicopter tour of Malibu and the surrounding area. You’ll get a bird’s-eye view of the stunning coastline and the Santa Monica Mountains.

11. Visit the Malibu Pier

Visiting the Malibu Pier is a classic Malibu experience that should not be missed. This historic pier offers stunning views of the ocean, the coastline, and the mountains. Take a leisurely stroll along the pier and enjoy the fresh ocean air, or try your hand at fishing from one of the designated fishing spots. The pier is also home to some great dining options, including Malibu Farm and the Beachcomber Café.

Source: Expedia

12. Go shopping at the Malibu Lumber Yard

The Malibu Lumber Yard is not your typical shopping center. It’s an open-air, luxury shopping destination that features high-end fashion boutiques, health and wellness shops, and gourmet dining options. The design of the center is also unique, with beautiful landscaping, outdoor seating, and water features that make for a relaxing and enjoyable shopping experience.

13. Take a scenic drive along the Pacific Coast Highway

Driving along the PCH is a breathtaking experience that should not be missed. The highway offers stunning views of the Pacific Ocean, towering cliffs, and beautiful beaches. Rent a convertible and put the top down to explore the beauty of Malibu and the surrounding areas. There are plenty of lookout points and scenic stops along the way for the perfect photo op.

14. Visit the Adamson House and Malibu Lagoon Museum

The Adamson House is a beautiful Spanish Colonial Revival-style home that is now a museum showcasing Malibu’s history and culture. The house and grounds are stunning, with elaborate tile work, gardens, and fountains. The Malibu Lagoon Museum is also on site and offers exhibits on the natural history of the Malibu Lagoon and its surrounding ecosystem.

Source: Wowabouts

15. Take a surf lesson

Malibu is known for its great surf, and there’s no better way to experience it than by taking a surf lesson. There are plenty of surf schools and instructors in the area, offering lessons for all skill levels. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced surfer, catching a wave in Malibu is an unforgettable experience.

16. Experience the Santa Monica Mountains

The Santa Monica Mountains offer a wealth of hiking trails with stunning views of the ocean and the city. There are trails for all levels of hikers, from easy nature walks to challenging summit hikes. It’s a great way to get some exercise and enjoy the natural beauty of Malibu.

Source: All Trails

17. Go on a whale watching tour

Malibu is a great place to spot whales during their migration season. Book a tour with one of the local companies and get up close and personal with these magnificent creatures. It’s a truly unforgettable experience that will leave you in awe of nature’s wonders.

18. Visit the Getty Villa

The Getty Villa is a stunning museum dedicated to the art and culture of ancient Greece and Rome. The building itself is a work of art, modeled after an ancient Roman villa, and the collection is truly impressive. It’s a great way to learn about history and art while enjoying the beauty of the museum’s gardens and views of the ocean.

Source: Wikipedia

19. Take a day trip to nearby Santa Barbara

Santa Barbara is a charming town just a short drive up the coast from Malibu. It offers a variety of attractions, including beautiful beaches, historic sites, and great restaurants. Take a walk down State Street, visit the Santa Barbara Mission, or just relax on the beach and enjoy the scenery.

20. Visit the Malibu Country Mart

The Malibu Country Mart is an outdoor shopping center that offers a variety of high-end shops and restaurants. It’s also home to a weekly farmers’ market where you can sample fresh, local produce and artisanal goods. The center has a laid-back, beachy vibe that makes for a great shopping and dining experience.

Source: Malibu Country Mart

21. Take a sunset cruise

Watching the sun set over the Pacific is a must-do when in Malibu. Book a sunset cruise and enjoy a relaxing and romantic evening on the water. You’ll see stunning views of the coastline and maybe even spot some dolphins or other marine life.

22. Visit the Malibu Hindu Temple

The Malibu Hindu Temple is the largest Hindu temple in the Western Hemisphere and offers a unique glimpse into Hindu culture and spirituality. The temple is open to visitors of all faiths, and there are regular ceremonies and events

Source: Hidden California

23. Stay in an AvantStay vacation rental

With so much to see and do along the coast, staying in an AvantStay vacation rental in Malibu is the perfect way to experience it all. Whether you’re traveling with a group of friends or the kids, AvantStay offers spacious, luxurious rentals that will make your trip unforgettable.

Malibu truly has something for everyone, from beautiful beaches and outdoor activities to world-class dining and cultural attractions. And with AvantStay’s group-optimized vacation rentals, featuring spacious layouts, multiple primary suites, and tech-enabled convenience; you can experience it all in style and comfort. So why wait? Start planning your trip to Malibu today!

We hope this guide has given you some inspiration for your trip to Malibu. Don’t forget to check out the links we’ve included throughout the post to learn more about the various activities and attractions. Happy travels!

Stay in Malibu with AvantStay

Avantstay.png

With so much to explore along the Malibu coast, where you stay matters just as much as what you do. AvantStay offers a curated collection of luxury vacation rentals designed for group travel, from ocean-view estates to hillside retreats just minutes from Surfrider Beach, Malibu Pier, and the Santa Monica Mountains.

Each home is professionally managed and built for comfort, connection, and convenience, featuring spacious layouts, multiple primary suites, high-speed WiFi, and indoor-outdoor living spaces perfect for relaxing after a day of adventure.

Whether you’re planning a friends’ getaway, a family beach trip, or a coastal offsite, AvantStay makes it easy to experience Malibu in style, with the consistency of a hotel and the space of a private home.

FAQs

What makes Malibu an attractive market for luxury vacation rental owners?

Malibu offers year-round demand from diverse guest segments including group travelers, families, and corporate clients seeking coastal retreats. The area’s iconic beaches, outdoor activities, wine region, and cultural attractions create multiple revenue opportunities across different seasons, while proximity to Los Angeles makes sure consistent booking interest.

How can property owners maximize their rental income in Malibu’s competitive market?

Focus on creating experiential spaces that cater to group travelers, such as outdoor entertainment areas, multiple primary suites, and smart home technology. Properties near popular attractions like Surfrider Beach, Malibu Pier, and state parks command premium rates, especially when professionally designed and managed with institutional-grade operations.

What are the most important amenities for Malibu vacation rentals?

Modern guests prioritize high-speed WiFi for remote work, multiple bedrooms with ensuite bathrooms for group stays, outdoor living spaces to take advantage of the coastal climate, and proximity to beaches and hiking trails. Smart locks, professional cleaning protocols, and 24/7 guest support also differentiate premium properties from standard rentals.

When is peak season for vacation rentals in Malibu?

Malibu experiences strong demand during summer months (June-September) for beach activities, spring and fall for hiking and outdoor adventures, and winter for whale watching season. Strategic pricing around local events, festivals, and holiday weekends can drive ADR increases while maintaining occupancy during traditionally slower periods.

Final thoughts

After long beach days at Surfrider, hikes through the Santa Monica Mountains, and sunset dinners along the coast, having the right home base makes all the difference. AvantStay’s Malibu vacation rentals are designed for group travel, offering spacious layouts, multiple primary suites, and indoor-outdoor living spaces that let you soak in the ocean air long after you leave the sand.

From hillside estates with sweeping Pacific views to homes just minutes from the pier, each property is professionally managed with high-speed WiFi, smart locks, and 24/7 guest support. Whether you’re planning a family getaway, a friends’ trip, or a coastal work retreat, you can settle in, spread out, and experience Malibu your way.

Fun in the Desert Oasis: The 25 Best Things To Do in Coachella Valley 

Coachella Valley is a desert oasis in Southern California. It’s famous for its music festivals, but there are plenty of things to do year-round. Whether you’re looking for indoor or outdoor activities, there’s something for everyone. Here are some of the best things to do in Coachella Valley.

Cathedral City

Cathedral City is a desert oasis situated between Palm Springs and Indio. This small town is home to various attractions, including museums, art galleries, and native plant gardens. In addition, visitors can enjoy golfing, hiking, and horseback riding. 

The Cathedral City Hot Air Balloon Festival is held each year in November and celebrates the area’s heritage with food, music, and entertainment. 

Elsewhere, Coachella Valley History Museum is another popular attraction, displaying different artifacts that tell the story of the area’s past. Cathedral City has something to offer everyone, whether they are looking for culture or relaxation.

Coachella Valley Music and Arts Festival

Coachella Valley is home to some of the country’s best music and arts festivals, attracting people from all over the world. In particular, the Coachella Valley Music and Arts Festival draws in hundreds of thousands of thanks to its mix of world-renowned musicians, up-and-coming artists, and fashion. 

The festival takes place over two weekends in April and features a different lineup of performers each year. Aside from music, there are art installations, food vendors, and other activities. 

Source: The New York Times

The Living Desert Zoo and Gardens

The Living Desert Zoo and Gardens is one of the best things to do in Coachella Valley. This zoo is dedicated to desert animals and plants, from Arabian Oryx and Caracals to Coyotes and the Sand Cat. 

Animals are not the only attraction here as the zoo also has a beautiful botanical garden and hosts many educational events throughout the year. 

Joshua Tree National Park

Joshua Tree National Park is one of the most popular attractions in the Coachella Valley. The hiking trails wind through the rocky landscape, providing breathtaking views of the surrounding desert. 

Besides the incredible scenery, hiking through Joshua Tree National Park is a fantastic way to experience nature. Several activities are available in the area, such as rock climbing and guided tours. 

What’s more, Joshua Tree National Park contains the Cholla Cactus Garden, the enigmatic Skull Rock, and Keys Ranch. The latter is an evocative, preserved remnant of Joshua Tree’s early settler past and features tours led by a park ranger.

Source: Recreation

Palm Springs Aerial Tramway

The Palm Springs Aerial Tramway is one of Palm Springs‘ most famous attractions. This iconic tramway takes passengers from the Valley floor to the top of Mount San Jacinto, offering stunning views of the desert landscape. 

At the top of the tramway are several hiking trails and a restaurant, making it an excellent place to spend a day in nature.

Palm Springs Air Museum

This museum is dedicated to preserving the history of aviation and showcasing vintage aircraft. Here, you can explore exhibits on the history of flight and see aerial photographs of Palm Springs dating back to World War II. 

For a more immersive experience, the air museum offers flight simulator experiences and airplane rides, making it a must-visit for any aviation enthusiast.

Source: BringFido

Pioneertown

Pioneertown is a small town located in the Mojave Desert. It was founded in 1946 as a movie set for Western films. Today, it is a popular tourist destination, with a variety of shops, restaurants, and art galleries. 

Befitting its Western origins, you can horseback ride, check out the indie bar Pappy and Harriet’s, see the remnants of the 19th Century Lost Horse Mine, or head outdoors to stargaze at a sky relatively free of light pollution.

The Salton Sea

The Salton Sea is a saline lake created in the early 1900s when Colorado River water accidentally ended up in the area. Today, it’s a hotspot for birdwatching, as it’s home to the Sonny Bono Salton Sea National Wildlife Refuge.

Palm Springs Natural Hot Springs

There are several natural hot springs located in the Coachella Valley. The most popular spot for swimming is typically Palm Springs, where there are many different hot springs. 

It’s said that the waters have healing properties. Whether or not that’s the case, it’s still a great way to relax after a long day trip.

Source: Visit Greater Palm Springs

The Agua Caliente Cultural Museum

The Agua Caliente Cultural Museum is dedicated to preserving the history and culture of the Agua Caliente Band of Cahuilla Indians. Various exhibitions and programs educate visitors about the tribe’s history and feature artifacts dating back thousands of years. 

The museum is also home to a research library, making it an excellent resource for anyone interested in the history of the Coachella Valley.

Rancho Mirage Wine and Food Festival

The Rancho Mirage Wine and Food Festival is a yearly event attracting the area’s best restaurants, wineries, and breweries. 

Attendees can sample food and drink from around the world while enjoying live music and entertainment. Whether you’re a foodie or a wine lover, the Rancho Mirage Wine and Food Festival is an event not to be missed.

Indian Canyons

The Indian Canyons are home to various plants and animals and offer stunning views of the desert landscape. There are many hiking trails in the canyons, and visitors can also take part in ranger-led tours. 

This area was home to the Agua Caliente Band of Cahuilla Indians and there are glimpses of their presence dotted throughout. The Indian Canyons are open to the public from October to July. Murray Canyon features the “Indian Canyons Trading Post,” where visitors can get refreshments and purchase souvenirs.  

Source: Visit Palm Springs

Mount San Jacinto

Mount San Jacinto is the tallest mountain in the Coachella Valley, delivering stunning views of the desert landscape. Camping and picnicking are popular in San Jacinto State Park, with plenty of beautiful trails to explore. The views from the top of the mountain are breathtaking, and it’s well worth the effort to hike to the summit.

Palms to Pines Scenic Byway

Are you looking for a fun road trip to Coachella Valley? Then look no further than the Palms to Pines Scenic Byway! 

This beautiful drive takes you through some of the Valley’s most stunning scenery, from palm-lined roads to rocky mountain vistas. You’ll also pass by countless attractions, including Joshua Tree National Park, the Palm Springs Aerial Tramway, the Indian Canyons, the Santa Rosa, and the San Jacinto Mountains. 

Designated a National Forest Scenic Byway in 1993, it stretches for some 67 miles. Be sure to check the weather before taking this route as there can be hazardous conditions in winter.

The Cabot’s Pueblo Museum

Cabot’s Pueblo Museum is located in a replica of an ancient Indian pueblo. It has numerous artifacts and exhibitions delving into the history of pueblos and the Cabot tribe. 

This museum is home to the “Trading Post,” a gift shop featuring indigenous art, books, toys, jewelry, and more.

Source: Wikipedia

Charles M. Schulz Museum

The Charles M. Schulz Museum in Santa Rosa honors the life and work of cartoonist Charles M. Schulz. Here, you can learn about his work and life through a selection of exhibits, as well as a research library. Visitors can also take part in workshops and classes, giving people a chance to learn about the art of cartooning.

Thousand Palms Oasis Preserve

The Thousand Palms Oasis Preserve is home to a diverse population of plants and animals. In addition, it offers several hikes, such as the Desert Bird Walk, the Tour of Two Oases, and the Explore the Ecology of a Fault Line Oasis Hike.

Palm Springs Art Museum

If you’re looking for things to do in Coachella Valley, the downtown Palm Springs Art Museum should definitely be on your list! 

This family-friendly museum is a fantastic way to spend an afternoon, whether for a day trip or a weekend getaway. It features an array of exhibits, including a permanent collection of works by local artists. 

There’s also a hands-on activity area for kids and a cafe where you can grab a bite to eat. 

Source: Palm Springs

Desert Adventure

If you’re looking for a desert adventure, there’s no better place to find it than Coachella Valley. Home to the Mojave and Colorado deserts, the Valley has no shortage of attractions to keep you busy. 

Guided tours are an immersive way to explore the area and learn about the unique desert ecosystem. Many companies offer 4WD tours that take you off the beaten path and into some of the most remote corners of the desert. 

You can also find guided hikes, mountain biking tours, and even hot air balloon rides.

El Paseo Shopping District

The El Paseo Shopping District is a must-see for anyone visiting the Coachella Valley. With its upscale shops and restaurants, it has a diverse selection of places to find gifts for friends and family or to treat yourself to a new outfit. 

In addition, El Paseo is home to art galleries, spas, and boutiques, making it the perfect place to spend an afternoon exploring. And with its convenient location in the heart of Palm Desert, the El Paseo Shopping District is easy to get to from anywhere in the Valley.

Sunnylands

Found in Rancho Mirage, Sunnylands is a historic site that was once the winter retreat of US Presidents and world leaders. 

Today, it is open to the public and has much to see and do, from guided tours to picnics on the lawn. 

Sunnylands maintains a visitors center, which features exhibits on the history of the property and its famous guests.

Source: Sunset

Old Town La Quinta

Old Town La Quinta is a mid-century modern marvel in the heart of the Coachella Valley. This quaint community is home to art galleries, vintage shops, and delicious restaurants. 

Moreover, you can enjoy numerous activities, such as horseback riding, golf, and hiking. And, if you’re looking for an extended stay, there are vacation rentals right in the center of all the action! 

So, whether you’re visiting for the day or spending a week in the desert, a trip to La Quinta’s Old Town is sure to be one of the highlights of your trip.

The Coachella Valley Preserve

Coachella Valley Preserve is one of the best things to do in Coachella Valley. Situated on the San Andreas Fault lines, the preserve is home to black-tailed jackrabbits, bobcats, and sidewinders. 

Visitors can hike through the desert landscape, which is filled with cacti and Joshua trees, or take a jeep tour of the fault lines. 

The preserve has a visitor center with exhibits on the area’s history and wildlife.

Coachella Valley Vista Point

Located on Highway 74, Coachella Valley Vista Point is a great place to stop to take in the views. The vista point offers a panoramic look at the Valley, including the San Jacinto Mountains, Joshua Tree National Park, and the Salton Sea. Besides its picturesque sights, this tranquil spot is perfect for enjoying a picnic while watching the sunset. 

Source: Marriott Bonvoy Traveler

Desert Holocaust Memorial

Located in Palm Desert, this poignant memorial honors the six million Jews who were murdered during the Holocaust. 

The monument features a series of outdoor sculptures depicting scenes from the Holocaust, a meditation garden, and an audio tour that tells the story of the Jewish people during this dark time in history. 

The Desert Holocaust Memorial is open daily from sunrise to sunset, and admission is free.

The 25 Best Things To Do in Coachella Valley—Wrapping Up

There’s no shortage of things to do in Coachella Valley, whether you’re looking for adventure, culture, or just a chance to relax. For music lovers, the Coachella Valley Music and Arts Festival is a must-attend event, while the Palm Springs Aerial Tramway boasts breathtaking views of the area.

History buffs will enjoy exploring the Palm Springs Air Museum and Pioneertown, and nature lovers can’t miss Joshua Tree National Park. But, of course, no visit to Coachella Valley would be complete without spending some time soaking in the Palm Springs natural hot springs. Whatever your interests, you’ll find plenty to keep you busy in this desert oasis. 

And for the perfect place to stay during your visit, be sure to check out AvantStay. We offer a wide variety of vacation rentals in Coachella Valley, from golf resort homes to lakeside luxury estates. So book your stay today and start planning your perfect desert getaway!

Buena Vista by AvantStay

The Best Time to Visit Los Angeles

Step into the heart of entertainment where your dreams become a reality. Los Angeles is where Hollywood glamour, beachside relaxation, and world-class museums showcase incredible art and the spirit of creativity. 

Flowing through every neighborhood from Venice Beach to Beverly Hills, Los Angeles, and the greater Southern California region presents an extraordinary and sophisticated destination for the perfect California vibes.

This metropolis transforms throughout the year, offering visitors diverse experiences based on when they choose to explore its countless attractions. And each season brings unique advantages to this City of Angels, from award season glamour to perfect beach weather. 

If you’re looking to add Hollywood studios tours, world-class shopping, or simply soaking up the California sunshine to your travel itinerary, here’s your complete guide to choosing the best time to visit Los Angeles and creating your ultimate city escape.

We’ll show you what each season is like in LA, what the weather’s like for each month, cool events happening, and fun things to do. Plus, we’ll help you find the perfect place to stay!

About Los Angeles, CA

Los Angeles is huge! It’s the entertainment capital of the world and home to Hollywood, amazing beaches, and more than 400 different neighborhoods. Each area has its own personality. The city has different weather in different places – it’s cooler near the ocean and warmer inland.

LA has warm, dry summers and mild, wet winters. Temperatures usually stay between 48°F and 85°F. It almost never gets below 42°F or above 93°F. Los Angeles gets sunshine 263 days a year, which makes it perfect for being outside almost anytime.

Los Angeles Travel Seasons at a Glance

Understanding LA’s seasonal rhythms can help you plan the perfect urban adventure. Here’s when LA gets busy and when it’s quieter.

Busy Times: June to August and December

Summer brings the most people because families are on vacation and the beach weather is perfect. Hotels cost more, and attractions are crowded. Most people visit from mid-June to mid-August when it’s warmest. December is also busy because of holidays and award shows.

Good Times: March to May and September to November

These months have nice weather and cleaner air, plus way fewer crowds. Travel experts say these are the best times to visit LA. Spring has pretty flowers blooming, and fall has great weather with fewer tourists.

Quiet Times: January to February

Winter months are the quietest, with the best hotel deals and smallest crowds. Some attractions might have shorter hours, though. It’s usually pretty quiet except for holiday weeks and weekends.

Why Visit Los Angeles?

LA is way more than just Hollywood and celebrities. This huge city offers amazing experiences that mix movie magic with real California life. You can visit world-famous museums like LACMA and the Getty Center, or hit the beach anywhere from Malibu to Manhattan Beach.

You can tour movie studios like Universal and Warner Bros, or watch TV shows being filmed live. Shopping ranges from super expensive Rodeo Drive to fun Venice Beach vendors. The food scene is incredible – everything from food trucks to fancy restaurants.

LA has people from all over the world. You can visit Koreatown, Little Tokyo, and Olvera Street for authentic food and culture. The city loves outdoor living with hiking trails in Griffith Park, beach activities, and rooftop hangouts with amazing city views.

The weather is almost always nice, so there are outdoor concerts, farmers’ markets, and street festivals happening all year long.

Your Month-by-Month Guide to Los Angeles

  • Los Angeles in January: Cool winter weather, fewest people, award season starts
  • Los Angeles in February: Nice temperatures, still quiet, Grammy and Oscar prep
  • Los Angeles in March: Spring weather starts, flowers bloom, and more people come
  • Los Angeles in April: Perfect temperatures, great hiking weather, ideal time to visit
  • Los Angeles in May: Warm, nice days, last month before summer crowds, beautiful weather
  • Los Angeles in June: Summer starts, beach season begins, more visitors
  • Los Angeles in July: Hottest weather, most crowded, longest sunny days
  • Los Angeles in August: Still hot, busy summer season, perfect beach weather
  • Los Angeles in September: Great weather returns, fewer crowds, ideal time
  • Los Angeles in October: Perfect fall temperatures, Halloween fun, awesome weather
  • Los Angeles in November: Comfortable weather, holiday prep, beautiful days
  • Los Angeles in December: Cool winter weather, holiday events, award season is coming

When Is the Best Time to Visit Los Angeles?

The best time to visit Los Angeles is March through May and September through November. Temperatures are between the 50s and 80s, which makes walking around and visiting outdoor places really comfortable. You get great weather, not too many crowds, and good conditions for everything you want to do.

These shoulder seasons give you lots of benefits like fewer crowds, cheaper hotels and flights, and better travel experiences overall.

Visiting in Spring (March to May)

Spring is when LA looks its best. The city wakes up from winter with perfect weather and flowers blooming everywhere. Daily highs are around 75°F, lows rarely go below 45°F, and it barely rains.

This is perfect weather for exploring LA’s outdoor attractions, from hiking in Griffith Park to hanging out at the beach. The nice temperatures make spring great for walking tours, eating outside, and rooftop experiences without the crazy summer heat.

Los Angeles Weather in Spring

  • March: 50°F (low) / 72°F (high) | Rain: 2.4 inches
  • April: 54°F (low) / 75°F (high) | Rain: 1.0 inch
  • May: 59°F (low) / 78°F (high) | Rain: 0.3 inches

Things to Do in Los Angeles During Spring

Spring weather makes everything in LA more fun. Beach weather becomes perfect, and hiking trails are great without the summer heat. Theme parks and outdoor places are ideal for visiting with manageable crowds.

The nice temperatures make spring perfect for checking out different areas like Downtown LA, Beverly Hills, and Santa Monica. Spring evenings are great for rooftop dining, outdoor concerts, and watching sunsets at the beach.

Los Angeles Events in Spring

  • Oscar Season (February-March) – Academy Awards ceremony and parties
  • LA Times Festival of Books (April) – Huge book celebration at USC
  • Fiesta Broadway (April) – Cinco de Mayo celebration on Broadway
  • Cherry Blossom Festival (March-April) – Japanese culture celebration in Little Tokyo

Local Eats in Los Angeles During Spring

Spring has perfect weather for eating outside all over LA’s different neighborhoods. Restaurant patios have great city views, and food truck festivals happen because of the nice weather. The comfortable temperatures make it perfect for trying LA’s amazing food scene, from Korean BBQ to Mexican street food.

Los Angeles Travel Tips During Spring

Spring brings lots of visitors, so book hotels and popular attractions early. Pack layers because it can be different temperatures near the beach versus inland. This is a great time for first-time visitors to experience everything LA has to offer.

Visiting in Summer (June to August)

Summer has perfect beach weather with highs in the lower 80s and lows in the lower 60s. It basically doesn’t rain at all in July and August. This season is perfect for beach activities, and you get the most daylight hours for sightseeing.

Summer gives you the best beach weather and outdoor concerts, but it also brings the most crowds and the highest hotel prices. You get long days and consistently great weather for outdoor activities.

Los Angeles Weather in Summer

  • June: 62°F (low) / 82°F (high) | Rain: 0.1 inches
  • July: 66°F (low) / 85°F (high) | Rain: 0.0 inches
  • August: 66°F (low) / 85°F (high) | Rain: 0.1 inches

Things to Do in Los Angeles During Summer

Summer activities focus on LA’s incredible beaches and outdoor entertainment. Beach conditions are perfect from Malibu to Manhattan Beach. Outdoor concerts and festivals take advantage of clear skies. Theme parks stay open longer, and rooftop places offer perfect evening experiences.

The dry weather is great for hiking, and coastal areas stay cooler because of ocean breezes. Summer’s long days let you pack in beach time, cultural attractions, and evening entertainment.

Los Angeles Events in Summer

  • Hollywood Bowl Season (June-September) – Outdoor concerts under the stars
  • Sunset Strip Music Festival (August) – Street festival celebrating music history
  • LA County Fair (August-September) – Traditional county fair in Pomona
  • Beach Volleyball Tournaments (June-August) – Professional competitions along the coast

Local Eats in Los Angeles During Summer

Summer dining focuses on fresh, light food perfect for warm weather. Beachside restaurants have ocean views, and rooftop dining shows off city views. Food truck gatherings and outdoor markets do great during summer’s perfect weather.

Los Angeles Travel Tips During Summer

Summer requires booking hotels and popular attractions early because of high demand. Pack sunscreen and light layers for coastal weather changes. Try doing popular attractions early in the morning to avoid crowds and heat.

Visiting in Fall (September to November)

Fall is an awesome time to visit Los Angeles, especially September through November. The weather is pleasant with comfortable temperatures, cleaner air, and fewer crowds. This season has some of LA’s most perfect conditions with great weather and fewer tourists.

Fall keeps comfortable temperatures perfect for all outdoor activities, while the air gets cleaner as summer heat goes away. The season offers great value with manageable crowds and beautiful weather for exploring the city.

Los Angeles Weather in Fall

  • September: 64°F (low) / 85°F (high) | Rain: 0.2 inches
  • October: 58°F (low) / 79°F (high) | Rain: 0.6 inches
  • November: 52°F (low) / 73°F (high) | Rain: 1.1 inches

Things to Do in Los Angeles During Fall

Fall has great conditions for all LA activities. Beach weather stays comfortable, and hiking becomes more pleasant as temperatures cool down. Cultural attractions and museums are perfect for visiting without summer crowds.

The stable weather makes fall perfect for exploring neighborhoods, from Hollywood walking tours to Beverly Hills shopping. Fall evenings are perfect for outdoor dining and rooftop experiences with stunning city views.

Los Angeles Events in Fall

  • Halloween Celebrations (October) – West Hollywood Halloween Carnival and themed events
  • Day of the Dead (November) – Cultural celebrations in Latino neighborhoods
  • LA Auto Show (November) – Major car show at the Convention Center
  • Film Festival Season (October-November) – Various independent film festivals

Local Eats in Los Angeles During Fall

Fall dining shows off seasonal ingredients and comfortable outdoor dining weather. Restaurant patios have perfect conditions, and farmers’ markets feature seasonal produce. The pleasant weather makes it easy to explore restaurants throughout LA’s diverse neighborhoods.

Los Angeles Travel Tips During Fall

Fall offers great weather and crowd balance with manageable visitor levels. Pack light layers for temperature differences between coastal and inland areas. Take advantage of shoulder season pricing and less crowded attractions during this ideal time.

Visiting in Winter (December to February)

Winter brings mild conditions with average temperatures of 48°F to 68°F. The city stays mostly dry but has a rainy season with some precipitation. This season offers unique experiences like award shows and holiday celebrations throughout the city.

Winter has comfortable temperatures for visitors and locals, with clear, crisp days perfect for sightseeing and outdoor activities. The season offers great value with smaller crowds and lower hotel rates.

Los Angeles Weather in Winter

  • December: 48°F (low) / 68°F (high) | Rain: 2.3 inches
  • January: 48°F (low) / 68°F (high) | Rain: 3.1 inches
  • February: 50°F (low) / 70°F (high) | Rain: 3.0 inches

Things to Do in Los Angeles During Winter

Winter activities take advantage of mild temperatures and clear air. Cultural attractions become especially appealing, and hiking trails offer great conditions without summer heat. Beach activities are still possible with comfortable daytime temperatures.

The comfortable conditions make winter perfect for exploring museums, shopping areas, and cultural neighborhoods. Winter evenings are cozy for indoor entertainment and dining experiences.

Los Angeles Events in Winter

  • Rose Parade (January 1) – New Year’s Day tradition in Pasadena
  • Golden Globes (January) – Major Hollywood awards ceremony
  • Academy Awards (February-March) – Hollywood’s biggest night
  • Chinese New Year (January-February) – Celebrations in Chinatown

Local Eats in Los Angeles During Winter

Winter dining features comfort foods and cozy restaurant experiences throughout LA’s neighborhoods. Many places offer special winter menus, and the mild weather still allows for some outdoor dining on warmer days.

Los Angeles Travel Tips During Winter

Winter offers great value with smaller crowds and reasonable hotel rates. Pack layers for temperature changes and light rain gear for occasional showers. Take advantage of cultural events and indoor attractions during the cooler season.

Best Time of the Year to Visit Los Angeles (By Interest)

LA’s great climate and diverse attractions make timing important for getting the most out of specific experiences. Here’s when to go based on what you want to do:

For Less Crowd: January to February and Weekdays Year-Round

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Smallest Crowds

Winter months give you the most space at popular attractions. Visiting Tuesday through Thursday any season, helps you avoid weekend crowds at beaches and tourist spots.

For Perfect Weather: March to May and September to November

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Perfect Weather

These times give you ideal temperatures, minimal rain, and great air quality without summer crowds or winter’s occasional rain.

For Beach Activities: June to October

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Beach Activities

Warmest water temperatures and consistent sunshine make these months the best for coastal activities, swimming, and beach relaxation.

For Cultural Events: January to March and October to December

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Cultural Events

Award season brings glamour and excitement, while fall/winter cultural seasons offer museum exhibitions, theater shows, and art events.

For Hiking: March to May and September to November

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Hiking

Comfortable temperatures and clear air create perfect conditions for exploring LA’s many hiking trails and outdoor attractions.

For Best Value: January to February and November

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Best Value

Off-peak times offer big savings on hotels and attractions while still giving you great weather and experiences.

For Photography: March to May and September to November

Best Time to Visit Los Angeles for Photography

Perfect lighting, clear air, and comfortable temperatures create ideal conditions for capturing LA’s diverse landscapes and urban beauty.

Where to Stay in Los Angeles

Find accommodations that perfectly capture Los Angeles’ urban style while providing modern luxury and stunning city or ocean views. Here are five amazing Los Angeles vacation homes available to rent with AvantStay:

  • Casa Bellagio – Luxury hillside living in Bel-Air canyon country with a private pool, hot tub, and sweeping treetop views.
  • The Martel House – A gated modern compound just off Melrose with a private pool, putting the best of the LA lifestyle at your doorstep.
  • North Vista – A hillside sanctuary with complete amenities for the best LA experience.
  • Shenandoah – Sophisticated yet homey, modern, and luxurious home in the heart of LA.
  • Venice View – Our stunning beachside property with easy access to Venice Beach.

Create Your Los Angeles Itinerary

Ready to plan your city adventure? Let our experienced team handle every detail of your Los Angeles experience! Our concierge service can set up studio tours, restaurant reservations, and unique urban experiences.

Simply contact us or download the AvantStay App to book additional experiences, get insider city tips, and manage your entire stay through one easy platform.

Ready to Plan Your Los Angeles Adventure?

No matter when you choose to visit, Los Angeles’ diverse neighborhoods and endless entertainment will create lasting memories. The city’s perfect mix of urban sophistication and California chill lifestyle means every visit offers excitement and discovery.

We have the perfect urban sanctuary waiting for you. Book with AvantStay today and discover how amazing city vacations can be when you experience Los Angeles’ timeless glamour and endless possibilities.

FAQs

Is Los Angeles expensive to visit?

Los Angeles can be pricey during busy seasons (summer and December) when hotels cost more because of high demand and perfect weather. However, you can find great value during winter months (January-February) when you’ll get lower rates, fewer crowds, and mild weather perfect for sightseeing and cultural activities.

How busy does Los Angeles get?

Peak seasons bring big crowds, especially at popular places like the Hollywood Walk of Fame, Santa Monica Pier, and theme parks. For more peaceful experiences, visit during shoulder seasons (March-May, September-November) or explore lesser-known neighborhoods and attractions during weekdays.

When to avoid Los Angeles?

Summer months (June-August) bring the biggest crowds and highest prices, though the weather stays great. Holiday periods (Thanksgiving, Christmas, New Year’s) create peak congestion and premium rates. However, LA’s mild Mediterranean climate makes it enjoyable year-round with proper planning and realistic expectations about crowds and costs.

43 Best Things To Do in Big Bear for the Whole Family

Few things are more rejuvenating than a deep breath of pristine mountain air. Fortunately, there’s no shortage of fresh air, majestic mountains, or placid lake views in Big Bear Lake, which is nestled just 93 miles east of Los Angeles. There’s also no shortage of things to do in Big Bear Lake – no matter the time of year.

You and your group will have endless opportunities to explore the frontier – whether it’s on foot, mountain bike, kayak, or skis. Although Big Bear Lake is best known for its skiing, this outdoorsy oasis, tucked away in San Bernardino National Forest, holds year-round appeal with its extensive hiking and mountain biking trails, water sports, and golf. Fishing is another popular pastime here, but if you’re not the gotta-catch-your-dinner type – no worries. You’ll find comfort food in rustic lodges, casual bars and grills, barbecue joints, and cantinas. Or you can simply relax in the comfort of your cabin and let a private chef come to you. There’s no need to miss a minute enjoying beers with your crew by a fire pit in your private home.

This serene mountain lake getaway is worth the escape from LA – or from anywhere else. Here’s why:

Say hello to stunning views at our Big Bear homes

Things to do in Big Bear during the winter

1. Big Bear Mountain Resort is considered by many to be the best ski resort in Southern California. Lessons and rentals are always available for your skiing pleasure. Grizzly Ridge Tube Park is part of this resort and caters to all ages who want to ride the magic snow carpet in a high-speed tube. In addition to snow tubing, skiers and snowboarders will want to go to Snow Summit – one of two mountains at this resort with over 240 acres of skiable terrain. Within this terrain are 27 trails and over 18 skiable miles for people at any skill level. No snow? No worries. They’ve got a state-of-the-art snowmaking system.

2. Bobsledding doesn’t get any better than Alpine Slide on Magic Mountain. Give yourself a moment to take in the beautiful scenery from the chair lift ride at the top of the mountain, and then take control of your slide. You can adjust your speed and maneuver your twists down the quarter-mile track. Once you’ve mastered the Alpine Slide, you’ll want to try the Mineshaft Coaster – the only mountain coaster in California that allows you to control the speed through hairpin turns and dips, tunnels, and bridges along this mile-long track.

3. Catch the thrill of Night Glow tubing at Big Bear Snow Play featuring the longest inner tube ride in Southern California. It’s open Friday, Saturday, and holiday evenings from 5 p.m. to 9 p.m. During spring break, the schedule changes, and is open every evening.

4. At Big Bear City Airport Terminal, year-round tours are available with Helicopter Big Bear to take you to new heights and offer a unique perspective of the mountain. Up to three passengers can lift off in one aircraft (two passengers minimum). You’ll want to bring your camera with you to prove you did this before you scratch this activity off your bucket list. All ages are welcome!

Source: Big Bear Cabins

Things to do in Big Bear during the Summer

5. Magic Mountain’s double waterslide is the perfect place to take the entire family to cool off in the summer. There’s also a Soaring Eagle ride to help you take in the spectacular mountain lake views. Let the fun continue with more rides, or take this opportunity to do some go-karting.

6. Big Bear Alpine Zoo is a rehabilitation facility for injured, orphaned, and imprinted wild animals. These animals are offered a temporary or permanent safe haven, depending on their needs and ability to survive independently. The facility first opened in 1959, following a wildfire that left wild animals in need of evacuation to a safe shelter. In 1961, a bear was a victim of another wildfire in the area – this bear became the new facility’s first resident. Since then, American Badgers, Arctic Foxes, a Bald Eagle, and Fallow Deer have joined the various black and grizzly bears, bobcats, Canadian geese, and more wild orphans. Summer and winter schedules vary, so be sure to check online before you go.

Source: The Nay Foundation

7. Horseback riding is another option during your Big Bear Lake getaway. Seven miles east of Big Bear Village in Big Bear City is Baldwin Lake Stables and Petting Zoo, where you can sign up for a sunset ride or hourly rides. If you prefer a private lift, you can schedule one and tailor the trail ride to your desire.

8. Big Bear Marina offers tons of water sporting fun. Sign up for a water school class with skiing options, wakeboarding, wakeskating, or tubing. Boating is fun on the lake and rentals are available, including pontoon boats, fishing boats, wave runners, kayaks, and paddleboards. The choice is yours!

9. Roll with the lake and enjoy a Paddlewheel Tour Boat ride on Miss Liberty. Pine Knot Marina offers a fully-narrated 90-minute guided tour with a discussion on Big Bear’s history. If a boat tour isn’t your thing, there are jet skis available to rent, or you can check out the kayak and boat rentals to enjoy some lake time on your own time. You can also rent fishing gear!

10. Take a lake cruise on a Big Bear Pirate Ship. Considered a must-visit attraction, these daily tours feature live entertainment – complete with authentic pirates. Each captain offers their version of entertainment, so if you want to return a few times, you’re always in for something new.

11. Boulder Bay Park is a popular spot for canoeing and kayaking on a beautiful summer day. Water levels will determine whether or not you can launch a kayak from the shore, but if you can, you’ll want to head to one of the boulder islands to walk around and enjoy the scenery. There are picnic tables available, so be sure to box your favorite lunch items so you can dine and watch the sunlight sparkle on the lake. Walking paths are everywhere at the park and beckon you to take a stroll to the floating dock where you can walk to the end and meditate among the surrounding beauty. Fishing is also an option at the port, so why not cast a line.

Source: City of Big Bear Lake

12. The Big Bear Jeep Experience is an off-road adventure you’ll be sure to remember. Tours vary from sightseeing to advanced, off-road, and rock-crawling adventures.

Source: Big Bear Vacations

More ways to get your cardio

Mountain biking is a year-round activity at Big Bear. Some of the best trails include Alpine Pedal Path, Cougar Crest, Gold Fever Interpretive Site, and Grays Peak.

13. If you need to rent a kayak, standup paddleboard, or bicycle, GetBoards Ride Shop is the place to go. If you’re settled in at your vacation spot already, they’ll deliver to you anywhere in Big Bear Lake.

14. Plan ahead before hitting the trailhead for a hike by getting maps and information on the local ranger’s trail conditions. It’s best to be safe to enjoy some of the best hiking trails for experiences best suited to your comfort level. A handful of trails you’ll want to explore include Barton Flats Area Non-Wilderness, San Gorgonio Wilderness, Lake Arrowhead Area Hiking, and Big Bear Valley Trails. Castle Rock Trail, in particular, has an elevation gain of 500 feet, and it’s worth the sweat equity for the lake views at the top.

15. Action Tours California offers three-hour zipline adventures for a fly through the forest. You won’t believe the views as you glide over Johnson Valley and the highest peak in Southern California, Mt. San Gorgonio. Muster up the courage to trek across a teetering suspension bridge after your first zipline. If ziplining isn’t for you, take it down a notch and sign up for a Segway or snowshoe tour.

Source: R&R Big Bear

Events

16. The 4th of July Fireworks Spectacular is an annual event to celebrate Independence Day. The fireworks display is highly rated and can be viewed within 22 miles of the shoreline and the highest peaks overlooking Big Bear Lake. At Meadow Park, a 4th of July Fun Run event for the entire family offers a choice of three-course distances: 5K, 10K, or 15K. Prizes are awarded for the fastest runner – and best costume! Proceeds support the Bear Valley Search and Rescue.

17. Memorial Day Weekend Grill & Chill BBQ Festival is held throughout Memorial Day weekend at the Bartlett Events Area in The Village on Big Bear Blvd. The KC BBQ State Championship features over 30 cooks in competition for a $10,000 prize and the title of People’s Choice. Best of all, anyone attending can enjoy the samples from the BBQ competition while hanging out in the Chill Garden with an excellent brew or mixed cocktail. Bring plenty of cash because there are vendors on-hand in the Artisan Marketplace. Shop to the sounds of live music, and be sure to send the kids to the Kids Zone so they can expend some energy and get their chill on once they join you again.

18. Fishin’ For $50K Trout Derby is an event for both residents and visitors alike that’s held each September. Head to Big Bear Lake for a chance to win big! Try to tag one of five trout (previously released), each worth $10,000, or any 25 non-grand prize-tagged trout worth $200 each. Awards are distributed for men, women, boys, and girls who enter the Derby.

19. The Chili Cook-Off is an annual event held in July that’s meant to add a little spice to your vacation. More than 40 cooks from all over the southwest compete in the Top Chef title for a prize. Your duty is to taste, relax, groove to the music, and peruse the vendor’s tables for some unique purchases.

20. Attend the Tour de Big Bear at the “Cycling Capital of Southern California” road riding event. Choose your course from options that include 10K, 25K, 50K, 70K, 106K, and 109K mile courses meant to provide something for everyone who wants to participate. This four-day sell-out event includes a Poker Ride and a nighttime Glow Ride for family and friends before the Tour de Big Bear weekend.

Source: Big Bear Cycling Association

21. Be thankful there’s a Thanksgiving Turkey Trot, walk, or jog. Open Air Big Bear presents this annual event. Starting at Meadow Park on Thanksgiving morning, you can earn your turkey dinner by burning off calories by taking part in a 3, 6, or 9-mile race. Kids in strollers are welcome, and everyone is encouraged to have fun and dress up in their best turkey, bear, or fall costume for prizes. Three-mile runners are even treated to a yoga warmup routine with Colin Schour before the race.

22. The MTB Gran Fondo & Grizzly 100 is for all levels of mountain bike riders. Take the 20K Skyview up the Snow Summit Scenic Sky Chair or take the 50K Skyline course. Need more of a challenge? Take the Grizzly 100 and get your adrenaline pumping.

23. Big Bear Lake Oktoberfest at the Convention Center at Big Bear Lake is a quintessential autumn event that attracts thousands of visitors annually. Authentic German food, imported brews, Bavarian bands, traditional dances, and competitions are held during Oktoberfest, including the Queen Stein Carrying Contest.

Source: Hello Jetlag

24. Every summer, Big Bear Discovery Center hosts Music in the Mountains. This live, outdoor concert series benefits its education and conservation programs. The music is a mix of rock, bluegrass, blues, Western, and Celtic and is held in the theater under the stars.

25. More than 500 vintage autos, dragsters, and custom coupes congregate up the mountain for a two-day Antique Car Club Fun Run at Big Bear Village in August. It’s a crowd-pleaser!

Best spots to eat in Big Bear

26. Nottinghams Restaurant-Tavern is the place to dine for some classic California cuisine. Order the steak in King Richard’s Room, where a tableside fireplace will warm you up, or outside in Camelot’s Courtyard where you can bring your fur baby, no problem. You’ll want to head upstairs to Friar Tuck’s Tavern for happy hour, some live music, entertainment, and dancing.

27. Barbeque chicken flatbread is one delicacy offered at Big Bear Lake Brewing Company. Order a salt pretzel, fish tacos, a widow-maker burger, or a Kielbasa sandwich, and wash it down with homebrew made on-site.

28. Take dining to the next level and order a chef to cook for you! Simply make a call to Personal Chef Allen. All you need is a kitchen inside your vacation rental, such as the Gambler rental, available through AvantStay. In the mood for fish, Italian, or a vegan dinner? No problem! Whatever you want, it’s on the menu.

29. Spice things up at the Himalayan Restaurant, the ideal place for lunch or dinner plates full of lamb vindaloo, butter chicken, tofu saag, and more Nepal and Indian dishes.

Source: Visit California

30. North Pole Fudge and Ice Cream Company on Pine Knot Avenue is a dream come true for sweet tooths seeking a sugary ending to a day spent skiing, hiking, or biking. You’ve burned the calories, so go for it!

31. Sonora Cantina is known for having mouth-watering Mexican food, especially the shared parrilladas. More menu items include taquitos, carne asada, arroz con pollo, and tequila lime poppers.

32. Comfort food is unmatched at Teddy Bear Restaurant. Order the homemade chicken or turkey pot pies, or stop by for breakfast specials, and be sure to add a side of cinnamon cornbread.

33. The Cave Big Bear on Village Drive is open Friday through Sunday from 8 a.m. to 10 p.m. for those who crave some Rockin’ Burritos.

Shopping in Big Bear

34. A stop in Stupidiotic will keep you giggling as you browse through a gallery of quirky items such as a squirrel picnic table, face meme stickers for face masks, shower beer holders, and shower memo pads.

35. Bearly Used Books in the Village Faire Upstairs Mall sells books of all genres and for all ages.

Source: Bearly Used Books

36. O Koo Ran on the corner of Village Drive and Bartlett Road is full of unique finds, including accessories, bath and body products, housewares, souvenir gifts, and every type of casual comfort wear you can imagine for women and babies.

37. Interlaken Shopping Center has just about everything you need, right down to a laundromat. There are two Starbucks here and a post office, a DIY center, and an Italian restaurant – Maggio’s.

38. Big Bear Superstore will make t-shirts on request. It’s also where you can purchase some souvenirs to remind you of this mountain lake wonderland and share them with those who couldn’t join you for this getaway. You can also buy seasonal clothing here in case you forgot to pack your warmest socks.

Unwind

39. All that mountain activity is sure to cause some muscle soreness. Treat your tired body at Altitudes Massage. The Spa Day Hooray package has it all: a 1.5-hour treatment time with 60 minutes dedicated entirely to your specified needs, aromatherapy, hot stones, head, and foot massage, and a choice of mini-facial, foot treatment, or back facial. After the massage, enjoy a selection of tea or champagne, included with the package.

40. Get some “me” time at Elevations Day Spa. Waxing, makeup, hair, nails, body wraps, skincare, and massages are all available with an appointment in advance. Specialty treatments include an hour of foot massage, beginning with a Chinese herbal scrub. From there, the hour continues with a hydrating treatment and half an hour of reflexology.

Source: MapQuest

41. Spatique by Margo is an excellent stop for some CranioSacral therapy, which is a gentle approach (barely a touch) to release tensions deep in the body. It’s known to relieve pain and dysfunction and allows the body to self-correct. Swedish massages, lymphatic drainage, Lomi Lomi, myofascial release, deep tissue massage, pregnancy/prenatal massage, reflexology, and chemical peels are also offered here.

42. Mountain Mobile Massage & Spa brings the massage to you no matter where you are on Big Bear Lake, be it a rental home, hotel, or party location. Or you can schedule a visit to the on-site location. It’s up to you, but know there’s an upcharge for off-site massages that include deep tissue and trigger point therapy, the basic Swedish massage, or a sports massage, reflexology, or Shiatsu bodywork.

Explore Fawnskin

43. The small township of Fawnskin was once an artists’ colony full of artisans, musicians, composers, and actors from the Los Angeles area who craved an escape. The town got its name as an urban legend, referencing hunters who once discovered deer (fawn) skins stretched out to dry in the sun. This tiny North Shore village was once a passthrough for stagecoaches during the 19th century. Today, it’s a prime place for getaways to unwind from city life. Within Fawnskin is Holcomb Valley, where gold miners, loggers, and hunters thrived during the 19th century.

Whether you’re looking to relax, drink, eat, shop, or adventure until you can’t adventure anymore, Big Bear is the place for you! Explore this exciting man-made landmark for all its glory during any season of the year. Book one of AvantStay’s Big Bear properties to experience this magical, mountainous paradise yourself.

Moonridge by AvantStay

Clear Water and White Sand: The Guide to the Best Fort Lauderdale Beaches

Located in Broward County in South Florida, Fort Lauderdale is a popular tourist destination known for its beaches, arts and culture scene, and an array of activities. The city is situated on the Atlantic coast and has many canals and waterways, giving it the nickname “Venice of America.” 

Fort Lauderdale is also home to Port Everglades, one of the busiest cruise ports in the world. The subtropical climate, geographical location, and ample sunshine make it a perfect place to enjoy the outdoors and take part in swimming, sunbathing, paddle boarding, sailing, and fishing.

So, if you’re looking to make Fort Lauderdale your next vacation destination, what beach will you make your home away from home? Whether you’re a first-time visitor or a longtime local, here’s our guide to the best Fort Lauderdale beaches to explore along Florida’s majestic coastline. 

Deerfield Beach

Deerfield Beach natural beauty in Ft Lauderdale
Deerfield Beach

Few places can boast the natural beauty of Deerfield Beach. Located in Ft. Lauderdale, Deerfield Beach’s clear blue waters and soft white sand make it a perfect place to relax and enjoy the incredible views of the Atlantic ocean. 

The beach is ideal for staying busy, with activities ranging from swimming and sunbathing to fishing and kayaking. Many charter companies lie within proximity of the beach, too, if you want to spend a day fishing or exploring the deeper depths. In addition to the many activities available here, the beach is in immaculate condition and well-maintained, with trash cans and showers always available.

Deerfield Beach is near many other attractions in Ft. Lauderdale, such as Las Olas Boulevard and Intracoastal Waterway, and many restaurants, bars, and shops. Ultimately, there’s a little something for every type of beach-goer at Deerfield. 

Hollywood Beach

Hollywood Beach in Ft Lauderdale
Miami New Times

Hollywood Beach is one of the best beaches in Ft. Lauderdale. It’s wide and clean, with plenty of space to set up a beach chair and umbrella. The water is usually pretty calm, making it perfect for swimming, boating, jet skiing, and fishing. 

The boardwalk offers a scenic walk and an opportunity to bike ride or just people-watch. Of course, the most impressive of all is the stunning views of the Atlantic Ocean. 

In addition to relaxing on the beach or splashing around in the cool blue sea, Hollywood Beach is a shopper’s delight. The beach is home to many boutiques and malls for those looking to indulge. And, when you wear yourself out from the sun and shop, you can relax at one of the many oceanfront bars and restaurants.

Hillsboro Beach

pristine Hillsboro Beach
By The Sea Realty

Located just a short drive from downtown, Hillsboro Beach is a charming place to get away from the hustle and bustle of the Ft. Lauderdale city style. This convenient pristine stretch of sand is perfect for relaxing, swimming, and immersing in the incredible views. Plus, the water is clean and clear, and the sand is fluffy and white, like a dream beach.

Once you’re here, you’ll have access to lots of parking and amenities. And, if you’re lucky, you might spot a sea turtle or two, or three. Hillsboro Beach is a popular destination among sea turtles, specifically for nesting. You’re most likely to see this phenomenon throughout the spring and summer and sometimes into the fall.

Hillsboro is much more than a gorgeous beach for relaxing on. The three-mile stretch of coast also contains several historical sites. In particular, you can find the majestic Hillsboro Lighthouse and see the unusual Barefoot Mailman statue—a tribute to one of the most iconic symbols of Florida.

Pompano Beach

Pompano Beach, the heart of the gold coast in Ft Lauderdale
Pompano Beach

If you’re looking for the best beaches in Ft. Lauderdale, look no further than Pompano Beach. Otherwise known as the Heart of the Gold Coast, Pompano Beach is well-known for its beautiful white-sand beaches and clear blue waters that look as if they belong on a postcard. 

Visitors can enjoy various activities along the beachfront, such as swimming, sunbathing, fishing, and many nearby restaurants and bars. When you need a break from the sand, you can explore all the town offers, from its vibrant shops and restaurants to its historic pier. This beach is also pet friendly so travel with ease knowing your furbabies can join along in the fun.

Pompano Beach is also relatively close to neighboring cities, like Miami and Palm Beach. So, if you want to explore more of South Florida, you can hop in your car for a short drive to set out sightseeing the rich culture in the Ft. Lauderdale neighborhood.

Fort Lauderdale Beach Park

stunning destination at Fort Lauderdale Beach Park
Travel Lemming

Fort Lauderdale Beach Park is a stunning destination, boasting sand that is white and powdery, and water that’s crystal clear. You will also have abundant tropical shade thanks to numerous palm trees and other tropical plants. On any given day at this paradise, you’ll see a mix of locals and tourists enjoying the sun, surf, and amenities.

Speaking of amenities, Fort Lauderdale Beach Park has a diverse variety, including showers, picnic tables, and a family-friendly playground.

The best time to visit the beachside is early in the morning when the beach is relatively deserted. As the day goes on, the crowds build up at Ft. Lauderdale Beach, so arrive early if you want to get a spot in the shade.

Las Olas Beach

Las Olas Beach in Fort Lauderdale
La Costa Olas

Most people associate Fort Lauderdale with its plethora of beaches, and for good reason. The city is known for its stunning stretches of sand, and Las Olas is one of the most beautiful beaches in the state.

Located in the heart of downtown, Las Olas Beach is a popular spot for locals and tourists. As such, you can expect to find a hearty mix of families and singles, all enjoying the Florida sun. The beach is in excellent condition and offers plenty of amenities, including showers, changing rooms, and restrooms. 

Beyond the beach’s impressive amenities, you’ll find many shops, restaurants, and bars along the popular Las Olas Boulevard. While this small stretch of beach is charming and welcoming, keep in mind the college spring break schedule. Unless you’re in the mood to get a bit rowdy, you might want to avoid the beach at that time since college kids flock to the area.

Von D. Mizell-Eula Johnson State Park 

Dr von D Mizell-Eula Johnson State Park or Neighborhood Beach in Fort Lauderdale
Florida State Parks

Dr. von D. Mizell-Eula Johnson State Park, often simply called Neighborhood Beach by locals, is one of the best beaches in Fort Lauderdale for swimming, sunbathing, picnicking, and fishing. In addition, the park has a boat ramp, making it a popular spot for boaters as well. 

The park is named for two important figures in the history of civil rights in Fort Lauderdale. Dr. Von Mizell was a prominent physician and civic leader who fought for racial equality, while Eula Johnson was a highly respected educator who worked to improve conditions for African American students in Broward County. This state park was the first beach to be accessible to African Americans in the country.

Besides its historical significance, the park is beloved for its natural beauty and vibrant wildlife. The wide, sandy beach is flanked by coral reefs, which protect the shore from waves and create a tranquil lagoon for swimming and snorkeling. 

Dania Beach

Dania Beach
Marinas

With its proximity to the airport, Dania Beach is an optimal place to catch some sun and waves before or after a flight. The beach is wide and open, making it ideal for swimming, sunbathing, and playing beach sports. Dania Beach has a blue wave certification, a classification that can only be met if a beach maintains a high standard of cleanliness. 

If you fancy yourself an angler or love the serenity that fishing offers, Dania Beach’s iconic pier will be a must-visit. There, you can walk the stretch for some leisurely exercise or cast your pole into the crystal depth to catch a prize fish or at least a guppy. 

Elsewhere, restaurants and cafes abound with a great selection of food and drink, and the dune walkovers provide access to the beach for visitors with disabilities. Whether you’re looking for a place to relax or play, Dania Beach is worth experiencing.

Hallandale Beach

stunning view of Hallandale Beach
NYT

Hallandale Beach is one of the best beaches in Ft. Lauderdale for swimming, sunbathing, and simply taking in the stunning views. The average water temperature is a comfortable 78 degrees Fahrenheit, making it perfect for swimming year-round. Expect to find a well-maintained beach, with ample umbrellas and chaise lounges for visitors.

The town itself, located in the Greater Fort Lauderdale area, is home to lots of entertainment. So, if you get sick of the sea and sun, you can retreat to a race track or casino for fun. What’s more, this beach has an active nightlife with clubs and ballroom dance spaces for you to make a night off your beach trip.

While you might find a vendor or two on the beach for a bite to eat, you cannot beat the fine-dining restaurants nearby. Ultimately, Hallandale Beach is a relaxing escape with a touch of upscale style.

Lauderdale-by-the-Sea

Lauderdale-by-the-Sea
The South Florida Beach Review

Lauderdale-by-the-Sea is one of the best beaches in Fort Lauderdale. With its sparkling white sand and clear blue waters, it’s no wonder that it is a popular spot for locals and visitors alike. Crucially, it’s clean and well-maintained, with plenty of trash cans and regular beach cleanings. 

Here, you’ll find various beach amenities, including a playground, a pavilion, showers, and restrooms to make your trip comfortable and convenient. And, if it’s safety you’re worried about, Lauderdale-by-the-Sea always has a lifeguard on duty.

When you feel your stomach grumble or need to quench your thirst after a day in the sun, you’ll find no shortage of delicious restaurants and bars just a short walk from the seaside. The only downside is that it can be a bit crowded on weekends. But overall, Lauderdale-by-the-Sea is a memorable spot to have a day in the sun.

Sebastian Street Beach

Sebastian Street Beach
Visit Lauderdale

Sebastian Street Beach has got everything you could want in a beach: soft sand, clear water, palm trees, and abundant space to spread out and unwind. And it’s not just us humans who love it. Sebastian Street is also a popular spot for dolphins, who often come close to shore to play in the waves. If you’re lucky, you might even spot a manatee or two.

Sebastian Street Beach is well-known for being an LGBTQ+ friendly community beach. You’ll find it near many LGBTQ+-friendly resorts and businesses, making it a popular tourist destination. 

Despite being a popular tourist and local destination, Sebastian Street Beach isn’t too crowded to the point that it’s unbearable like some other neighboring beaches. In addition to its reputation and beautiful sandy shore, the beach has a boardwalk that runs along the shore, which is perfect for walking, jogging, or riding bikes. 

Loggerhead Park

Loggerhead Park beach
Arrival Guides

Loggerhead Park beach is situated on a barrier island, so there’s lots of natural beauty to enjoy. Even though the beach is located in the park, there are numerous spots for swimming, sunbathing, fishing, and playing games. For picnics, you’ll find several tables and grills offering meals with a view. 

The best time to visit Loggerhead Park is definitely during the week when the crowds are smaller and the atmosphere is more relaxed. In terms of specific months, March to May is recommended as it is when the weather is warm and the water is calm. So if you’re looking for a great beach in Ft. Lauderdale, be sure to check out Loggerhead Park during this period for an unforgettable time.

Final Thoughts

If you’re looking for a great beach to relax on, Fort Lauderdale has got you covered. With miles of coastline and world-famous beaches, there’s something for everyone in the greater Fort Lauderdale area. 

Whether you’re looking for family-friendly fun or want to find a spot to catch some rays in peace, we’ve got the perfect beach for you. So what are you waiting for? Pack your swimsuit and sunscreen and head to Fort Lauderdale Beach. And, if you’re looking for beach rentals, you might want to check out Beach Haven, a gorgeous four-bedroom Ft. Lauderdale vacation home.

3 Hot Tips: How To Become a Superhost on Airbnb

With over 4 million hosts on Airbnb and 6 million active listings worldwide, how do you make your short-term rental stand out in such a saturated space? As an Airbnb Superhost, you’ll receive improved visibility, higher referral bonuses, increased bookings, and ultimately more revenue. If you’re interested in learning how to become a Superhost on Airbnb, and how AvantStay can simplify that process, we’ve got you covered. In this article we’ll answer:

  • What is an Airbnb Superhost? 
  • What are the benefits of being a Superhost?
  • What are the Airbnb Superhost requirements? 
  • How can a vacation rental management company help you become a Superhost? 

What is an Airbnb Superhost?

The Airbnb Superhost program was created to reward and promote top-performing hosts. Hosts that go above and beyond to create an exceptional guest experience are given a Superhost badge and additional promotions to reach more guests. If you meet Airbnb’s requirements, you are awarded Superhost status after each evaluation period (no application needed!).

What are the benefits of being an Airbnb Superhost? 

There are many benefits that come with being an Airbnb Superhost, including increased visibility, more earning potential, and exclusive rewards. According to AirDNA, these hosts also see a greater performance with several key performance indicators compared to non-Superhosts: 

  • 81% higher occupancy rate
  • 60% more revenue per available day
  • 5% improvement in listing traffic

Increased visibility 

As a Superhost, you’ll receive a badge that will help you stand out from other hosts and listings in your area, all while building trust with potential guests. Superhosts are also more likely to be featured in Airbnb’s promotional emails. In addition, Airbnb users have the ability to filter searches to only see Superhost rentals–that means more eyes on your listing and more bookings.

More earning potential 

Superhosts earn more simply from improved listing visibility along with the trust and expectations that come with the status. Guests know that Superhosts are the best of the best, and will likely book your home over those from other non-Superhosts. 

Exclusive rewards from Airbnb

Superhosts receive a $100 Airbnb coupon every year that they keep their status. If Superhosts refer new hosts to join Airbnb, they get an additional 20% bonus on top of the usual referral bonus.

What are the Airbnb Superhost requirements? 

Every three months, Airbnb checks if you’ve met their requirements for the past year so you can earn or keep your Superhost status. To qualify for an Airbnb Superhost badge, you must:

  • Host at least 10 trips, or have 3 reservations that total at least 100 nights
  • Maintain a 90% response rate or higher
  • Maintain a 1% cancellation rate (1 cancellation per 100 reservations) or lower
  • Maintain a 4.8 overall rating

3 Tips for becoming an Airbnb Superhost

While responsiveness and limiting cancellations are important, providing a top-notch guest experience is crucial to boost your ratings and maximizing your short-term rental income. Here’s how you can improve the guest experience to drive more five-star reviews and become a Superhost. 

Use high-quality photos in your listing

shuffleboard table in AvantStay vacation home

Take high-resolution photos of your vacation rental that accurately reflect the space, amenities, and what guests can expect when they walk into your home. Make sure you update these photos after you make any changes to your property so guests don’t leave negative reviews about an inaccurate listing. 

With AvantStay, our Design and Photography teams develop a marketing and listing plan that best highlights the experiences and amenities to our guests. We stage, style, and photograph your home to showcase the property’s best characteristics across listings. 

Prioritize cleanliness and upkeep

bathroom vacation rental cleaning checklist

Allow guests to completely unwind and enjoy their stay by keeping your vacation rental clean and ready to use. AvantStay has teams dedicated to field operations that manage utilities, services, maintenance, and housekeeping on our owners’ behalf. 

We pride ourselves on a rigorous 100-point vacation rental cleaning checklist that ensures our housekeepers perform deep cleans using products and standards that comply with (and exceed) CDC guidelines before every stay. In addition, we provide a bi-annual deep clean to ensure homes stay in great shape all year round. 

Take care of your guests

AvantStay branded mug and breakfast items

Go above and beyond to make sure guests have the best experience at your home. From communication and easy check-in, to welcome gifts and a well-stocked home, taking the time to show guests that you care can earn you a five-star rating. 

At AvantStay, guests have access to 24/7 live support via SMS, email, or phone, and we troubleshoot every issue to ensure they are well-cared for. That way, our homeowner partners can sit back and relax without any interruptions. By resolving 90% of guest issues on the first call, we receive higher ratings and better guest satisfaction, driving more five-star reviews.

We also take care of stocking the home with guest-ready supplies and provide personalized, thoughtful welcome packages ahead of every stay. 

Become an Airbnb Superhost with AvantStay

Managing a short-term rental and reaching Superhost status on Airbnb can be expensive, tedious, and time-consuming. AvantStay has been a top-rated Superhost for 24 consecutive quarters, so we know what it takes to take your home to the next level and maximize your revenue. We offer the first hands-off approach for vacation rental owners, using our proprietary tech suite to power bookings, operationalize in-field management, and activate an elevated guest experience. 

In addition, guests can take advantage of our upgrades and experiences by requesting mid-stay cleans, fridge stocking, arranging private chef-catered dinners, wine tastings, in-home spa treatments, transportation, and more. A pristine home paired with our personalized guest services drives higher satisfaction, more five-star reviews, and repeat visitors. 

If you’re interested in learning more about AvantStay’s best-in-class care and how we can maximize your revenue, our team is ready to help. Get started with our vacation rental management experts today!

Island Fun: The Top 19 Things To Do in Hilton Head

If you’re looking for things to do on Hilton Head Island, look no further than this travel guide.

Hilton Head Island is one of the most popular destinations on the East Coast, with 2.5 million tourists visiting the best beaches, bike paths, and boutiques each year. It’s a top destination for families and couples alike—and it’s easy to see why. 

The island was connected to the mainland by a bridge in 1956, making it easy to get there. The island is just 35 miles away from Savannah, Georgia, and 95 miles away from Charleston, South Carolina.

There are 12 miles of beautiful beaches that you can enjoy all year round, as well as protected wildlife preserves where you can learn about the natural environment of the island. 

You’ll find dolphin tours and boat charters available at many locations around the island, and bike trails are great for exploring nature at your own pace or taking an afternoon ride with friends or family members (just be sure to bring your bikes!). 

Restaurants abound throughout Hilton Head Island—from casual fare at places like Red Lobster or Olive Garden to more upscale options like Ruth’s Chris Steak House or Bonefish Grill—so you’ll never have trouble finding something delicious no matter what kind of meal you’re craving!

Hilton Head Island

Readers of Travel+Leisure Magazine selected Hilton Head Island as the #1 Island in the Continental United States and the #1 Island in the United States for multiple years. It ranked as the #2 Best Islands in the World in 2017. Hilton Head Island was chosen as the best island in the United States by Conde Nast Traveler readers.

1. Shelter Cove Towne Centre

Shelter Cove Towne Centre oceanfront shopping in Hilton Head
Shelter Cove Towne Centre

Shelter Cove Towne Centre is an oceanfront shopping and dining area built around a marina. The waterfront walking village has 290,000 square feet of shopping, dining, and activities.

It’s a great place to go to get some fresh air and enjoy the views of boats and salt marshes. It’s also where you can find many resort-style stores and high-end attire.

Shelter Cove Towne Centre is also easy to get to via bike or car from Palmetto Dunes. Located mid-island, it’s the perfect spot for a day trip!

2. Daufuskie Island

Daufuskie Island in Hilton Head
The Island Packet

If you’ve ever dreamed of escaping to a secluded island, Daufuskie is your place. Located just off the coast of South Carolina, it’s accessible only by boat or ferry—so you’ll feel like you’re on your private island.

Daufuskie Island has a long history: Spanish moss oak trees, crowd-free beaches, and a rich Gullah culture all make this one of the most unique islands in the Carolinas. 

It was first settled in the 1730s by English colonists who established several plantations on the island. After the Civil War, freed slaves found themselves on Daufuskie, forming the Gullah community; this allowed their culture and language to grow in an isolated place.

Today visitors can explore off-road biking trails, paddleboard or kayak waterways, ride horses at the farm, golf along the beach—or take a self-guided tour along Robert Kennedy History Trail. 

Art studios and galleries abound, along with rum distilleries, breweries, and community farms that grow organic produce for the local farmers’ market.

3. Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge

Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge in Hilton Head
Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge

If you’re looking for a place to get away from it all, grab a car rental and head over to Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge for a nature excursion. With no zoo and only limited access by foot or bike, this refuge has tons of wildlife and provides a great escape from the hustle and bustle of everyday life.

Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge came about in 1985 as part of an effort to protect the environment and wildlife of South Carolina. The refuge encompasses 4053 acres, including Pinckney Island (open for public use), Corn Island, Big Harry Island, Little Harry Island, Buzzard Island, and the surrounding waters.

There are 14 miles of hiking and biking trails through freshwater ponds, salt marshes, and maritime forests. You’ll see alligators, turtles, deer—even white ibis!

There are several ways to visit Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge: by boat, from the beach, or by kayak/canoe. You can park at Daufuskie Landing on Daufuskie Island and then take one of their tours for about $17 per person (including a boat ride).

4. Stoney-Baynard Plantation

Stoney- Baynard Plantation and Ruins on Hilton Head
Landmark Hunter

The Stoney-Baynard Ruins are a national historic site located on Hilton Head Island. Captain Jack Stoney built them in the 1790s, and they served as antebellum plantation houses overlooking Calibogue Sound.

Legend says that Captain Jack Stoney lost a poker game to William Baynard in 1840, and he lost the property to Baynard. Baynard’s family occupied it until Union forces invaded Hilton Head in 1861, and the Baynards left. It became the Union headquarters before being burned down.

Paranormal activity has been reported at the ruins—apparitions of a man have been seen walking through the ruins. Some think this is William Baynard, who died after being shot during the Civil War.

The plantation house museum holds many artifacts from early settlers of the island, including furniture and household goods like plates, bowls, and glasses. You can also see some of the original documents that were signed when Stoney Baynard Plantation was established as well as an old map of Hilton Head Island.

5. Harbour Town

Harbour Town view
The Crazy Crab

Whether you’re in Hilton Head for the first time or have been coming back year after year, there are plenty of things to do at Harbour Town.

If you’ve got a car, drive up to Harbour Town Golf Links and watch golfers hit the ball around the course. It’s one of the best golf courses in South Carolina, and it hosts the RBC Heritage tournament every spring. If you don’t have a car, there are always cabs waiting outside the gates of Sea Pines Resort.

If you’re feeling adventurous, climb up to the iconic candy cane-striped lighthouse for a fantastic view of Harbour Town’s yachts and rental properties. There are also many restaurants and shops in this area if you want to grab lunch or a souvenir before heading down the hill.

Harbour Town is also home to The Liberty Oak at The Harbour Town Yacht Basin—a live music venue where local bands play every night from April through October (free entry for everyone). If you’re looking for something different, try renting out one of their boats or taking a dolphin-watching excursion—both will get you closer than ever before!

6. Harbour Town Lighthouse

Harbor Town Lighthouse
Harbour Town Lighthouse

The Harbour Town Lighthouse is the only museum on Hilton Head Island that tells the story of lighthouses and the people who operated them.

Located in the Yacht Basin, this 50-year-old museum has an extensive collection of lighthouses and how they used them for navigation, as well as a 16-foot hand-built model of the Eagle, a historic 295-foot cutter.

The Lighthouse Legends Tour features a climb up to the top of the lighthouse to learn about local history at each level. You’ll also learn about lighthouse keepers who spent their lives tending to these critical structures.

The Coast Guard Exhibit features equipment used by Coast Guard members domestically and abroad.

7. Folly Field Beach Park

Folly Field Beach Park in the heart of Hilton Head
Folly Field Beach Park

Folly Field Beach Park is an excellent place for a day of sun, fun, and food. Located in the heart of Hilton Head, Folly Field has something for everyone: playgrounds with slides, swings, and teeter-totters; picnic tables; volleyball courts; basketball courts; picnicking areas; a pier with benches overlooking the island’s incredibly blue waters. 

If you’re looking for some exercise beyond swimming or playing on the beach there are also walking paths around the perimeter of this lovely park that lead through wooded areas where you may find deer grazing or birds nesting in trees.

8. Coligny Beach Park

popular Coligny Beach Park in Hilton Head
Coligny Beach Park

Coligny Beach Park is the most popular beach in Hilton Head. It’s a vast, sandy shoreline with plenty of room for you and your family to spread out, and it offers amenities like restrooms and showers, changing rooms, benches, and gazebos. You’ll also find coffee shops, ice cream shops, seafood restaurants—and even rentals of umbrellas and beach chairs!

The best part? Free beach access is available 24 hours a day during the summer months (March through October). Lifeguards work between 6 am-9 pm from March to October, and 6 am to 6 pm from November through February.

There’s always something to do at Coligny Beach Park. Events have included sunrise yoga, a winter polar plunge, Sunday church services, and a bicycle obstacle course.

9. Coligny Plaza

Coligny Plaza view
Coligny Plaza

Coligny Plaza is the perfect place for a day of shopping, dining, and entertainment.

The plaza boasts 60 stores, including clothing, jewelry, gifts, bicycles and rentals, toy stores, and a pharmacy. Dozens of restaurants include bakeries, sandwich shops, cafes, bars and grills, and ice cream shops. 

There are also special events throughout the year, such as the annual Jazz Festival in May and the Christmas Tree Lighting Ceremony in November.

Coligny Theatre or The Island Theater is an “art house” mostly showing films by independent producers. It is located on the second floor of Coligny Plaza.

10. Lowcountry Celebration Park

Lowcountry Celebration Park overview
Carolina Parks and Play

Lowcountry Celebration Park has a lot to offer! Here are some of our favorite things to do.

Adventure Playground, named after Captain William Hilton’s ship, is the perfect place for your kids to let loose and run around. They’ll feel like they’re on a pirate ship with all this playground equipment!

If you want to spend some time in the sun, take a stroll through the Open Pavilion and relax on the lawn. The lighted perimeter walk will keep you safe as you enjoy this beautiful setting.

The Setting Sun Sculpture is one of Lowcountry Celebration Park’s most popular features—you can’t miss it! If you love art, you’ll love this piece.

Fitness stations are provided so that you can stay active while enjoying your time here in Hilton Head. Just bring your mat or towel if you want to take advantage of them!

If you need a break from all that activity, take some time out at The Sandbox Children’s Museum. They have tons of fun things to do and exhibits to learn from for kids of all ages.

11. Driessen Beach

Driessen Beach
Driessen Beach

If you’re looking for a change of pace from Coligny Beach Park, Driessen is for you. It’s tucked away in a wooded area, which means it’s less crowded than other beaches in the area. 

Amenities include restrooms and outdoor showers, plus a picnic pavilion and playgrounds. Grills are available on-site, and bike racks are available nearby. Lifeguards are on duty during the summer months.

The resort along Driessen Beach offers food options if you want to go off-site while visiting the beach, but there are also many restaurants nearby that offer food delivery services if you want to spend more time at the beach!

Driessen Beach is just as easy to access as Coligny Beach Park—just follow the long wooden boardwalk from your parking area down to the shoreline.

12. Islanders Beach Park

relaxing Islanders Beach Park
Islanders Beach Park

Islanders Beach Park is the perfect place for you to relax, unwind and make memories with your family and friends.

The park offers sweeping views of the water. The boardwalk through the dunes will lead you down to the beach matting that will help you navigate the sand safely. There’s also a playground where kids can burn off some energy before settling in for a picnic at one of our pavilions.

The park features amenities including restrooms and outdoor showers, a water fountain, and more.

13. Coastal Discovery Museum

Coastal Discovery Museum nature
Coastal Discovery Museum’s Facebook

Coastal Discovery Museum is a place to learn about the local area, interact with animals, and explore nature.

This 68-acre property features live oaks, a butterfly habitat, and trails. Some gardens host native plants used by early settlers for food and medicine. Guided kayak tours, jet ski rentals, and bottlenose dolphin cruises are offered at the museum’s marina.

The Museum barn houses rare Marsh Tacky horses. Honey Horn Slave Project archaeologists discovered slave cabins and artifacts here. The project is still ongoing, so discoveries are expected!

Coastal Discovery Museum is just 4 miles south of Pinckney Island National Wildlife Refuge. A $5 suggested donation allows you access to this educational experience.

14. Sea Pines Forest Preserve

600-acre protected land Sea Pines Forest Preserve
Living the Dream

Sea Pines Forest Preserve is a 600-acre protected land for alligators, snakes, deer, and more than 200 species of birds.

A guided boat tour or wagon is available at no cost. Fishing charters or horseback rides are also available for a nominal fee.

The Warner W Plahs Wildflower Field is a popular attraction during the spring and summer months when the flowers are in bloom. 

The Fish Island or Vanishing Swamp is another popular attraction that allows visitors to explore an area where the water level is low enough to see many historic artifacts from Native Americans who lived there thousands of years ago.

The Sea Pines Shell Ring is an archaeological site dating back four thousand years that was used as a gathering place for early Native Americans. It was made up of clams and muscles as well as oysters.

Outside guests are charged a daily $9 visiting fee (cash only) to enter the gated enclave at Sea Pines Resort.

15. Bluffton

Bluffton cultural attractions
Visit Bluffton

Kayaking, biking, hiking, and fishing along the May River are all great ways to explore the area. If you’re looking for something a little more guided and educational, consider taking a tour through Old Town National Register Historic District with 80 historic structures. 

Bluffton also has 120 cultural attractions and hosts three dozen festivals and events throughout the year.

Palmetto Axes ax throwing is a great place to get your adrenaline pumping while learning how to throw some axes! They will also teach you how to create your personalized wood handle.

Tanger Factory Outlet is a great place to find discounted designer clothes without having to leave town. You’ll find brands like Michael Kors, Ralph Lauren, Coach, and more here!

If you’re looking for art galleries, then look no further than the Art Gallery of Local Artisans, which has been showcasing local artists since the late 1980s. The gallery specializes in pottery, sculpture, and painting from various local artists from all over South Carolina.

The May River Golf Course, designed by Jack Nicklaus overlooking the river, has eco-friendly turf and white-sand bunkers – what more could you ask for?

The entire city is surrounded by water and greenery. The waterfront in Bluffton Beach is one of South Carolina’s most popular attractions for swimming and sunbathing—especially since there are so many public access points!

16. The Sandbox: An Interactive Children’s Museum

The Sandbox interactive children's museum
The Sandbox

The Sandbox Children’s Museum is a hands-on, interactive museum for early childhood up to age 12. Kids explore creativity through themed activities and exhibits. They offer free play and exploration in a museum environment with staff-guided programming, activities, and crafts.

In addition to their main museum, we have two additional locations: The Shrimp Boat Playground, located at DuBois Park in downtown Bluffton; and the Maker Space, located on Bluffton Parkway.

Exhibits are designed to engage children in a variety of ways—through creative play or hands-on explorations. They offer 11 different hands-on experiences for your little ones: 

  • Kinetic sand table
  • Pirate ship
  • Two dress-up stations
  • Derby racetrack
  • Airplane flying experience
  • Café with a kitchen
  • Wind tunnel
  • Two arts and crafts spaces 
  • Reading nook
  • Supermarket checkout line

Self-guided discovery stations allow them to explore their senses. They also offer special events like art workshops or story time with a local author. 

Their goal is to provide an opportunity for children to engage with their world through an exciting atmosphere where they can explore new ideas while having fun!

17. Palmetto Dunes

overview of Palmetto Dunes
Palmetto Dunes

Palmetto Dunes has a little something for everyone. For the golfers in your group, Palmetto Dunes is home to three championship golf courses. Travel and Leisure Family magazine named it the #1 family resort in the US, so you can be sure your game will be in good hands.

If you’re looking to relax on the beach, Palmetto Dunes offers 3 miles of beach access and vacation rental homes. You can also rent surfboards, umbrellas, and chairs if you want to feel like you’re really on vacation.

If you want to get out of town for a bit, there are 200 miles of bike trails, beaches, and local shops nearby to explore. If you’d rather just stick around the resort itself, there are plenty of things going on there too: an outdoor pool, beach pavilions, tennis courts, and day spa—not to mention all three golf courses!

18. Mitchelville Beach

Mitchellville Beach
Mitchelville Beach

Mitchelville Beach is a lesser-known beach on Hilton Head Island, but it’s a great spot for shelling and exploring.

The beach is located near the Hilton Head Island Airport, so it’s a bit secluded and rugged compared to Coligny and Folly Field. There are fewer crowds here, so if you’re looking for a more peaceful experience with fewer people around, this is the place for you!

Mitchelville Beach has restrooms and outdoor showers, as well as picnic tables where you can sit down with your friends or family and enjoy some fresh seafood.

The best part of Mitchelville Beach is that it’s better for shell collecting than swimming. The sand is coarser than what you’d find at other beaches on Hilton Head Island, which means fewer shells are being washed away by the tide. You’ll also find more salt marshes and wetlands here than other beaches on the island—and they’re beautiful in their own right.

If you visit during low tide when salt marshes and beach tide pools are visible, this is one of our favorite spots on Hilton Head Island!

19. Mitchelville Freedom Park

first self-governed community Mitchelville Freedom Park
Mitchelville Freedom Park

Historic Mitchelville Freedom Park is the first self-governed community of former slaves in South Carolina. It was founded in 1862 when escaped slaves built a town for themselves on Hilton Head Island. 

The town had roads, homes, churches, stores, and schools. The enslaved people elected officials who mandated that children between 6 and 15 receive an education—the first town in South Carolina to implement compulsory education laws.

Today Historic Mitchelville Freedom Park preserves the history and traditions of these ancestors through exhibits like replicas of Praise Houses and Homestead Houses, as well as a tool shed. 

Celebrate Juneteenth and the Holiday Lights Show each year at the park. The Amenities include restrooms, free parking, walking trails, a picnic pavilion, and beach access.

Conclusion

If you’re looking for a place to have some family fun, or are traveling alone and want to meet new people, HHI is the perfect destination. In addition to being an island getaway that welcomes tourists all year round, this area is also home to several attractions that will allow visitors and locals alike to enjoy themselves no matter what season they visit.

When it comes to activities while visiting Hilton Head Island, there’s no shortage of things that can be done! From walking along the beach in search of seashells and other treasures at low tide or going fishing off one of the piers on Folly Field Beach (which boasts some great views). 

There are plenty of opportunities for people who enjoy sports such as swimming and surfing—plus all manner of water sports, including sailing lessons! In addition, there are many golf courses around town if golfing is your thing. Otherwise, there are also tennis courts available so both indoor/outdoor fun can be had by all!

Planning a Big Trip? Check Out These 15 Smoky Mountains Airbnbs

Big group trips are special—you’re gathering family, friends, or teammates to laugh, explore, and make real memories. But finding the right place to stay can make or break the whole adventure. 

That’s why we’ve rounded up 15 Smoky Mountains Airbnbs that aren’t just built for big groups—they’re designed for togetherness. Open living spaces, massive decks, game rooms, and cozy spots where late-night chats stretch way past bedtime.

If you’re planning a family reunion, a bachelorette weekend, a company retreat, or just a long-overdue catch-up with your crew, these cabins and lodges make sure everyone has space to hang out, spread out, and feel at home. Plus, you’ll be perfectly placed to explore the Smokies—from hiking hidden trails to checking out some of the best spots for group photos.

✨ Want to grab the best group pictures while you’re here? Don’t miss our list of the best Instagram-worthy houses in the Smokies! 

Buckskin

36 Guests | 12 Bedrooms | 18 Beds | 12 Bathrooms

Big trips deserve a big backdrop, and Buckskin delivers it floor by floor. This Sevierville lodge sleeps 36 across twelve bedrooms — every single one with its own ensuite — so the whole extended crew lands under one roof without a bathroom negotiation in sight. Soaring wood-beamed ceilings and expansive windows frame the mountains from the great room, where a stone fireplace pulls everyone in by evening.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool for year-round swimming, plus a hot tub and porch swing across multiple decks
  • Game room with pool table, air hockey, and arcade games, plus a theater with tiered seating for 21
  • Chef’s kitchen with double dining tables, covered balcony for barbecues, and picnic tables for al fresco group dinners

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Lookout Lodge

22 Guests | 6 Bedrooms | 12 Beds | 7 Bathrooms

There’s no better place to gather the whole group than Lookout Lodge, where open decks and cozy nooks invite connection at every turn. After days spent chasing waterfalls or riding roller coasters, this mountain home welcomes you back with space to sprawl out and memories waiting to be made. It’s a true Smoky Mountains basecamp built for celebrating, relaxing, and everything in between.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Game room with pool table, foosball, arcade, and home theater for all-ages fun
  • Hot tub by the deck as you enjoy the incredible mountain views and sunsets
  • Cozy lodge interiors and aesthetics with plush lounges and a fireplace

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Alpine Mountain Lodge

19 Guests | 6 Bedrooms | 14 Beds | 5 Bathrooms

Alpine Mountain Lodge is where big family vacations and milestone getaways find their perfect home. With three stories of warm gathering spaces and game-packed rooms, there’s always a new memory waiting to be made. After days of Smoky Mountains adventures, your crew can unwind under the stars, trade stories by the grill, or simply enjoy the peace that only the mountains can bring.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Huge game room with an arcade machines, private hot tub, and community pool access
  • Gas fireplaces, poker table, and outdoor space for relaxing or game night fun 
  • Quick drive to Dollywood, Gatlinburg, and National Park trails

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Marco Polo Lodge

28 Guests | 8 Bedrooms | 14 Beds | 8 Bathrooms

When the crew’s ready for non-stop fun, Marco Polo Lodge is your choice with four levels of laughter, connection, and epic Smoky Mountains memories. Splash, game, or grill your way through the day before winding down in a private theater room or watching sunsets from a misty mountain deck. Built for celebrations, reunions, and just-because escapes, this lodge turns every moment into an experience.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool, hot tub, game room, and home theater
  • Fireplace and multiple decks for the best greenery views
  • Short drive to Pigeon Forge, Dollywood, and Smoky Mountains trails

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Green Mountain Lodge

28 Guests | 8 Bedrooms | 8.5 Bathrooms

Green Mountain Lodge is nearly 5,800 square feet of pure group-trip energy, tucked into the wooded hills just minutes from the Pigeon Forge parkway. The soaring great room, anchored by a stone fireplace, is where everyone naturally lands at the end of the day, and the dining table plus island barstools mean no one eats standing up. All eight bedrooms come with their own ensuite, so the whole crew gets privacy without anyone drawing the short straw.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool in its own pavilion, reached by a covered bridge, plus a hot tub on the wraparound deck
  • Game room with pool table, foosball, air hockey, and arcade games, plus an upstairs terrace lined with Adirondack chairs
  • Eight ensuite bedrooms with kings, queens, and a queen-over-queen bunk room, minutes from Dollywood, The Island, and the National Park

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Heaven Lane Cabins

42 Guests | 14 Bedrooms | 22 Beds | 14 Bathrooms

Some groups outgrow one roof — Heaven Lane Cabins solves that with seven. Clustered on the same wooded ridge above Townsend, the peaceful side of the Smokies, this cabin village sleeps 42 across fourteen bedrooms, giving every family or sub-crew its own front door, fireplace, and hot tub while keeping everyone just steps apart. After dark, the whole group converges on the shared fire pit for s’mores and stories under a sky the city never sees.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Seven private hot tubs — one per cabin — plus covered decks and long-range mountain views all around
  • Shared fire pit for full-group gatherings, with king and queen ensuite bedrooms throughout
  • 7 minutes to downtown Townsend and 9 minutes to two Great Smoky Mountains National Park entrances

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Amber Escape

30 Guests | 11 Bedrooms | 14 Beds | 9 Bathrooms

Spread out between four homes with pools, hot tubs, and firepit nights under the stars. At Amber Escape, it feels like its own private village, designed for the kind of big, unforgettable trips you only get once in a while. There’s plenty of space for everyone to relax, recharge, and reconnect. Whether you’re hosting a reunion, retreat, or just a long-overdue celebration, this Smoky Mountains hideaway makes sure no one gets left behind.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private pool, multiple hot tubs, and a massive courtyard for group fun
  • Secluded setting with a true “mountain village” vibe yet with a touch of modern
  • 4 minutes to New Market, 10 minutes to Jefferson City, 30 minutes to Knoxville 

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Aspen Lodge & Birch Lodge

23 Guests | 10 Bedrooms | 11 Beds | 8 Bathrooms

Two complete lodges, side-by-side, with the full amenity stack doubled — that’s Aspen Lodge & Birch Lodge, a Gatlinburg two-cabin combo built for groups who want connection without compromise. Each family or sub-crew gets their own kitchen, indoor pool, theater, and sauna, but everyone’s just steps from the next porch over for shared meals, fire-pit hangs, and ridge-view mornings. It’s the rare big-group option that lets everyone spread out and gather up on their own schedule.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Two private indoor pools, two hot tubs, two saunas, and two private home theaters — one in each lodge
  • Two game rooms with pool tables, multicade arcade systems, and porch swings + outdoor fire pits for evening hangs
  • 5 minutes from downtown Gatlinburg, with easy access to Ripley’s Aquarium, Anakeesta, and the Great Smoky Mountains National Park entrance

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Overlook Lodge

16 Guests | 5 Bedrooms | 8 Beds | 4.5 Bathrooms

Overlook Lodge takes the lodge formula and rewrites it for the modern era. This newly built Sevierville retreat is all glass, light, and ridgeline views — floor-to-ceiling windows, vaulted ceilings, and two expansive decks that frame the Smokies from sunrise to starlight. The lower deck is the headliner: a plunge pool perched right over the endless horizon, with a firepit just steps away for when the mountain air turns crisp.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Plunge pool overlooking the ridgeline + cozy firepit on the lower deck (pool seasonal, mid-May through October)
  • 4 king suites (three with ensuites and private balconies) plus a custom bunk room with four full beds — kids and adults each get their own zone
  • Chef’s kitchen with wine fridge, dining for 8, ping pong game room, and pet-friendly hospitality — just 10 minutes from Pigeon Forge & Dollywood

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Skyline Sanctuary

16 Guests | 5 Bedrooms | 8 Beds | 5 Bathrooms

Skyline Sanctuary turns big-group getaways into something genuinely cinematic. This newly built 5,100-square-foot retreat sits just outside Pigeon Forge — close enough that you can see Dollywood lit up at night from the deck — and every detail leans into the kind of luxury usually reserved for resorts. Vaulted ceilings, floor-to-ceiling windows, all-king en-suite bedrooms, and panoramic ridgeline views set the scene; the rest of the home does the heavy lifting on the fun.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool with an underwater viewing window, plus an 8-seat hot tub on the expansive deck
  • Custom game room with tournament-grade arcade lineup (Pac-Man Battle Royale, Jurassic Park, Fast & Furious, Golden Tee), pool table & shuffleboard
  • Outdoor whiskey firepit, gas-fired pizza oven, and an outdoor banquet table for group dinners with Smoky Mountains views

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Vixen Run Lodge

14 Guests | 5 Bedrooms | 7 Beds | 5 Bathrooms

Vixen Run Lodge brings big-group comfort together with sweeping Smoky Mountain views. Floor-to-ceiling windows and soaring ceilings fill the open living area with natural light, while five king bedrooms and a bonus bunk loft give everyone room to recharge. After exploring Gatlinburg or the national park, gather for games downstairs, unwind in the hot tub, or settle onto the covered deck as the sun disappears behind the ridgeline.

Key Features You’ll Adore:

  • Game room with a pool table, multicade arcade, board games, and large TV
  • Covered mountain-view deck with a private hot tub, plus seasonal community pool and tennis access
  • Minutes from downtown Gatlinburg, Pigeon Forge, and Great Smoky Mountains National Park

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Smokey’s Paradise

22 Guests | 8 Bedrooms | 12 Beds | 8 Bathrooms

Modern mountain mansion meets big-group bliss at Smokey’s Paradise. Tucked just 20 minutes from Pigeon Forge, this Sevierville stunner brings together everything a big group could ask for — soaring vaulted ceilings, all-ensuite bedrooms, and a chef’s kitchen built for crowd cooking. After a day chasing waterfalls or riding Dollywood’s coasters, the crew comes home to a private indoor pool, treetop hot tub soaks, and a game room ready for some friendly competition.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool, hot tub, and game room with pool table, shuffleboard & foosball
  • All 8 bedrooms with ensuite bathrooms so everyone gets their own space
  • Chef’s kitchen with double fridges, double freezers, banquet table & covered balcony lounge for al fresco group dinners

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Bluebell

14 Guests | 6 Bedrooms | 7 Beds | 6 Bathrooms

Still looking for a spot where no one ever says, “I’m bored?” Then check out Bluebell. The home where you can stay home and still have the best vacation. Get the whole group together for movies, games, and big dinners where everyone fits at the table. It’s the perfect place for birthday weekends, team retreats, or family trips where you want to have fun and chill all at once.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Private indoor pool, movie room, game room—fun for all ages
  • High-speed internet, electric fireplace, and seasonal communal pool access
  • Big balcony with beautiful treetop views, cozy house interiors

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Twilight Ridge

15 Guests | 4 Bedrooms | 8 Beds | 4 Bathrooms

Get ready for family games, group dinners, and quiet mornings with mountain views at Twilight Ridge. The kind of place where big families and friend groups come to relax, play, and reconnect. You can spend your days hanging out in sunny rooms, playing pool, or having long talks around the dining table. Celebrating a birthday, having a bachelorette trip, or just sneaking away with friends, this is one you’ll want to come back to.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Two cozy living rooms, fireplaces, pool table, and plenty of space to gather
  • Has access to to community amenities such as ball sports, trails, and many more
  • Perfect for birthdays, family trips, retreats, and celebration weekends

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Bluestem

14 Guests | 6 Bedrooms | 7 Beds | 6 Bathrooms

Bluestem is all about having fun together, whether you’re playing games, watching movies, or sharing a big meal after a day in the mountains. It’s the perfect place for family reunions, small team retreats, or birthday trips where laughter fills every room. Big trips feel easy at this home, and here, mornings start with coffee on the balcony and evenings end with everyone gathered around the fireplace.

Key Features You’ll Adore: 

  • Space for game nights by the pool table and movie marathons at the theater room
  • Indoor pool, fireplace, big balconies with outdoor chairs for lounging
  • Close to Wears Valley, Dollywood, and Pigeon Forge

→ Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay (Unlock Savings!)

Tips for Planning a Big Group Vacation in the Smoky Mountains

Planning a big trip with family, friends, or teammates sounds exciting—but getting everyone on the same page can feel like a challenge! Here are a few of our simple tips to make your upcoming gatherings easy.

Pick a House Built for Groups

Not all cabins are the same. Look for places with open living spaces, plenty of bedrooms, and big gathering areas (like the homes above!). It makes hanging out together way more fun and natural. The group-friendly homes featured in this blog are a great place to start your search!

Plan a Mix of Activities

Some people want to hike, and some just want to chill. Plan one or two group adventures—like visiting Dollywood or hiking Cades Cove—but also leave time for relaxing at the cabin, game nights, and lazy mornings with coffee. If you have limited ideas for your Smokies itinerary, get some more in this curated guide we made—Top 35 things to do in the Smoky Mountains year-round.

Split Up Meals and Chores

If you’re staying for a few days, make it easy: each family or group can take a night to cook dinner or plan breakfast. Big kitchens, BBQ areas, and lots of table space (like you’ll find in these homes) make it simple.

Pick a Central Location

Staying near Pigeon Forge or Gatlinburg means you’re close to parks, shops, restaurants, and activities. Everyone can pick what they want to do without spending hours driving around. Plus, you’ll never want to miss visiting the nearby national parks!

Book Early for Big Groups

Big homes go fast—even if it’s in spring, summer, and fall, and especially in winter. Booking a home as early as today means you get the best spots with the best views (and sometimes even better rates!). To add, your group can still plan and save ahead for this trip. 

✨ Choosing the right house for your group matters because when you have the right house, the right plan, and the right group, your Smoky Mountains trip will surely be a memory that lasts a lifetime. And these homes were picked to make it easy for you!

Other Reads You May Want to Check Out:

Plan Less. Stay More.

Celebrate success, achievement, or a milestone; host a company off-site retreat; or simply catch up with the people who matter most to you. Pick the right Smoky Mountains Airbnb now! No matter the size of your crew, AvantStay has the perfect homes to fit everyone under one roof.

Explore Smoky Mountains Stays →

Top 12 Things to Do in Lake Arrowhead

Lake Arrowhead is one of the best vacation spots in the San Bernardino Mountains in Southern California. A stunning mountain range that is often referred to as the “Alps of Southern California.”

At only an hour to an hour-and-a-half drive from Los Angeles, it’s an easy road trip to escape the city and get into the mountains. Lake Arrowhead is also home to a variety of outdoor activities.

From taking a boat tour on the lake to hiking through the San Bernardino National Forest, a long weekend in Lake Arrowhead is perfect for families or even a romantic weekend getaway.

1. Lake Arrowhead Village

Source: Discover Inland Empire

As one of the central attractions at Lake Arrowhead, Lake Arrowhead Village is on the southern shore of the lake. As you stroll the village, you get to take in the breathtaking views of the lake and mountains.

Lake Arrowhead Village is a bustling downtown area filled with restaurants, shops, and live music. The village is home to the Arrowhead Center Stage Concert Hall, which hosts the famous Lake Arrowhead Village Summer Concert Series.

Whatever season you visit, this town center is host to a variety of fun things to do all year round! Our vacation rental, Sutter, offers quick access to the village and is the perfect place to stay if you don’t want to miss all the action.

2. Skypark at Santa’s Village

Despite its name, Skypark at Santa’s Village is a year-round adventure theme park. Just three miles from Lake Arrowhead, this facility has a long history of making many childhood memories. Since 1955 it has opened and closed its doors many times, but in 2016 it reopened and is operating better than ever before.

Today, this theme park is home to a variety of outdoor activities like axe throwing, rock climbing, mountain biking, archery, and ziplining. Tickets are general admission and include available activities, rides, and entertainment.

While Skypark at Santa’s Village is open year-round, wintertime is the best time to visit. The village turns into a winter wonderland and features seasonal attractions like Ice skating. The park also glows with thousands of Christmas lights during the winter season.

3. McKenzie’s WaterSki School

McKenzie’s Water Ski School is one of the best ways to hit the water and learn something new! If you ever wanted to learn how to water ski, wakeboard, or kneeboard, your getaway to Lake Arrowhead is the perfect place! Don’t worry if you’re new to these sports—the instructors at the school are highly trained and have the experience needed to teach you how to get up and ski on your own in no time.

4. Rim of the World Scenic Byway

Lake Arrowhead is one of the many stops along the Rim of the World Scenic Byway. This 110-mile route follows the rim of the San Bernardino Mountains, starting from Cajon Pass and winding all the way to San Gorgonio Mountain.

There are a variety of noticeable stops along the highway, including Silverwood Lake, Big Bear Lake, and The Mountain History Museum. Big Bear is a popular winter destination, as it is home to Big Bear Mountain Resort, which offers some of the best skiing in Southern California.

The Mountain History Museum is home to the entire history of the mountainous region. This museum is a great stop along the drive to stretch your legs and enjoy the history of Southern California.

5. Lollipop Park

Lollipop Park is a lakefront amusement park that features a plethora of attractions for all ages. The top attractions here are the carousel, go-kart track, food concessions, spinning teacups, a candy store, and a mini golf course. This is the perfect place to visit for the whole family!

6. The Tudor House

The Tudor House is one of the many historical locations in Lake Arrowhead. Its history dates back to the 1920s, before the Great Depression. It is mostly known for its prohibition-era entertainment and rumored mobster management.

Since the 1950s, The Tudor House has been a legal source of entertainment and a popular performance space. It is host to a variety of live music events throughout the year, ranging in every genre.

It is also host to a variety of events such as Sunday Brunch and a monthly Mystery Dinner Theatre. The property is also available to be reserved for private special events, including workshops and retreats.

7. Heaps Peak Arboretum

Heaps Peak Arboretum is a beautiful day adventure within the San Bernardino National Forest. The Sequoia Trail circles the arboretum and offers a variety of interpretive information about the surrounding flora and fauna along the trail. With about 30 acres to adventure, this is the perfect adventure for your family to reconnect with nature.

8. Wildhaven Ranch

Wildhaven Ranch is a wildlife sanctuary home to a number of endangered and indigenous species. At this ranch, you can meet various animals, go on guided tours, participate in fun programs, and do a variety of other things. They are committed to preserving the wildlife indigenous to the San Bernardino Mountains. This is not a zoo and does require reservations in order to visit.

9. Lake Gregory Regional Park

Lake Gregory Regional Park is just a 10-minute drive from Lake Arrowhead. This park offers a variety of entertainment and adventure that is perfect for the whole family. Lake Gregory in Crestline, California, is the best place for all kinds of outdoor activities. You can fish, go boating or kayaking, or even hike if you don’t want to hit the water. If you don’t want to bring your boat or water equipment into the mountains, Lake Gregory has lake equipment rentals available.

Looking to stay near Lake Gregory? Our modern, industrial-charm vacation rental, The Matterhorn Manor, is just a short drive from Lake Gregory and all its popular attractions.

10. Snow Valley Mountain Resort

The winter season is the best time to visit the Snow Valley Mountain Resort for skiing and snowboarding. They have something for everyone! From long intermediate trails to the best beginner terrain to the sledding area, the whole family will find something to do. Even if you are just starting to learn how to ski or snowboard or want to improve your skills, Snow Valley has an award-winning learning center that offers lessons for all skill levels and ages.

The resort is open during the summer months for mountain biking, hiking, and other special events.

11. Lake Arrowhead Queen Boat Tour

See all the beauty Lake Arrowhead has to offer on the Lake Arrowhead Queen Boat Tour. This charming tour departs daily from Lake Arrowhead Village and is an hour-long tour. As you cruise along the shoreline, take in the beautiful views of the lakefront mansions while you learn about the geologic history of the lake and the native cultures that call the lake home.

You can purchase tickets at Leroy’s Boardshop across from the boat landing dock. Tours happen throughout the day, but the best times to go are early in the morning or later in the afternoon.

12. Strawberry Peak

Strawberry Peak is one of the most iconic peaks in the San Gabriel Mountains in Southern California. If you want to spend the day on the hiking trails and enjoy the mountains, driving the 2 hours from Lake Arrowhead makes it the perfect day trip.

Strawberry Peak stands 6,164 feet high and gets its name from the number of strawberries that grow around the peak. This hike may be difficult for beginners or young children, but the views make it worth it once you get to the top.

Looking for the Perfect Lake Arrowhead Cabin?

Blue Spruce by AvantStay

No matter where you would like to stay on the lake, you will find some of the most relaxing and stunning views. With so many outdoor activities during the summer and winter, Lake Arrowhead is the perfect year-round destination. It is the perfect weekend escape from large cities like Los Angeles.

Are you ready to embark on your next Southern California mountain adventure? Get away from all the hustle and bustle and start booking your stay in AvantStay. Book one of our cabin rentals in Lake Arrowhead and experience modern mountain living at our lakeside homes.

10 Cozy Winter Cabins for an Unforgettable Holiday Retreat

Cozy doesn’t mean cramped when you’re talking about mountain lodges built for gatherings. How about cabins with enough bedrooms for the whole extended family, kitchens where holiday feasts actually happen, and living rooms where everyone fits comfortably without sitting on floors?

Cozy winter cabins create a magical Christmas feeling that hotels simply can’t replicate. It’s when crackling fires warm timber walls, hot cocoa steams in oversized mugs, and snow-dusted pines frame every window. 

The moment you step inside a log cabin retreat, something shifts where city stress melts away, replaced by that deep exhale only mountain air and wood smoke can trigger. Stone fireplaces anchor great rooms while wall-to-wall windows showcase the best snowy cap views. 

10 Cozy Winter Cabins by AvantStay

These 10 hand-picked winter cabins can be your storybook retreat this December, where chunky knit blankets drape over leather sofas, wooden beams crisscross cathedral ceilings, and the only sounds competing with conversation are logs popping in fireplaces. 

These aren’t just places to sleep but destinations where memories get made around hearths, game tables, and hot tubs surrounded by winter wonderlands. These experiences will also make you understand why people abandon cities for mountain living.

Looking for more winter getaway options? Check out our guide to the best places to go for Christmas vacations for additional cold-weather destinations.

Twin Creeks Lodge – Asheville, NC

Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths

Tucked away on 33 private acres where two gentle creeks converge, Twin Creeks Lodge creates the ultimate Blue Ridge Mountain escape. The secluded location in Asheville means stargazing from the meadow that reveals constellations you forgot existed in city-lit skies. 

Located 13 miles from downtown Brevard’s artsy shops and restaurants, this home has easy access to Gorges State Park, Pisgah National Forest, and DuPont State Forest waterfalls.

Best Home Features: 

  • Wood-burning fireplace anchors the spacious living area
  • A private hot tub on the walk-out lower level
  • Pool table with a wet bar for tournament nights
  • Outdoor firepit with ample seating for s’mores
  • Wrap-around covered patio and screened-in porch

Why You’ll Love Twin Creeks Lodge: No one will feel cramped, making this perfect for multi-generational holidays where everyone needs both togetherness and personal space.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“Amazing stay at Twin Creeks Lodge with AvantStay! They were super responsive and very friendly. All amenities were as described and they even had beautiful postcards, coasters and local recommendations for us to enjoy. My family of 12 and 2 dogs had a blast at this cabin and highly recommend it for future events. It truly was a cozy, private, and quiet place for an intimate holiday season with my family. Thank you to their response team for communicating efficiently and answering any and all questions we had! We hope to book at Twin Creeks Lodge again in the future! Merry Christmas & Happy Holidays!” – Dominique G.

👉 Book Twin Creeks Lodge

Cove Cottage – Whidbey Island, WA

Can accommodate up to 4 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths

Cove Cottage is an island retreat that brings Pacific Northwest coastal charm, where water views greet you each morning and the fireplace warms evenings after beach walks. Perfect for couples or small families seeking the kind of recharge that only waterfront cabins can provide.

This house is located near Coupeville’s historic waterfront district, close to Whidbey Island beaches, hiking trails, and artisan shops showcasing local Pacific Northwest crafts.

Best Home Features: 

  • Cozy wood-burning fireplace perfect for evening gatherings
  • Private hot tub with water and forest views
  • Comfortable beds and furniture, and a fully equipped kitchen
  • Deck space for outdoor relaxation and alfresco dining
  • Placed perfectly in a peaceful waterfront setting

Why You’ll Love Cove Cottage: The location provides that island escape feeling while maintaining easy access to Coupeville’s shops and restaurants when you need civilization.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“This cabin is the perfect spot to relax and recharge. Love the fireplace, hottub and water view. cozy, comfy beds and furniture. When ready to get out Coupville is down the road.” – Beth S.

👉 Book Cove Cottage

Lakefront Lodge – Big Bear, CA

Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths

The alpine lakes of Big Bear creates stunning backdrops where the spacious Lakefront Lodge sits, ready for California mountain adventures. The cabin feeling comes through in every detail, while modern amenities ensure comfortable stays for larger groups. 

Located near Big Bear Village for shopping and dining, the lake is just steps away for winter scenery and summer water activities.

Best Home Features: 

  • Hot tub on the deck for snow-capped mountain views
  • 2-level deck for outdoor lounging and dining
  • Multiple living areas and a pool table for fun gatherings
  • Gas operated 2 fireplaces and a BBQ grill
  • Proximity to Bear Mountain and Snow Summit ski resorts

Why You’ll Love Lakefront Lodge: Winter brings skiing just minutes away, while the lake setting means year-round beauty that makes every season feel special.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“Great stay, beautiful location, cozy cabin feeling, and very spacious. Would definitely recommend and stay here again!” – Maribel M.

👉 Book Lakefront Lodge

Mont Cervin – Park City, UT

Can accommodate up to 30 guests across 7 condos | 2–3 bedroom units, each with 2–3 baths

Deer Valley’s slopes sit just steps from your door at Mont Cervin, a collection of luxury ski-in/ski-out condos in the heart of exclusive Silver Lake Village. Ski straight home for après by your oversized stone fireplace, then soak in your own private hot tub on the balcony as snow drifts over the village. When you’re ready for town, the free bus outside the building delivers you straight to Historic Main Street.

Best Home Features: 

  • True ski-in/ski-out access to Deer Valley Resort
  • Private outdoor hot tub on every unit’s balcony
  • Oversized stone fireplaces and open-concept mountain-luxe layouts
  • Fine dining, sportswear shops, and Deer Valley’s boutique right in the plaza
  • Book a single condo, the 3BR penthouse, or the full 15-bedroom buyout for groups up to 30

Why You’ll Love Mont Cervin: Winter enthusiasts get slope access measured in steps, not shuttle rides — and every unit ends the day the same way: fireplace, hot tub, mountain view.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“Everything was as expected. We would definitely stay here again. We were very pleasantly surprised and impressed with AvantStay — anytime we had a question or any minor issue, they were incredibly timely being responsive”

👉 Book Mont Cervin

Evergreen Escape — Smoky Mountains, TN

Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 6 beds and 6 baths

Tucked into towering evergreens just minutes from downtown Gatlinburg, Evergreen Escape is the Smoky Mountains lodge that does it all. The stone fireplace and plush seating anchor an open-concept living area made for gathering, while the dining table for 14 means holiday feasts happen here — not at a restaurant. When the crew is ready to play, the game room delivers ping pong, air hockey, and foosball, and the private movie theater seals the deal for cozy winter nights in. Outside, the covered hot tub, cedar sauna, firepit seating for ten, and putting green mean there’s always something to do between hikes in the Great Smoky Mountains National Park and day trips to Dollywood.

Best Home Features: 

  • Stone fireplace and open-concept living area with dining for 14 Game room with ping pong, air hockey, and foosball, plus private movie theater Hot tub, cedar sauna, and firepit seating for 10 under mountain skies Putting green and outdoor BBQ dining for 10 Minutes from downtown Gatlinburg, Great Smoky Mountains National Park, and Dollywood

Why You’ll Love Evergreen Escape: Six bedrooms with flexible sleeping arrangements — including two king en-suites with soaking tubs — make it easy for families of all sizes to find their own corner of comfort while still coming together around the fire.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“An excellent cozy cabin for our winter vacation great location, clean friendly. An excellent choice for any vacation” – Kenzie P.

👉 Book Hazel

Peak 8 – Breckenridge, CO

Can accommodate up to 14 guests | 6 beds and 4 baths

At Peak 8, the après-ski fantasy plays out exactly as imagined. Shred fresh powder on the mountain, ride the shuttle from the Breckenridge Nordic Center — just half a mile away — then come home to crackling fires, hickory plank floors, and plush leather sofas beneath soaring vaulted ceilings. Soaring windows flood the interior with alpenglow at dusk, while the steamy outdoor hot tub becomes mandatory after any day on the slopes.

Located near Breckenridge Ski Resort, Downtown Main Street, Breckenridge Nordic Center, Aurum Food & Wine, and Carter Park.

Best Home Features:

  • Stone fireplace in the primary bedroom plus a game room with sleeper sofa
  • Private hot tub for après-ski mountain views under Colorado stars
  • Hickory plank floors and craftsman chalet design throughout
  • Six bedrooms including a king suite with fireplace, private balcony bedroom, and family-friendly bunk room
  • Shuttle access to Peak 8 base, just ½ mile from the Nordic Center

Why You’ll Love Peak 8: The grand chalet scale fits large groups without sacrificing that intimate cabin feeling — soaring ceilings and warm wood interiors make every evening feel like the mountain came inside with you.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“Beautiful and large house, great location between town and Peak 8 base. You can walk or ride the bus to either place. The house is well equipped and we would definitely consider coming back to this great place.” – Clara T.

👉 Book Peak 8

Condor – Vail, CO

Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 5 beds and 4 baths

Tucked away in the trees, Condor is a mountain home in Vail that provides seclusion in an idyllic natural setting. Rustic cabin-style exterior and the open floor plan with two living areas plus a full apartment in the casita ensure groups have plenty of room to spread out comfortably. 

Best Home Features:

  • Family room in the loft with a ping pong table
  • Sunroom with a hot tub and outdoor deck
  • Sauna for evening relaxation
  • Fully equipped and separate guest house
  • Near Vail Ski Resort, Betty Ford Alpine Gardens, Booth Falls Trailhead, and Vail Village

Why You’ll Love Condor: After days on Vail’s legendary slopes, the hot tub under the sunroom’s glass ceiling creates perfect stargazing moments that make winter nights magical.

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“We came here for a friend’s ski trip (11 of us) and had an absolutely wonderful time. Great amenities, PLENTY of space, and we used the spa area daily. You will need a 4WD car to get up the hill in the winter, and it’s not that walkable to the bus in the winter (because of the hill), but with cars it was totally fine. Avantstay hosted is very well.” – Rachel B.

👉 Book Condor

The Biddle House – Poconos, PA

Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 3 beds and 1 bath

Peaceful Poconos woodlands surround The Biddle House, where deer visit morning and evening, creating those special nature moments that make mountain stays memorable. The location delivers that “away from it all” feeling without actually being inconveniently remote.

Best Home Features: 

  • Fireplace and outdoor BBQ grill for outdoor dining
  • Fully equipped kitchen and very comfy beds
  • Cozy cabin atmosphere perfect for relaxation and family stays
  • Located in a tranquil environment for true getaways
  • Near Pocono ski resorts, including Camelback and Big Boulder

Why You’ll Love The Biddle House: The quiet setting provides a true escape from daily stress with a cozy atmosphere that turns good vacations into great ones. 

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“Great location. Quiet, peaceful. The deer visiting morning and evening was special. The beds were very comfortable and the cabin was cozy. Enjoyed our time there.” – Brenda S.

👉 Book The Biddle House

Trapper – Lake Tahoe, CA

Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 3 beds and 4 baths

Lake Tahoe and its crystal-clear alpine waters create backdrops at this well-appointed cabin, Trapper, which becomes the perfect home base for ski weeks. The incredible lake views mean you get that secluded mountain feeling while staying close to everything Tahoe offers.

Best Home Features: 

  • Large deck for outdoor lounging and gathering
  • Has a stand-alone hot tub and sauna for après-ski relaxation
  • Wood-burning fireplace creating ambiance
  • Near Heavenly, Palisades Tahoe, and Northstar ski resorts 
  • Lake Tahoe beaches and water access

Why You’ll Love Trapper: Tahoe City, Truckee dining, and shopping are easy to access, while the resort-level amenities and cozy interiors will make everyone feel immediately at home

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“We absolutely loved our time at AvantStay’s cabin. The interior was cozy and well appointed, and we particularly enjoyed the hot tub, sauna, and fireplace. The cabin was extremely clean and it felt very private while affording incredible views. It was the perfect home base for our ski week in Tahoe!” – Jacob R.

👉 Book Trapper

Whitney – Berkshires, MA

Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 5 beds and 2 baths

New England’s Berkshire Mountains provide the setting where this spacious 200-year-old home accommodates multiple families comfortably. Whitney is great for group getaways where you need space for kids to play, adults to gather, and everyone to sleep peacefully after exploring. 

Located near Berkshires skiing at Jiminy Peak, attractions include Tanglewood and MASS MoCA, historic Stockbridge and Lenox towns, and scenic mountain hiking trails.

👀 Looking for more Christmas towns to visit in USA? Check out our list of the 17 best Christmas towns that you need to visit this winter.

Best Home Features: 

  • Large house with a large yard and beautiful views
  • 2 picnic tables and a fire pit on the lawn 
  • Cozy fireplace perfect for family reunions or friend group gatherings
  • Great place for events and celebrations
  • Near Massachusetts’s cultural attractions and winter activities

Why You’ll Love Whitney: The big-but-cozy house feeling plus the large yard means everyone will never feel cramped in a vacation rental experience that usually ruins trips. 

What Our Past Guests Are Saying:

“We came as 2 families and had a great time! The house is big but cozy and comfortable. We had a great time and I would definitely recommend it or come back again!” – Hadas A.

👉 Book Whitney

Why Winter Cabin Stays Beat Hotel Vacations

Hotels deliver convenience, but cabins create experiences where families actually spend time together instead of scattering to different rooms. Here’s why AvantStay is your best choice for winter cabin stays: 

  1. Full kitchens mean holiday feasts happen with everyone participating instead of expensive restaurant meals, where kids get antsy and service feels rushed. 
  2. Living rooms with fireplaces become gathering spots where board games, conversation, and hot cocoa nights create those vacation memories that actually stick.
  3. Privacy means your group’s schedule dictates activities instead of worrying about disturbing neighbors through thin hotel walls.
Timberline by AvantStay

Space also matters during winter trips, where wet ski gear needs drying areas, multiple bathrooms prevent morning traffic jams, and separate bedrooms let early risers start days without waking everyone. 

At AvantStay, we have big cabins and ski-in / ski-out vacation homes that provide mudrooms, garages, and storage that hotels simply can’t and don’t offer, making winter sports logistics manageable instead of chaotic. 

Looking for More Winter Reads? 

Hot Cocoa, Cold Noses, and Cabin Dreams

Snow falling softly outside timber-framed windows, flames dancing in stone hearths, that first sip of morning coffee with mountain views stretching endlessly. Winter cabin stays create the kind of peace and connection that makes you question why you ever vacation any other way.

These cozy cabins and lodges prove luxury doesn’t require marble lobbies and room service when you can have crackling fires, hot tubs under stars, and space for everyone you love gathered together. 

From the Smoky Mountains to Lake Tahoe, each of our cozy winter cabins brings its own version of mountain magic where memories get made and families reconnect. 

Trade city stress for mountain calm. Browse AvantStay’s cozy winter cabins and book your snow-dusted retreat before the best properties fill up for the winter season!

Everything You Need to Know About Oregon Clam Season

If you’re traveling to the Oregon Coast to take advantage of the abundant and delicious clams, you’re in luck! The Northwest Zone of Oregon, which is where all of Starfish Vacation Rentals beautiful homes are, features some of the best opportunities for clamming in the state. Peak Oregon clam season in this region tends to be in May and June, though there are some great opportunities to grab these mollusks all year-round. Get the scoop on where to go clamming on the Oregon Coast, as well as how you can find the best rental homes in the region!

Take Advantage of the Peak Oregon Clam Season

First thing’s first: where to go clamming in Oregon? There are around 360 miles of coastline in Oregon. How do you find the best area to go clamming? If you’re staying in Cannon Beach, Arch Cape, Manzanita, or Rockaway Beach, you’re in luck! These towns are some of the best areas to get the delicious and sought-after razor clams. Rockaway Beach is one of our favorite spots to search for clams. In fact, if you book your home in one of our Rockaway Beach rentals, you’ll be able to clam right outside of your back door!

When is the Peak Season for Clamming

Many locals consider peak Oregon clam season to be May and June. May on the Oregon Coast offers plenty of great opportunities for both crabbing and clamming. Consider spending one day combing the beaches for clams and the next visiting Tillamook Bay, Netarts Bay, or Nehalem Bay for peak Oregon Coast crabbing.
In June, bay clams is the most abundant species found along the beaches. Visitors can also enjoy the last razor clams of the season. The razor clam season in Oregon closes from July 15 to September 30 north of Tillamook Head. The limit for razor clams is the first 15 dug, meaning that diggers cannot sort or release the clams. These clams may be taken by hand, shovel, clam gun, or tube that meets the specifications of the Oregon Department of Fish and Wildlife.
Other species of clams available in the Northwest Zone include bay clams (which has a daily limit of 20) and purple varnish clams (which has a daily limit of 72). Any other species that you may come across are considered “other clams,” which have a daily limit of 36 in aggregate.

Source: Oregon’s Adventure Coast

Stay with AvantStay

Before you get your buckets, salt, and shovels, you need to book a gorgeous property from AvantStay. We have the best selection of homes on the Oregon Coast, perfect for families, girlfriends’ getaways, or work retreats. Whether you’re planning on booking your home early in the Oregon Coast clam season or you’d prefer to take advantage of those delicious bay clams, you can’t go wrong with our homes. When it’s time to cook those clams, take advantage of our amazing gourmet kitchens. You’ll be able to easily whip up a delicious feast for your family or traveling companions. If you’d prefer to let someone else do the work (after all, you’ve been finding clams all day!), utilize our guest services. We’ll arrange for our caterer to create a world-class feast in your own rental home. You won’t have to lift a finger to enjoy a delicious dinner!

Browse our full list of properties and book today. We look forward to having you.

Truly A Treasure by AvantStay

The Best Time to Visit Port Aransas

On a charming Texas island, you can enjoy the endless white sand beaches and the warm waters of the Gulf of Mexico. This is where coastal living comes alive in a laid-back fishing village just three hours from Houston and four hours from Austin. 

And every season offers different Gulf Coast adventures in Port Aransas, Texas’s beloved barrier island destination on Mustang Island. The community features excellent fishing opportunities year-round, from deep-sea charters to surf fishing along 18 miles of pristine beaches. 

The historic Port Aransas Museum showcases the area’s rich maritime heritage, while the University of Texas Marine Science Institute offers educational experiences about Gulf marine life.  Whooping cranes grace the nearby Aransas National Wildlife Refuge each winter, creating spectacular birdwatching opportunities.

Begin your day fishing from the jetties, watching pelicans dive for breakfast, then enjoy lunch at the top local restaurants serving fresh Gulf seafood with beautiful bay views. The relaxed island atmosphere indeed defines every moment in this Texas coastal gem. 

The best time to visit Port Aransas is March through May and October through November, when spring and fall shoulder seasons offer comfortable temperatures, fewer crowds, and perfect conditions for outdoor activities. The subtropical climate creates enjoyable weather most of the year. 

If you want to learn more about when Port Aransas offers its most amazing Gulf Coast experiences, let’s explore every season so you can plan your upcoming Texas island trip.

About Port Aransas, TX

Port Aransas spreads across the northern tip of Mustang Island as an 18-mile barrier island known for world-class fishing, pristine Gulf beaches, and authentic Texas coastal culture. The community offers excellent fishing opportunities, creating an atmosphere that draws anglers, families, and beach lovers year-round.

The subtropical climate features long, hot, and oppressive summers; short and cool winters; and windy conditions year-round. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from 51°F to 89°F and is rarely below 39°F or above 92°F.

The island enjoys 18 miles of beautiful beaches perfect for swimming, fishing, and beachcombing. Fishing remains excellent year-round with different species available each season, while the jetties and piers provide convenient shore fishing access throughout most of the year.

Port Aransas Travel Seasons at a Glance

Here’s when beach enthusiasts arrive and when you can enjoy peaceful shores and quiet fishing moments.

Peak Times: June Through August and Holiday Weekends

Summer brings hot and humid weather to Port Aransas, with temperatures ranging from 75°F-95°F. This is peak tourist season and there is a lively atmosphere on Mustang Island, with families and beach lovers flocking to the shore. Memorial Day through Labor Day represents peak beach season with the hottest temperatures perfect for swimming and water activities.

Great Value Times: March Through May and October Through November

The spring months of March through May is widely considered as the best time to visit Port Aransas. Spring typically contains the most clear days free from overcast, daily temperatures are generally pleasant, and there is relatively low precipitation throughout the season. Fall provides comfortable weather with fewer crowds while maintaining access to most outdoor activities and excellent fishing.

Peaceful Times: December Through February and Mid-Week Visits

Winter months offer the most tranquil island experiences with mild temperatures and excellent conditions for fishing and birdwatching. Weekday visits throughout the year provide peaceful beach walks and easier restaurant access without weekend crowds.

Why Visit Port Aransas?

Port Aransas offers authentic Texas Gulf Coast experiences with 18 miles of pristine beaches perfect for fishing, swimming, and beach activities. The area features some of the best fishing on the Texas coast, from jetty fishing for redfish and speckled trout to deep-sea charters targeting marlin and tuna.

The community maintains a genuine small-town character with locally-owned bait shops, family seafood restaurants, and a welcoming fishing culture. Fresh Gulf seafood restaurants serve locally-caught shrimp, redfish, and flounder while offering stunning bay and Gulf views.

Annual events include the Texas SandFest in April, one of the largest sand sculpture competitions in the world, drawing artists and enthusiasts from across the globe. The Whooping Crane Festival celebrates the winter migration of these endangered birds to the nearby Aransas National Wildlife Refuge.

Your Month-by-Month Guide to Port Aransas

  • Port Aransas in January: Cool but comfortable weather, excellent fishing, whooping crane viewing season
  • Port Aransas in February: Mild temperatures, fewer crowds, perfect for outdoor activities and fishing
  • Port Aransas in March: Spring awakening, warming weather, fishing season picks up
  • Port Aransas in April: Ideal spring conditions, Texas SandFest, comfortable beach weather
  • Port Aransas in May: Perfect temperatures, beach season begins, excellent fishing
  • Port Aransas in June: Summer heat starts, busy beaches, prime family vacation time
  • Port Aransas in July: Peak summer heat, crowded beaches, optimal swimming conditions
  • Port Aransas in August: Hottest summer weather, warmest Gulf temperatures, high humidity
  • Port Aransas in September: Early fall relief, warm Gulf water, fewer families
  • Port Aransas in October: Perfect fall weather, comfortable temperatures, excellent fishing
  • Port Aransas in November: Cool but pleasant, great fishing weather, peaceful beaches
  • Port Aransas in December: Mild winter start, holiday decorations, quiet island atmosphere

When Is the Best Time to Visit Port Aransas?

March through May represents the optimal time to visit, offering the clearest days, pleasant temperatures, and low precipitation. The fall months of October to November also prove to be pleasant for those who enjoy cooler weather. 

Spring offers especially beautiful conditions with temperatures between 75-85 degrees, and water temperatures around 70 degrees, with most locals finding the water swimmable starting in mid-late April.

For peak beach conditions, summer months bring hot temperatures, still ideal for swimming and water sports, while winter offers mild weather perfect for fishing and birdwatching.

Visiting in Winter (December to February)

Winter showcases Port Aransas’s mild climate advantages with comfortable temperatures perfect for fishing, birdwatching, and outdoor exploration without summer heat and humidity. Average temperatures remain pleasant throughout the winter months, making fishing and beach activities enjoyable year-round.

This season offers the most peaceful island experiences with uncrowded beaches, easy parking, and optimal conditions for nature photography and wildlife observation along the coastline and nearby refuges.

Port Aransas Weather in Winter

  • December: 55°F to 70°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • January: 51°F to 65°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • February: 55°F to 68°F | About 2 inches of rain

Things to Do in Port Aransas During Winter

Winter brings the spectacular Whooping Crane migration to the nearby Aransas National Wildlife Refuge from November through March, with over 400 of these endangered birds creating amazing viewing opportunities. Beach walks become incredibly peaceful with miles of shoreline available for shell collecting and bird watching.

Fishing activities include excellent redfish and speckled trout fishing in the bay, while the jetties provide great fishing for sheepshead and black drum during cooler months.

Port Aransas Events in Winter

  • Whooping Crane Festival – Celebrating the winter migration of endangered cranes
  • Holiday Boat Parades – Festive decorations on the water
  • Winter Fishing Tournaments – Taking advantage of excellent fishing conditions
  • New Year’s Beach Celebrations – Traditional celebrations with mild weather

Food Scene in Winter

Restaurants focus on comfort foods and warming dishes perfect for cooler evenings, featuring fresh Gulf seafood and local specialties. Many establishments offer cozy indoor dining with bay views and fireplaces for chilly nights.

Winter Travel Tips

Pack layers for temperature changes between morning and evening. Winter offers the best value for accommodations and activities. Take advantage of peaceful beaches for long walks and photography. Most fishing and outdoor activities remain available due to the mild subtropical climate.

Visiting in Spring (March to May)

Spring represents the ideal time to visit, with March through May widely considered the best season featuring the most clear days, pleasant temperatures between 70°F and 80°F, and relatively low precipitation. This season combines perfect weather with manageable crowds before summer peak season arrives.

Spring kicks off with the Texas SandFest in April, one of the largest sand sculpture competitions in the world, drawing artists and enthusiasts from across the globe.

Port Aransas Weather in Spring

  • March: 58°F to 75°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • April: 65°F to 80°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • May: 72°F to 85°F | About 3 inches of rain

Things to Do in Port Aransas During Spring

Beach activities become increasingly popular as temperatures warm and Gulf conditions improve for swimming, fishing, and water sports. Spring provides excellent fishing conditions with speckled trout, redfish, and flounder becoming more active in warming waters.

The jetties offer great fishing for a variety of species, while charter boat fishing begins picking up for offshore species as weather conditions improve.

Port Aransas Events in Spring

  • Texas SandFest – World-renowned sand sculpture competition in April
  • Spring Fishing Tournaments – Taking advantage of excellent fishing conditions
  • Wildflower Viewing – Coastal prairie wildflowers in nearby areas
  • Spring Break Activities – Family-friendly beach events and festivals

Food Scene in Spring

Restaurants expand outdoor seating as the weather becomes perfect for patio dining with Gulf and bay views. Spring menus feature fresh Gulf seafood and seasonal ingredients, while beachside cafes reopen patios overlooking the water.

Spring Travel Tips

Book accommodations early, as spring offers excellent weather before summer rates begin. Pack light layers for daily temperature variations. Spring provides optimal conditions for fishing and beach activities. Restaurant reservations become more important as visitor numbers increase.

Visiting in Summer (June to August)

Summer brings hot and humid weather to Port Aransas, with temperatures ranging from 75°F-95°F. This is peak tourist season with a lively atmosphere on Mustang Island, with families and beach lovers flocking to the shore. Hot temperatures create perfect conditions for swimming, surfing, and beach activities while the Gulf water reaches its warmest temperatures of the year.

This season features the most active beaches, a family-friendly atmosphere, and peak vacation energy with all attractions and activities operating at full capacity.

Port Aransas Weather in Summer

  • June: 75°F to 90°F | About 3 inches of rain
  • July: 78°F to 92°F | About 3 inches of rain
  • August: 78°F to 92°F | About 3 inches of rain

Things to Do in Port Aransas During Summer

Beach activities dominate summer experiences with swimming, fishing, beach volleyball, and water sports. The jetties provide excellent fishing for tarpon, king mackerel, and other summer species, while charter boats target offshore species in the deeper Gulf waters.

Dolphin watching tours operate regularly, while water sports like kayaking, paddleboarding, and parasailing become popular activities in the calm bay waters.

Port Aransas Events in Summer

  • Fourth of July Celebrations – Beach fireworks and patriotic festivities
  • Summer Fishing Tournaments – Targeting various Gulf species
  • Beach Volleyball Tournaments – Competitive events on the sand
  • Live Music Festivals – Outdoor concerts at various island venues

Food Scene in Summer

Beachfront restaurants maximize outdoor seating with Gulf breezes and sunset views. Summer menus emphasize fresh seafood, light fare, and refreshing drinks perfect for hot-weather dining. Seafood markets and beach snack vendors become essential stops during hot beach days.

Summer Travel Tips

Book accommodations well in advance, as summer represents peak season with the highest demand and prices. Arrive early at popular beaches for parking and good fishing spots. Pack sun protection and light clothing for hot, humid conditions. Make restaurant reservations ahead for weekend visits.

Visiting in Fall (September to November)

The fall months of October to November prove to be pleasant for those who enjoy cooler weather, with comfortable conditions for outdoor activities. Ocean temperatures remain warm from summer heat, while air temperatures become more comfortable for outdoor activities and extended fishing trips.

This shoulder season combines excellent weather with reduced crowds and often provides the best overall value for coastal vacations.

Port Aransas Weather in Fall

  • September: 75°F to 88°F | About 4 inches of rain
  • October: 68°F to 82°F | About 3 inches of rain
  • November: 60°F to 75°F | About 2 inches of rain

Things to Do in Port Aransas During Fall

Beach activities continue through October with warm Gulf temperatures and comfortable air conditions. Fall provides excellent fishing weather with lower humidity and consistent temperatures throughout the day, perfect for extended fishing trips.

The migration season begins, bringing excellent birdwatching opportunities as various species pass through the area heading south for winter.

Port Aransas Events in Fall

  • Fall Fishing Tournaments – Taking advantage of excellent fishing conditions
  • Migratory Bird Festivals – Celebrating fall migration season
  • Harvest Celebrations – Local seafood and agricultural festivals
  • Halloween Beach Events – Family-friendly costume celebrations

Food Scene in Fall

Restaurants feature seasonal menus celebrating local harvest and fresh Gulf seafood. Outdoor dining remains popular with comfortable temperatures and stunning fall sunsets. Many establishments offer special seafood dinners highlighting the area’s fishing heritage.

Fall Travel Tips

September and October offer the best combination of pleasant weather and manageable crowds. Pack light layers for temperature variations between day and evening. Fall provides excellent photography opportunities with clear skies and dramatic lighting. Hurricane season officially runs through November, though Port Aransas is generally well-protected.

Best Time of the Year to Visit Port Aransas (By Interest)

Choose your perfect timing based on what draws you most to this authentic Texas coastal destination:

For Perfect Beach Weather: Extended Summer

Best Time for Port Aransas Swimming and Water Sports

May through September provides the warmest temperatures and most comfortable Gulf conditions, perfect for swimming, fishing, and all beach activities with optimal warm weather.

For Ideal Fishing Conditions: Shoulder Seasons

Best Time for Port Aransas Fishing Adventures

March through May and October through November offer perfect fishing weather with comfortable temperatures, lower humidity, and excellent conditions for both bay and offshore fishing on world-class fishing grounds.

For Avoiding Crowds: Off-Season Tranquility

Best Time for Peaceful Port Aransas

December through February provides the most tranquil island experiences with mild temperatures, uncrowded beaches, and easy access to restaurants and fishing spots without peak season crowds.

For Best Overall Value: Spring and Fall

Best Time for Affordable Port Aransas

March through May and October through November offer the best combination of comfortable weather, fewer crowds, and excellent value before and after peak summer pricing.

For Family Activities: Extended Warm Season

Best Time for Port Aransas Family Fun

May through September provides the warmest weather, most family-oriented activities, and optimal beach conditions when all attractions and water activities operate at full capacity.

For Birdwatching and Wildlife: Migration Seasons

Best Time for Port Aransas Natural Experiences

November through March offers spectacular whooping crane viewing and fall/winter migration opportunities, while year-round dolphin watching and marine life observation remain excellent.

For Photography and Nature: Year-Round Appeal

Best Time for Port Aransas Stunning Views

All seasons offer unique photographic opportunities from winter’s peaceful beaches and wildlife to summer’s vibrant beach life, spring’s perfect weather, and fall’s comfortable conditions.

Where to Stay in Port Aransas

Experience exceptional beachfront homes that capture Port Aransas’s authentic island lifestyle – beach access, Gulf views, and luxury amenities that enhance every moment of your Texas coast getaway. Here are some spectacular Port Aransas homes that are just a golf cart ride to the beach:

  • Third Sandbar – Your ultimate Port A getaway just seven blocks from the beach, that can comfortably host up to 16 guests with complete amenities.
  • Coral Reef – For sun, sand, fun, and relaxation, this vibrant home will not disappoint. You can enjoy fishing, water sports, or simply lounging on the sandy shores.
  • Palm Palace – Centrally located for guests to enjoy the community of Port Aransas. But lets you truly feel your own quiet place in the middle of Old Town Port A.
  • Between the Shores – This newly constructed home is just a short stroll from the beach. You’ll love the convenience of the boardwalk leading you directly to the sandy shores.
  • Casa Rita – For those craving for even more excitement and playful fun, this home is your best bet! Complete with amenities and just a short walk away from the beach.

Create Your Port Aransas Itinerary

Ready to plan your Texas Gulf Coast adventure? Let our team help you organize everything for your Port Aransas getaway! We can arrange fishing charters, restaurant reservations, activity bookings, and authentic experiences that showcase the real character of this incredible island destination.

Just contact us or download the AvantStay App to book activities, get local recommendations, and manage your entire Port Aransas experience through one convenient platform.

Want more ideas for coastal adventures? Check out our guide to the best things to do in Port Aransas!

Plan Your Port Aransas Adventure

No matter which season calls to you, Port Aransas’s pristine beaches, world-class fishing, authentic Texas coastal culture, and genuine island hospitality create memories that last forever. This destination perfectly balances beach relaxation with fishing adventures and cultural experiences. Every visit reveals new discoveries and authentic Gulf Coast experiences.

Your perfect Port Aransas vacation home awaits. Book with AvantStay today and discover how incredible coastal getaways become when you experience Port Aransas’s legendary fishing, natural beauty, and Texas Gulf Coast magic.

FAQs

Is Port Aransas expensive to visit?

Port Aransas costs significantly more during peak summer months from June through August when families fill every beachfront rental and waterfront restaurant. Hotels and dining establishments charge premium rates because demand stays high for perfect beach weather and water activities. But visit during shoulder seasons in spring or fall, and you’ll find excellent deals on island homes while still enjoying comfortable weather and access to most activities.

How crowded does Port Aransas get?

Peak summer months bring substantial crowds, especially July and August, when beaches become busy and popular restaurants require advance reservations. However, Port Aransas’s 18 miles of beaches provide ample space even during busy periods. Spring and fall shoulder seasons offer fewer crowds with excellent weather, while winter months provide the most peaceful island experiences.

When should I avoid Port Aransas?

There really isn’t a bad time to visit Port Aransas since the subtropical climate provides comfortable conditions year-round for different activities. Summer can be hot and humid for some visitors, while winter offers milder temperatures perfect for fishing and outdoor exploration. Hurricane season runs from June through November, though Port Aransas is generally well-protected by its location. The key is matching your visit to seasonal activities – come for beach fun in summer, fishing in spring and fall, or peaceful relaxation in winter.

The Best Time to Visit Malibu

Dramatic cliffs, turquoise Pacific waters along California’s most famous coastline, Hollywood glamour, and natural beauty in a coastal paradise. 

Each season brings unique magic to Malibu, the legendary beachside community known for world-class surfing and celebrity homes. This coastal gem features over 20 miles of stunning beaches, from the famous Zuma Beach to secluded El Matador with its dramatic rock formations. 

The iconic Pacific Coast Highway winds through the community, connecting scenic beaches to the Santa Monica Mountains, where hiking trails offer panoramic views of the coastline. World-renowned art at the Getty Villa showcases ancient treasures, while local wineries in the Malibu hills produce award-winning vintages. 

The relaxed California lifestyle defines every moment in this oceanfront paradise. You can start your day walking along pristine beaches, watching dolphins play in the waves, and then exploring the finest dining experiences featuring fresh Pacific seafood with breathtaking ocean views. 

The best time to visit Malibu is September through November and May through June, when shoulder seasons provide warm weather, fewer crowds, and crystal-clear skies. The Mediterranean climate offers comfortable conditions year-round. Summer brings perfect beach weather with warm temperatures ideal for swimming and surfing, while winter provides mild conditions excellent for hiking and exploring.

Malibu delivers its spectacular and different coastal experiences depending on the season. Let’s explore every season so you can choose and plan your Pacific Coast fun.

About Malibu, CA

Malibu stretches along 21 miles of California’s Pacific Coast as an exclusive beachside community known for world-famous beaches, celebrity estates, and pristine natural beauty. The area combines luxury living with authentic beach culture, creating an atmosphere that attracts surfers, nature enthusiasts, and those seeking the ultimate coastal lifestyle.

The Mediterranean climate features comfortable summers and mild winters, with temperatures typically varying from 49°F to 76°F throughout the year and rarely going below 43°F or above 84°F. October, June, and May are the most pleasant months in Malibu, while January and February are the least comfortable months.

The coastline boasts numerous world-class beaches perfect for surfing, swimming, and sunbathing. Point Dume State Beach offers swimming, fishing, diving, viewpoints, tidepools, whale watching (January – March), picnic tables, restrooms, and showers, while outdoor activities in the nearby Santa Monica Mountains provide endless exploration opportunities.

Malibu Travel Seasons at a Glance

Here’s when beach enthusiasts visit and when you can discover quiet shores and peaceful coastal moments.

Peak Times: July Through August and Holiday Weekends

Summer attracts the largest number of tourists visiting Malibu, with July and August being the busiest season for tourism, so lodging and other accommodations may cost more than usual. Families and beachgoers fill oceanfront restaurants and popular surf spots during these warm months, perfect for water activities.

Great Value Times: May Through June and September Through November

Spring offers relaxing vacation experiences with comfortable temperatures and blooming wildflowers throughout the coastal hills. Fall delivers some of the year’s most pleasant conditions with warm days, cool evenings, and excellent weather for all outdoor activities while avoiding summer crowds.

Peaceful Times: December Through April and Mid-Week Visits

Winter months provide the most tranquil coastal experiences with mild temperatures perfect for hiking, exploring, and outdoor adventures. Weekday visits throughout the year offer peaceful beach walks and easier access to restaurants without weekend crowds.

Why Visit Malibu?

Malibu offers unparalleled coastal experiences with 21 miles of diverse beaches perfect for surfing, swimming, and beach activities. The area features some of California’s most dramatic coastline, from wide sandy beaches to secluded coves with towering rock formations and hidden tide pools.

The community maintains its authentic beach culture with locally-owned surf shops, organic cafes, and family restaurants serving fresh Pacific seafood. Top attractions include world-renowned surfing beaches, stunning state parks, and the Getty Villa museum.

Annual events celebrate the area’s surf culture and natural beauty, including beach festivals and environmental awareness programs. Whale watching season runs from January through March, when gray whales migrate along the coast, creating spectacular viewing opportunities from the beaches and hiking trails.

Your Month-by-Month Guide to Malibu

  • Malibu in January: Cool but comfortable weather, whale watching season, peaceful beaches
  • Malibu in February: Mild temperatures, fewer tourists, excellent hiking conditions
  • Malibu in March: Spring emergence, warming weather, wildflowers beginning to bloom
  • Malibu in April: Ideal spring conditions, comfortable beach weather, perfect for outdoor activities
  • Malibu in May: Excellent temperatures, beach season begins, shoulder season value
  • Malibu in June: Summer starts, warm beach weather, optimal surf conditions
  • Malibu in July: Peak summer heat, busy beaches, perfect swimming temperatures
  • Malibu in August: Hottest summer weather, warmest ocean conditions, peak tourist season
  • Malibu in September: Early fall comfort, warm ocean water, fewer crowds
  • Malibu in October: Perfect fall weather, comfortable temperatures, clear skies
  • Malibu in November: Cool but pleasant, excellent outdoor weather, peaceful atmosphere
  • Malibu in December: Mild winter beginning, holiday quiet, tranquil coastal setting

When Is the Best Time to Visit Malibu?

September through November and May through June represent the optimal times to visit, offering comfortable temperatures, manageable crowds, and excellent weather conditions. For peak beach experiences, summer months provide warm temperatures perfect for swimming and water sports.

For the best beach weather, you’ll particularly want to plan your trip in September or early October. These months combine warm ocean temperatures with comfortable air conditions and fewer crowds.

Visiting in Winter (December to February)

Winter showcases Malibu’s mild climate advantages with comfortable temperatures perfect for hiking, exploring, and outdoor activities without summer heat. January and February are the least comfortable months, but still offer pleasant conditions for most outdoor activities.

This season offers the most peaceful coastal experiences with uncrowded beaches, easy parking, and optimal conditions for nature photography and wildlife observation along the shoreline.

Malibu Weather in Winter

  • December: 50°F to 65°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • January: 49°F to 64°F | About 3 inches of rain
  • February: 50°F to 65°F | About 3 inches of rain

Things to Do in Malibu During Winter

Winter brings whale watching season from January through March, when gray whales migrate along the coast, providing spectacular viewing opportunities from beaches and coastal hiking trails. Beach walks become incredibly peaceful with miles of shoreline available for shell collecting and bird watching.

Nature activities include hiking in the Santa Monica Mountains, exploring tide pools at low tide, and visiting the Getty Villa with comfortable temperatures for outdoor exploration of the gardens and grounds.

Malibu Events in Winter

  • Gray Whale Migration – Spectacular whale watching opportunities from shore
  • Holiday Beach Walks – Peaceful celebrations with mild weather
  • Winter Farmers Markets – Local produce and coastal community gatherings
  • Art Gallery Openings – Indoor cultural events and exhibitions

Food Scene in Winter

Restaurants focus on comfort foods and seasonal ingredients perfect for cooler evenings, featuring fresh seafood and locally-sourced produce. Many establishments offer cozy indoor dining with ocean views and fireplaces for chilly nights.

Winter Travel Tips

Pack layers for temperature variations between morning and evening. Winter offers the best value for accommodations and activities. Take advantage of peaceful beaches for photography and nature walks. Most outdoor activities remain accessible due to the mild Mediterranean climate.

Visiting in Spring (March to May)

Spring represents one of the ideal times to visit, with temperatures gradually warming from the mid-60s in March to the comfortable mid-70s by May. This season combines perfect weather with manageable crowds before summer peak season begins.

Spring offers vibrant wildflowers, making scenic drives even more picturesque, while ocean temperatures begin warming to comfortable levels for swimming and water activities.

Malibu Weather in Spring

  • March: 52°F to 68°F | About 2 inches of rain
  • April: 55°F to 71°F | About 1 inch of rain
  • May: 60°F to 74°F | About 0.5 inches of rain

Things to Do in Malibu During Spring

Beach activities become increasingly popular as temperatures warm and ocean conditions improve for surfing, swimming, and water sports. The Santa Monica Mountains showcase spring beauty with blooming wildflowers and perfect hiking conditions.

Point Dume hiking offers stunning views, while the coastal trails provide excellent opportunities for nature photography and wildlife observation with comfortable temperatures.

Malibu Events in Spring

  • Wildflower Blooms – Peak season for coastal hill wildflower displays
  • Spring Surf Contests – Taking advantage of excellent wave conditions
  • Earth Day Celebrations – Environmental awareness events and beach cleanups
  • Outdoor Art Festivals – Showcasing local artists with perfect weather

Food Scene in Spring

Restaurants expand outdoor seating as the weather becomes ideal for patio dining with ocean views. Spring menus feature fresh local ingredients and seasonal seafood, while beachside cafes reopen patios overlooking the Pacific.

Spring Travel Tips

Book accommodations early, as spring offers excellent value before summer rates begin. Pack light layers for daily temperature changes. Spring provides optimal conditions for hiking and outdoor adventures. Beach parking becomes more competitive as the weather improves.

Visiting in Summer (June to August)

Summer is the most popular season to visit, especially during the peak temperatures of July and August. Hot temperatures create perfect conditions for swimming, surfing, and beach activities while ocean water reaches its warmest temperatures of the year.

This season features the most active beaches, a family-friendly atmosphere, and peak vacation energy with all attractions and activities operating at full capacity.

Malibu Weather in Summer

  • June: 62°F to 74°F | About 0.2 inches of rain
  • July: 65°F to 76°F | About 0.1 inches of rain
  • August: 66°F to 76°F | About 0.2 inches of rain

Things to Do in Malibu During Summer

Beach activities dominate summer experiences with swimming, surfing, beach volleyball, and sunbathing. Point Dume State Beach offers world-class, legendary surfing for all skill levels, while numerous beaches provide perfect conditions for water sports.

Charter fishing trips target summer species, while kayak tours explore sea caves and coastal wildlife. The Getty Villa provides cultural experiences with extended hours and special summer exhibitions.

Malibu Events in Summer

  • Fourth of July Beach Celebrations – Oceanfront fireworks and patriotic festivities
  • Summer Surf Competitions – Professional and amateur surfing contests
  • Beach Volleyball Tournaments – Competitive events on the sand
  • Outdoor Concert Series – Live music at various beachfront venues

Food Scene in Summer

Beachfront restaurants maximize outdoor seating with ocean breezes and sunset views. Summer menus emphasize fresh seafood, light fare, and refreshing drinks perfect for warm-weather dining. Beach cafes and food trucks become popular stops during hot beach days.

Summer Travel Tips

Book accommodations well in advance, as summer represents peak season with the highest demand and prices. Arrive early at popular beaches for parking and prime spots. Pack sun protection and light clothing for warm, dry conditions. Make restaurant reservations ahead for weekend visits.

Visiting in Fall (September to November)

Fall can be just as fun as summer – and without the crowds, too. Fall daily highs range from 75.9°F to 68.7°F, which will feel comfortable, while ocean temperatures remain warm from summer heat, making it ideal for continued beach activities.

This shoulder season combines excellent weather with reduced crowds and often provides the best overall value for coastal vacations.

Malibu Weather in Fall

  • September: 66°F to 76°F | About 0.3 inches of rain
  • October: 62°F to 74°F | About 0.8 inches of rain
  • November: 55°F to 69°F | About 1.5 inches of rain

Things to Do in Malibu During Fall

Beach activities continue through October with warm ocean temperatures and comfortable air conditions. The Santa Monica Mountains provide excellent hiking weather with lower humidity and consistent temperatures throughout the day.

Fall offers beautiful colors, making scenic drives even more picturesque, while the Pacific Coast Highway showcases autumn beauty with perfect driving conditions.

Malibu Events in Fall

  • Harvest Festivals – Celebrating local wine country and seasonal produce
  • Fall Surf Contests – Taking advantage of excellent wave conditions
  • Environmental Awareness Events – Beach conservation and sustainability programs
  • Art Gallery Walks – Cultural events with comfortable outdoor weather

Food Scene in Fall

Restaurants feature seasonal menus celebrating local harvest and fresh seafood. Outdoor dining remains popular with comfortable temperatures and stunning fall sunsets. Many establishments offer special wine dinners highlighting nearby Malibu wineries.

Fall Travel Tips

September and October offer the best combination of pleasant weather and manageable crowds. Pack light layers for temperature variations between day and evening. Fall provides excellent photography opportunities with clear skies and dramatic lighting. Hurricane activity doesn’t affect this California coastal region.

Best Time of the Year to Visit Malibu (By Interest)

Choose your perfect timing based on what draws you most to this legendary coastal destination:

For Perfect Beach Weather: Summer Peak

Best Time for Malibu Swimming and Water Sports

June through September provides the warmest temperatures and most comfortable ocean conditions, perfect for swimming, surfing, and all beach activities with optimal summer weather.

For Ideal Outdoor Conditions: Shoulder Seasons

Best Time for Malibu Hiking and Exploration

May through June and September through October offer perfect weather for hiking in the Santa Monica Mountains, exploring coastal areas, and enjoying outdoor activities with comfortable temperatures and minimal precipitation.

For Avoiding Crowds: Off-Season Tranquility

Best Time for Peaceful Malibu

December through April provides the most tranquil coastal experiences with mild temperatures, uncrowded beaches, and easy access to restaurants and attractions without peak season crowds.

For Best Overall Value: Spring and Fall

Best Time for Affordable Malibu

May through June and September through November offer the best combination of comfortable weather, fewer crowds, and excellent value before and after peak summer pricing.

For Family Activities: Extended Summer

Best Time for Malibu Family Fun

June through September provides the warmest weather, most family-oriented activities, and optimal beach conditions when all attractions and water activities operate at full capacity.

For Surfing and Water Sports: Extended Season

Best Time for Malibu Wave Riding

April through October offer excellent surfing conditions with consistent waves, comfortable water temperatures, and ideal weather for extended beach sessions and water activities.

For Photography and Scenic Beauty: Year-Round Appeal

Best Time for Malibu Stunning Views

All seasons offer unique photographic opportunities from winter’s dramatic storms to summer’s vibrant beach life, spring’s wildflowers, and fall’s perfect golden hour lighting.

Where to Stay in Malibu

Experience exceptional oceanfront homes that capture Malibu’s legendary lifestyle – beach access, stunning views, and luxury amenities that enhance every moment of your Pacific Coast getaway. Here are some spectacular Malibu homes you can book with AvantStay:

  • Cielo Estate – Perched high in the Malibu hills, this two-in-one escape has sweeping ridgeline views. It has a main house and private studio, perfect for big groups. 
  • Pacific Coast Outlook – Wake up to the endless Pacific Ocean horizon in this stunning coastal home framed by big windows and perfectly situated in Santa Monica. 
  • Bluewater Haven – Perfectly positioned on Carbon Beach along the iconic Pacific Coast Highway, this elegant beachside home offers panoramic ocean views and beach access.
  • Stardust – A glamorous retreat that is secluded enough while still just minutes from Malibu’s beautiful beaches and star-studded California experience.
  • Dume Point – Best for groups, there are endless ways to stay active and create lasting memories in this bright and airy home due to its complete amenities.

Create Your Malibu Itinerary

Ready to plan your Pacific Coast adventure? Let our team help you organize everything for your Malibu getaway! We can arrange surf lessons, restaurant reservations, activity bookings, and authentic experiences that showcase the real character of this incredible coastal destination.

Just contact us or download the AvantStay App to book activities, get local recommendations, and manage your entire Malibu experience through one convenient platform.

Want more ideas for coastal adventures? Check out our guide to the best things to do in Malibu!

Plan Your Malibu Adventure

No matter which season calls to you, Malibu’s pristine beaches, dramatic coastline, authentic surf culture, and legendary California charm create memories that last forever. This destination perfectly balances beach relaxation with outdoor adventure and cultural experiences. Every visit reveals new discoveries and authentic coastal experiences.

Your perfect Malibu vacation home awaits. Book with AvantStay today and discover how incredible coastal getaways become when you experience Malibu’s legendary beauty, natural wonders, and Pacific Coast magic.

FAQs

Is Malibu expensive to visit?

Malibu costs significantly more during peak summer months from June through August when tourists fill every beachfront rental and oceanside restaurant. Hotels and dining establishments charge premium rates because demand stays high for perfect beach weather and water activities. But visit during shoulder seasons in spring or fall, and you’ll find excellent deals on luxury coastal homes while still enjoying comfortable weather and access to most activities.

How crowded does Malibu get?

Peak summer months bring substantial crowds, especially July and August, when beaches become busy and popular restaurants require advance reservations. However, Malibu’s 21 miles of diverse beaches provide ample space even during busy periods. Spring and fall shoulder seasons offer fewer crowds with excellent weather, while winter months provide the most peaceful coastal experiences.

When should I avoid Malibu?

There really isn’t a bad time to visit Malibu since the Mediterranean climate provides comfortable conditions year-round for different activities. Summer can be crowded for some visitors, while winter offers milder temperatures perfect for hiking and outdoor exploration. The area experiences minimal severe weather, making it a reliable destination throughout the year. The key is matching your visit to seasonal activities – come for beach fun in summer, outdoor adventures in spring and fall, or peaceful exploration in winter.

9 Family-Friendly Orlando Airbnbs with Themed Rooms & Games

Pirate ships. Princess castles. Star Wars battles. Lego Adventure. Harry Potter magic. Jurassic jungle. From themed bedrooms to over-the-top game rooms, we have compiled our kid-friendly Orlando Airbnbs that your little ones dream of. 

Orlando isn’t just the theme park capital of the world—it’s a paradise for families looking to create unforgettable memories. Coming home from a day at Walt Disney World Resort or Universal Studios Orlando Park, you can finally unwind in the comfort of your own spacious retreat.

While roller coasters and famous cartoon character meet-and-greets are a big part of your Florida experience, having a themed vacation rental packed with entertainment makes the trip even more sleek and magical. After all, why should the fun stop? Just because the sun goes down? 

Key Takeaways:

Bond over epic adventures and laugh until your sides hurt—because in this sunny paradise of Orlando, every moment is a chance to create a story worth telling and have a treasure trove of fun and relaxation.

  • Ever After
  • Shiva
  • Orlando Resort Retreat
  • Under the Sea
  • Flamingo Grove
  • Twice-as-Nice
  • Coconut Breeze
  • Shadow Mountain
  • Nassau

1. Ever After

10  Bedrooms | 22 Guests

Step into Ever After, where pop culture, gaming, and luxury create the ultimate themed getaway for families with kids. Cast spells in a Harry Potter-themed bedroom, level up in a high-tech game room, or watch Star Wars in your private theater. This Orlando retreat is packed with entertainment for all ages.

But the real showstopper is the themed bedrooms that will have your kids begging to move in!

  • Disney Princess Room – A fairytale-inspired space fit for your little princesses
  • Harry Potter Room – A Hogwarts-themed room for your aspiring teen wizard
  • Mickey Mouse Room – The iconic mouse that has captured the hearts of generations
  • Minecraft Bedroom – A blocky, pixel-perfect retreat for the young gamers in your family

Beyond the themed bedrooms, this home is packed with entertainment for the whole family. A high-tech game room, private home theater, and open-concept living areas will make the kids not want to leave!

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

2. Shiva

8 Bedrooms | 22 Guests

Big group? Bigger fun. Shiva is a Kissimmee retreat built for families and friends who came to actually vacation, with all the space to recharge between park days. With 8 bedrooms, 7 bathrooms, and a sleek, contemporary design, this private pool home keeps everyone comfortably spread out while still feeling like one big hangout.

The backyard is the showstopper here:

A private curved pool — designed for floating, splashing, and lazy afternoons

A spa-style hot tub with plenty of seating for post-park recovery

An outdoor projector screen for poolside movie nights — turn family movie night into a full backyard event under the Florida stars

Spacious deck, sun loungers, outdoor dining setup, and a BBQ grill Inside, the game room comes with ping pong for tournament nights, the kitchen is fully equipped for crowd meals, and the bedrooms are built for groups — including rooms with dual beds and bunks for the kids. It’s all the magic of Orlando without the chaos of resort crowds — just your people, your pool, and your perfect home base.

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

3. Orlando Resort Retreat

8  Bedrooms | 18 Guests

Packed with over-the-top family fun, Orlando Resort Retreat is one of the most exciting vacation rentals we’ve ever launched. With a space of 3,909 square feet, this kid-friendly vacation home is loved by families for its nonstop entertainment, relaxation, and magical memories.

There is plenty of space to relax and endless places to hang out, unwind, and enjoy time together with your family and kiddos. We transformed the garage into a glow-in-the-dark, fully themed arcade for epic gaming battles between the boys. 

Here is the list of arcade machines available: 

  • Basketball arcade game machine
  • Car racing arcade machine
  • Skee ball arcade game machine
  • Air hockey table 

The Frozen-inspired room with captivating murals of Elsa, Anna, Sven, and Olaf is an additional feature in the house that will definitely melt your kid’s heart. 

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

4. Under the Sea

6  Bedrooms | 12 Guests

Ahoy, families! Get ready to dive into adventure at Under the Sea, a whimsical retreat designed for families and young adventurers. With a fun, separate space for kids to hang out, play games, and wind down while the grown-ups relax in the main living area downstairs, this kid-friendly paradise is the perfect balance for quality or me time.

Your little dudes and royalties will feel like they’re in Bikini Bottom or Disney Castle as the themed kid’s bedrooms are the highlight of this house. 

SpongeBob SquarePants Bunk Room

This rad room is a treasure chest overflowing with color and creativity, making it a total dream come true for any SpongeBob fan.

  • Pirate ship bunk beds for your little pirates sailing the high seas – in their dreams!
  • Bright, playful under-the-water wall murals of Bikini Bottom.
  • Sailor ship and ocean-inspired details for 6d underwater adventure.

Disney Princess Room

A fairytale come true with a magical space that is sure to spark your little royals’ imagination and fill their dreams with fairy tales and happily-ever-afters.

  • Disney princesses wall mural featuring Cinderella, Aurora, and Belle.
  • Pink curtained beddings and dazzling gold tiara interior design.
  • Castle aesthetic with a chandelier that completes the regal look.

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

5. Flamingo Grove

10  Bedrooms | 26 Guests

Located in the exclusive Windsor Island Resort, just 20 minutes from Disney, Flamingo Grove is an expansive Florida retreat that’s designed for big groups, family reunions, and multi-family vacations of all ages. 

Themed bedrooms for your boys and girls and multiple entertainment spaces include a massive upstairs, complete with games and options perfect for late-night family bonding and movie marathons. The main banquet-style dining table seats create plenty of room for group meals, celebrations, and feasts.

List of games in-home: 

  • Poker table in den
  • Basketball game
  • Car racing game
  • Skee ball game
  • Air hockey duel game 
  • Connect 4 game
  • Monopoly board game

If you are booking a stay for your upcoming annual family traditions, here’s our curated guide on the best vacation rentals for family reunions.

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

6. Twice-as-Nice

8  Bedrooms | 20 Guests

Planning a family getaway to Orlando soon? Try Twice-as-Nice! One of the best vacation homes for kids in our Overmoon collection. From magical theme park days to laid-back family evenings, this spacious Orlando home has:

  • Plenty of space for family fun
  • Kid-approved pool & outdoor spa
  • Entertainment for all ages 
  • Comfortable sleeping space

With 8 spacious bedrooms and 6 bathrooms, there’s ample room for large families to spread out. Enjoy quality time together in the waters or on the lakeside patio while dining on a cool evening. While the kids are asleep, parents can finally unwind in the billiard room, enjoying some well-deserved relaxation. 

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

7. Coconut Breeze

9  Bedrooms | 25 Guests

If you’re looking for the ultimate family-friendly getaway, Coconut Breeze is a tailor-made haven for large families, comfortably accommodating up to 25 guests and ensuring a family fiesta packed with fun and unforgettable memories. 

The prime location of this Kissimmee house is near all the action, making it easy to plan your day trips to Disney, Universal, and other Orlando’s best attractions. Having access to Solara Resort’s exclusive clubhouse also grants you: 

  • Tennis
  • Basketball
  • Volleyball
  • A tiki bar
  • A surf simulator & cabana with minimal fee

Even if you stay at home, you can still experience epic adventure at our Marvel-themed arcade machines and themed rooms, where your juniors can choose from Elsa’s ice, Sheriff Woody’s story, Jurassic dinosaurs, the magical wizardry of Harry Potter, the Star Wars trilogy, or the classic Mickey Mouse. 

Not sure what house to book? You may find our 10 tips on finding the best kid-friendly vacation home handy!

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

8. Shadow Mountain

8  Bedrooms | 18 Guests

Shadow Mountain is the perfect house for playing and endless fun. Located in the exclusive ChampionsGate Resort, this kid-friendly vacation house is built to bring out the inner child in everyone.

A serious fun factory with an indoor mini-playground where kids can enjoy and play and grown-ups get to be kids again. No judgment! You and your kiddos will be hard-pressed to find a reason to leave. Don’t worry, we won’t tell anyone you spent the whole vacation in your PJs, playing video games and eating ice cream for breakfast!

If your boys are fans of adventure, the themed bedrooms in the house are something they will surely love!

  • Lego Room – A colorful, brick-inspired wonderland with twin beds
  • Marvel Room – Famous superhero murals bring the action of saving the world
  • Jungle Room – A wild room with a canopied full-size bed for safari dreams
  • Arcade Room – A paradise for your young retro gamers and for all ages

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

9. Nassau

9 Bedrooms | 22 Guests

Welcome to Nassau, where it feels like a never-ending party, with a pool that’s always calling your name and entertainment lurking around every corner. This Orlando retreat is big enough for your squad, for nonstop fun and relaxation.

With a backyard built for a good time, Nassau is about to become your new favorite playground! 

  • Poolside paradise? Check.
  • Bubbling hot tub? You got it.
  • Grill for epic family BBQs? Of course.
  • Lounge area for cocktails after a long park day? Say no more.

Whether you’re here for a dose of Disney magic, Universal thrills, or just an excuse to soak up those sun-kissed Florida vibes, gather your tribe in the game area for motorcycle racing, billiards, foosball, shuffleboard, and many more arcade games. 

Book on Airbnb

Book on AvantStay Direct (Best Price)

Related Reads:

Orlando’s Top Family-Friendly Resorts

Let’s be real—after a day of conquering roller coasters, dodging turkey legs, and tracking down your kid’s lost Mickey ears, you need a place that’s just as epic as the theme parks themselves. Here are some of the best resorts that are worth the visit; plus, you get to access (depending on the home you choose!)

Please note that some homes will require a minimal fee to access the resort. We advise thoroughly reviewing the property description first.  

Windsor Island Resort 

If theme parks had a cool cousin, it would be Windsor Island Resort. This place has everything: a lazy river, water slides, a tiki bar for the grown-ups, and an arcade for the kids who refuse to sit still. Whether you’re spiking a volleyball, lounging in a private cabana, or just letting the splash pad do the babysitting for a minute, Windsor Island makes sure everyone stays entertained.

✔ Flamingo Grove has access to Windsor Island’s lazy river, water slides, tiki bar, volleyball courts, and arcade.

Windsor at Westside Resort

Some vacations are go, go, go—but at Windsor at Westside, you can actually slow down without sacrificing fun. Float in the lazy river, sip a cocktail at the tiki bar, or let the kids loose in the arcade while you finally sit down for five minutes. Whether you’re looking for a team thrill ride or team nap in a cabana, this resort has something for everyone.

✔ Twice-as-Nice has access to Windsor at Westside’s zero-entry pool, lazy river, tiki bar, clubhouse, and arcade.

Solterra Resort

Skip the packed water parks and spend a day at Solterra Resort, where you’ll find water slides, a giant resort pool, and even private cabanas for that VIP treatment. Feeling competitive? Hit the tennis courts while the kids splash away. And when you’re ready for poolside snacks, the on-site restaurant and bar have you covered (because let’s face it—theme park food gets old real fast).

✔ Broad Oak has access to Solterra’s resort pool, water slides, fitness center, and on-site restaurant & bar.

✔ Under the Sea has full access to Solterra’s tennis courts, volleyball courts, clubhouse, and water park fun.

ChampionsGate Resort

So, you want world-class golf, resort-style pools, and a lazy river? Welcome to ChampionsGate. Designed by Greg Norman himself, this resort is a dream for golf lovers, but don’t worry—there’s plenty to do for those who don’t know a driver from a putter. Float down the lazy river, grab a drink at the tiki bar, or take the kids to the arcade while you sneak in one more round.

✔ Shadow Mountain has access to ChampionsGate’s lazy river, movie theater, tiki bar, arcade, and championship golf courses.

Solara Resort

Ever thought, “I wish I could surf on my Orlando vacation”? Well, Solara Resort heard you and delivered a wave simulator—yes, you can actually practice your surfing without ever leaving the resort. Throw in a splash pad, water slides, and a tiki bar, and you’ve got a place where the whole family can stay entertained for hours.

✔ Coconut Breeze has access to Solara’s wave simulator, splash pad, water slides, tiki bar, and sports courts.

Stay, Play, and Unwind!

Want to take a break from the theme parks? Book a themed Orlando Airbnb today that’s perfect for your family and kids!

Why Professionally Managed Vacation Rentals Beat Airbnb for Group Trips in 2026

Planning a group getaway with friends or family means you want everything to go smoothly, and the difference becomes crystal clear when comparing a professionally managed vacation rental vs. Airbnb listing run by an individual host. When you book a self-managed property, you’re relying on one person to handle everything from cleaning 10+ bedrooms between guests to answering your 2 a.m. questions about the hot tub. If something breaks during your bachelor party weekend or the place isn’t as clean as promised, you’re dealing with whoever picks up the phone. Booking with a national hospitality company built for group travel means you get one dedicated team managing every detail: spotless cleaning between stays, 24/7 guest support, rapid maintenance response, and premium amenities designed for groups. Your vacation runs smoothly because professionals handle every touchpoint.

TLDR:

  • You get 100-point cleaning checklists applied every stay vs. whatever standard an individual host chooses.
  • Professional properties feature group-friendly amenities like pickleball courts, outdoor kitchens, and multiple primary suites vs. basic furnishings.
  • 24/7 operations centers answer your questions and dispatch help immediately vs. waiting for a solo host to respond.
  • Maintenance crews arrive quickly through pre-vetted networks vs. hoping the host has a reliable handyman.
  • Leading hospitality brands manage 2,300+ properties with institutional-grade service and access through Marriott Bonvoy’s 160M+ members.

Why Centralized Management Makes Your Group Trip Better

When you’re planning a getaway for 10 people, the last thing you want is to text a host at midnight because the pool heater stopped working or the WiFi password isn’t where it’s supposed to be. With individual Airbnb hosts, you’re hoping one person has everything covered: the cleaning team, the maintenance guy, the answers to your questions. If that host is busy, out of town, or juggling five other properties, your group ends up waiting.

Professional management companies run a totally different operation. One dedicated team handles cleaning, maintenance, guest support, and property oversight. When you have a question or need help, you’re reaching a 24/7 operations center with people standing by to dispatch the right resource immediately. No waiting for someone to check their phone. No hoping the host knows a good plumber. Your group gets consistent, reliable service because professionals manage every detail.

Consistent Quality Standards across Every Group Booking

Marketplace listings follow whatever standards the individual host chooses. One property might deep-clean between stays while the next spot-cleans visible areas. Some hosts respond to maintenance issues within hours while others take days. The experience depends entirely on who owns the property.

That inconsistency creates risk. A single bad stay can wreck a bachelor party weekend or family reunion you’ve been planning for months. When you’re traveling with 8, 10, or 15 people, the stakes get higher. More guests means more opportunities for something to go wrong, and professionally managed properties that implement clear house rules deliver far better guest satisfaction because the standards don’t change from one booking to the next.

Screenshot 2026-02-25 at 7.52.06 PM.png

Professional management companies apply a 100-point cleaning checklist between every turnover. Every time. Housekeeping teams inspect bedrooms, bathrooms, kitchens, and common areas against the same standard whether it’s a quiet weekend or a 14-person reunion. You get the same level of care no matter when you book, and that reliability makes all the difference when you’re coordinating travel for a big group.

Guest Touchpoint

Professional Management

Individual Airbnb Host

Pre-Arrival Communication

Automated messages with check-in details, property guides, and concierge contact sent 3 days before arrival

Manual messages sent when host remembers, often day-of or morning-of arrival

Mid-Stay Issue Resolution

24/7 support team dispatches vetted contractors quickly through a centralized system

Host coordinates help during their available hours, contractor arrival depends on their schedule

Amenity Quality

Group-focused features like pickleball courts, outdoor kitchens, fire pits, multiple primary suites

Standard furnishings with limited investment in group-specific amenities

Post-Stay Follow-Up

Automated satisfaction surveys and loyalty program enrollment for future bookings

Occasional personal follow-up depending on host’s time and system

How Smart Pricing Benefits You as a Traveler

Here’s something most travelers don’t think about: how vacation rental pricing actually works in your favor when it’s done right. Individual Airbnb hosts set a nightly rate and maybe adjust it a few times a year around major holidays. That’s it. If you’re flexible with your dates or booking last-minute, you’re often paying the same rate as someone who booked six months ago, even though the host is desperate to fill an empty weekend.

AvantStay uses an AI-driven pricing engine called Voyage that recalculates rates every single day based on thousands of data points: local events, flight patterns, historical booking trends, and real-time availability. That system identifies between 75 and 150 micro-seasons for each property, so pricing reflects actual demand instead of a host’s best guess.

What does that mean for you? Better availability and fairer rates. During slower periods, prices drop 15 to 20% to attract bookings, so you can snag an incredible deal if you’re willing to travel during off-peak windows. During high-demand weekends, rates go up, but properties stay available longer because pricing adjusts to match what the market will actually pay. Larger homes often see greater pricing movement because group travel demand tends to fluctuate more than couple-focused bookings.

Group-Optimized Property Design and Amenity Investment

Screenshot 2026-02-25 at 7.52.56 PM.png

Group properties require different infrastructure than couple-focused rentals. A four-bedroom home sleeping eight needs multiple full bathrooms, dining capacity for the entire party, and common areas that prevent crowding. Individual hosts rarely possess the capital or design expertise to execute these upgrades at revenue-driving quality.

Professional management companies invest in interior design that turns properties into group destinations. This includes installing pickleball courts, outdoor kitchens, fire pits, bocce ball setups, and multiple primary suites so guests aren’t competing for the best bedroom. These experiential features boost both average daily rates and appeal to high-value segments like corporate retreats and wedding parties.

Most individual property owners can’t fund complete transformations or hire design teams. Professional managers spread investment across portfolios, delivering institutional-grade upgrades that solo hosts can’t match.

Compliance, Permitting, and Regulatory Navigation

Short-term rental regulations change constantly. Cities add permit caps. HOAs restrict occupancy. Tax codes shift. Noise ordinances tighten. Airbnb hosts track these rules themselves, often learning about violations only after receiving fines or cease-and-desist letters.

Professional management companies maintain dedicated compliance teams that monitor regulations across the jurisdictions where they operate. They handle business license applications, tax registration, permit renewals, and HOA communications so properties always operate legally. When staffing pressures challenge property managers in 2026, having experts who handle regulatory navigation protects properties from costly shutdowns and keeps them generating revenue without interruption.

How Operations Infrastructure Delivers Better Guest Service

When you’re staying at a professionally managed property with 10 of your closest friends, you want help when you need it. Not in an hour, not tomorrow morning, but right now. That level of responsiveness only happens when there’s real infrastructure behind your booking. Individual Airbnb hosts operate solo, juggling multiple properties and hoping nothing breaks during your stay. When something does go wrong, they’re scrambling to find someone who can help.

Professional management companies deploy local field staff in every market who coordinate everything from turnovers to mid-stay requests. When you text about a maintenance issue, your request routes automatically to pre-vetted crews who can respond quickly instead of leaving you waiting. Need a private chef for your group dinner? Want the fridge stocked before you arrive? Those requests go straight to the right people without you playing phone tag with a busy host. Smart locks, NoiseAware monitoring, and Ring cameras help operations teams respond quickly when issues arise, keeping your vacation smooth from check-in to checkout.

Guest-Facing Technology That Makes Group Travel Easy

Coordinating a group trip means you’re already juggling plenty. Who’s driving? Who’s bringing what? When’s everyone arriving? The last thing you need is confusion about check-in or hunting for the property manual when someone can’t figure out the smart TV. Professional hospitality companies build guest-facing technology that keeps everything in one place and makes your stay run smoothly.

With AvantStay’s Butler app, you get your entire trip at your fingertips. Check-in instructions appear three days before arrival. Property manuals walk you through every amenity. Need mid-stay cleaning or want to book a private chef? Request it in-app and the team handles it. Questions about the hot tub at 11 p.m.? Text through the app and reach someone immediately. No digging through email chains. No saved phone numbers. No waiting for a host to respond when they’re available.

That level of service turns a good group trip into an amazing one. Instead of one person becoming the unofficial trip coordinator who handles every question and problem, everyone in your group can access what they need instantly. Your vacation stays fun because the technology and the team behind it handle the details.

AvantStay’s Vertically Integrated Approach to Group Travel Properties

Avantstay.png

We built AvantStay to solve the fragmentation problem that group property owners face. Our 2,300+ properties across 65+ markets share one operations backbone: the Voyage pricing engine recalculating micro-seasons daily, Lighthouse dashboards surfacing real-time revenue and occupancy data, field teams executing 100-point cleaning checklists, and design specialists turning homes into group destinations that command premium rates.

That vertical integration delivers distribution advantages solo hosts can’t access. Our partnerships with Marriott Bonvoy and Capital One Travel place your property in front of 160 million loyalty members and premium cardholders actively searching for group accommodations. Direct booking through the Butler app bypasses OTA commission pressure while maintaining Superhost and PremierHost status across marketplace channels.

For owners managing $5 billion in assets under our care, the value proposition remains consistent: one partner accountable for every guest interaction, every pricing decision, and every dollar of revenue your group property generates.

FAQs

Why should I choose a professionally managed rental for my group trip instead of booking an Airbnb?

When you’re coordinating travel for 8 or 10 people, you need everything to work perfectly, and professional management delivers that reliability. With an individual Airbnb host, you’re depending on one person to handle cleaning, answer questions, and fix problems. If that host is unavailable or overwhelmed, your group suffers. Professionally managed properties give you 24/7 support teams, consistent cleaning standards applied to every stay, and rapid maintenance response through pre-vetted crews. You’re not hoping the host picks up your call at midnight. You’re getting institutional-grade service built for group travel.

What makes the guest experience better with professional management versus individual hosts?

The difference shows up in every touchpoint of your stay. Professionally managed properties feature premium group amenities like pickleball courts, outdoor kitchens, and multiple primary suites because management companies invest in design upgrades that individual hosts can’t afford. You get spotless turnovers inspected against 100-point checklists instead of hoping the host’s cleaning crew did a thorough job. Guest-facing apps give you check-in instructions, property manuals, and direct messaging to support teams instead of texting someone’s personal phone. When something breaks or you need help, professional teams dispatch resources immediately instead of waiting for one busy person to coordinate contractors.

How do I know I’m getting quality when booking a professionally managed property?

Look for properties managed by proven hospitality companies with large portfolios and transparent review systems. Companies managing hundreds or thousands of properties maintain consistent standards because their reputation depends on every guest having a great experience. Check review scores across platforms like Trustpilot and Airbnb. Professional managers typically maintain 4.5+ star ratings because they apply the same cleaning checklists, support protocols, and maintenance standards to every property. You can also look for partnerships with major brands like Marriott Bonvoy, which only work with managers who meet institutional hospitality standards. If a property is part of a professionally managed portfolio with strong reviews and legitimate brand partnerships, you’re getting verifiable quality.

Final Thoughts about Managed Vacation Rentals Beating Airbnb for Group Trips

Planning a getaway for your closest friends or family should feel exciting, not stressful, and when weighing a professionally managed vacation rental vs. Airbnb group trip, the real difference comes down to reliability, support, and peace of mind. With AvantStay’s 2,300+ professionally managed homes across 65+ markets, your group gets thoughtfully designed spaces with the amenities large gatherings love, detailed cleaning protocols so you arrive to a pristine property, and 24/7 support teams ready to help if anything comes up during your stay. Add in curated experiences, premium features like outdoor kitchens and multiple primary suites, and partnerships that let you earn travel rewards, and you have a group vacation built around comfort and confidence. When your trip has been on the calendar for months, choosing a professionally managed home means you can focus on making memories together instead of worrying about what might go wrong.

Nashville vs. Scottsdale for Bachelorette Rentals: Which Market is Better in 2026?

Your group chat is debating Nashville versus Scottsdale for the bachelorette weekend, and the answer depends on whether you want honky-tonks or poolside cabanas. These cities operate on opposite seasonal calendars, deliver wildly different nightlife vibes, and stretch your budget in completely different directions. Nashville keeps costs lower with walkable Broadway bars while Scottsdale spreads out across desert estates with private pools. Let’s break down the real differences so you can pick the destination that actually fits your crew’s style and travel window.

TLDR:

  • Nashville favors groups who want walkable nightlife and live music until 3 a.m.; Scottsdale suits pool parties and desert activities.
  • Nashville peaks spring and fall; Scottsdale shines October through April when temps stay in the 70s-80s.
  • Scottsdale costs more for drinks and dining but offers larger estate homes with private pools.
  • AvantStay manages properties in both cities with 24/7 Butler app support and consistent quality standards.

Factor

Nashville

Scottsdale

Nightlife Vibe

Honky-tonks, live music, bars until 3 a.m., rowdy and high-energy

Pool clubs, upscale lounges, earlier nights, polished and sophisticated

Best Season

Spring (April-May) and Fall (September-October)

October through April (70s-80s)

Drink Prices

$6 beers, affordable bars

$15+ cocktails, bottle service common

Walkability

High – Broadway bars within 4 blocks

Low – attractions spread across miles

Daytime Activities

Food tours, music venues, murals, Southern culture

Desert hikes, ATV tours, spa treatments, pool parties

Accommodation Style

Urban homes near downtown, compact footprint

Large estates with private pools, more space per dollar

Transportation Needs

Optional – walkable if near Broadway

Required – rideshares or rental car necessary

Aesthetic

Country-glam, cowboy boots, neon lights, unfiltered fun

Desert chic, poolside sophistication, Instagram-curated

Nightlife and Entertainment: Which City Parties Harder

When you’re planning a bachelorette weekend, the nightlife can make or break the trip. Both cities deliver high-energy party scenes, but the vibe couldn’t be more different.

Nashville: Honky-Tonks and Live Music

Nashville’s nightlife centers on Broadway’s honky-tonk corridor, where you can bar-hop without leaving a four-block radius. Live bands play free shows from morning until 3 a.m., and the party spills onto the street. Pedal taverns cruise past neon-lit storefronts while bachelorette groups crowd rooftop bars like L.A. Jackson and The Valentine. The energy runs high-volume and unapologetically country, with line dancing and whiskey shots as standard currency.

Scottsdale: Poolside Lounges and Desert Chic

Scottsdale takes a more polished approach. Old Town’s bar scene offers everything from cowboy bars to upscale cocktail lounges, but the real draw is the day-club culture. Pool parties at Maya Day + Nightclub and rooftop experiences dominate summer weekends. The dress code skews sophisticated, and bottle service is common. Nights wind down earlier here compared to Nashville, but daytime pool parties can run until sunset.

Weather and Seasonality: Timing Your Bachelorette Party

Picking the right dates can save your bachelorette party from weather disasters. The two cities operate on opposite seasonal calendars, which gives you flexibility depending on when you’re ready to book.

Nashville sees temperatures from 31°F to 90°F year-round, with summers turning hot and humid. Spring (April through May) and fall (September through October) offer mild temps, lower humidity, and outdoor patios that stay comfortable past midnight. Winter can dip below freezing, but the honky-tonks stay packed.

Scottsdale flips the script entirely. Summer temperatures climb to 106°F with bone-dry heat that makes pool time non-negotiable. The ideal window runs October through April, when sunny days hover in the 70s and 80s.

Rain matters too. Nashville gets frequent summer thunderstorms that can derail rooftop bar plans. Scottsdale stays reliably dry, making outdoor activities safer year-round.

Cost Breakdown: Where Your Dollar Goes Further

Your budget will stretch differently depending on which desert or music city you pick. The cost gap shows up fast once you break down the major expenses.

Accommodations tend to run pricier in Scottsdale during peak season (January through April), when demand from snowbirds and spring breakers pushes rates higher. Nashville stays more consistent year-round, though CMA Fest and NFL weekends spike prices. Per-person costs balance out when you split a large vacation rental among eight or more guests.

Dining and drinks favor Nashville. You’ll find $6 beers on Broadway and affordable Southern food that feeds a crowd. Scottsdale leans upscale, with cocktails routinely hitting $15 and dinner reservations commanding premium tabs. Pool clubs charge entry fees and expect bottle service.

Transportation costs less in Nashville if you stay near Broadway. Scottsdale sprawls, so rideshares between Old Town, resorts, and hiking spots add up quickly. Both cities offer affordable flights from major hubs.

Activities and Experiences: Beyond the Bars

A great bachelorette party needs more than just bar crawls. Both cities pack their daylight hours with group-friendly activities that let you bond before the night begins.

Nashville: Food, Music, and Southern Culture

Nashville built its reputation on music, but the daytime scene offers variety beyond Broadway. Food tours through the Gulch and East Nashville give your group a taste of hot chicken, biscuits, and craft breweries. The Parthenon in Centennial Park makes for photo ops, and mural hunting in 12South keeps Instagram feeds busy. Live music doesn’t stop when the sun comes up, with the Grand Ole Opry offering matinee shows.

Scottsdale: Desert Adventure and Wellness

Scottsdale leans into outdoor experiences and self-care. ATV tours through the Sonoran Desert and guided hikes up Camelback Mountain appeal to active groups. Spa culture runs deep here, with most resorts offering group packages with massages, facials, and poolside service. Day clubs blur the line between relaxation and party, with DJs spinning while you float in cabanas.

Accommodations: Vacation Rental Inventory in Both Markets

The rental landscape differs between these two markets based on local demand and property types. Nashville sees over 30,000 bachelorette parties annually, which has shaped its accommodation options to favor group bookings.

Nashville offers a mix of large vacation homes in neighborhoods like The Gulch and Germantown, plus boutique hotel options. Multi-bedroom houses with proximity to Broadway command premium rates during peak weekends. Inventory leans toward urban convenience over sprawling outdoor space.

Scottsdale’s rental market centers on large estate homes with private pools in Paradise Valley, Carefree, and Cave Creek. Properties here prioritize outdoor living with resort-style amenities. You’ll find more space per dollar compared to Nashville’s compact urban footprint, but locations spread across wider distances.

Group size drives your best option. Parties of 8-12 work well in either market. Groups over 16 fare better in Scottsdale’s larger estates.

Accessibility and Travel Logistics for Groups

Getting your group to the party matters just as much as the party itself. Both cities offer major airport access, but the ground game plays out differently.

Nashville International Airport sits 15 minutes from downtown. Direct flights connect from most U.S. cities, and rideshares to Broadway run $25-35. Once you arrive, walkability wins if you stay near the action. Most honky-tonks cluster within stumbling distance of each other.

Phoenix Sky Harbor Airport serves Scottsdale, located 20-30 minutes away depending on traffic. Flight options match Nashville’s connectivity, but ground transportation costs more. Rideshares to Old Town average $40-50, and you’ll need wheels throughout your stay since attractions spread across miles.

Nashville works better for groups who want to ditch rental cars. Scottsdale requires transportation planning, but the tradeoff brings private pool access back at your rental.

Vibe and Aesthetic: Matching Your Party Style

Nashville delivers country-glam energy with cowboy boots, fringe jackets, and neon-lit backdrops. The aesthetic runs high-volume and unfiltered. Think pedal taverns, matching white cowboy hats, and group shots on Broadway with live music spilling into the street behind you. The vibe celebrates loud, rowdy fun without pretense, and the party never apologizes for taking up space.

Scottsdale skews polished and Instagram-curated. Desert sunsets, poolside cabanas, and mid-century architecture create a sophisticated backdrop. The aesthetic favors flowy dresses, oversized sunglasses, and champagne glasses against mountain views. Pool floats and flower crowns replace cowboy hats. The energy runs aspirational rather than rowdy, with wellness brunches balancing late-night cocktails.

Your group’s personality decides the winner. If matching sequined boots and karaoke sound like your ideal Friday night, Nashville delivers. If you’d rather lounge poolside in designer swimwear with a charcuterie board, Scottsdale fits better.

Planning for Premium Group Travel with AvantStay

We manage properties in both Nashville and Scottsdale, so you can skip the endless scroll through unreliable listings. Every home in our collection meets the same standards: award-winning interiors, rigorous cleaning protocols, and around-the-clock support through the Butler app.

Our Nashville portfolio includes homes near Broadway plus The Gilmore, our boutique hotel property. Scottsdale options focus on spacious estate homes with private pools in Paradise Valley and Cave Creek. Both locations offer group-friendly layouts with multiple primary suites, entertainment areas, and fully equipped kitchens.

The Butler app handles requests from early check-in to private chef bookings. Coordinate bedroom assignments with your crew before arrival, schedule mid-stay cleanings, or add services like grocery stocking without chasing down hosts.

Pick honky-tonks or pool parties. The quality stays the same: identical concierge access, design standards, and guest support.

Final Thoughts on Nashville vs Scottsdale Bachelorette Trips

You can’t go wrong with either destination when you know what your group wants out of the weekend. A Nashville or Scottsdale bachelorette party creates completely different experiences, from honky-tonk hopping to desert spa days. Stop overthinking the perfect choice. Match the city to your vibe, book a place everyone can spread out in, and let the weekend unfold.

FAQ

What’s the best time of year to book a bachelorette rental in Nashville vs. Scottsdale?

Nashville works best in spring (April-May) and fall (September-October) when temperatures stay mild and humidity drops, while Scottsdale shines October through April when temps hover in the 70s-80s—summer heat in Scottsdale reaches 106°F and makes indoor spaces necessary.

How far in advance should I book a bachelorette rental in these cities?

Book at least 60 days ahead to qualify for full refund protection under standard cancellation policies, and plan even earlier if your dates fall during peak periods like CMA Fest in Nashville or January-April in Scottsdale when demand from snowbirds and spring breakers drives prices up.

Can I split payment among my group when booking through AvantStay?

Yes, the Butler app lets you share your reservation so group members can reserve individual bedrooms, and we offer split-payment options plus Affirm installment plans so you can book now and pay later without putting the full cost on one person.

Do I need a rental car for a bachelorette party in Nashville or Scottsdale?

Nashville’s honky-tonk corridor sits within walking distance if you stay near Broadway, making rental cars optional, but Scottsdale spreads across miles between Old Town, hiking spots, and resort areas—you’ll need rideshares or a rental car to get around.

What services can I add to my bachelorette rental through AvantStay?

Request private chefs, grocery stocking, mid-stay cleaning, in-home massage, fridge prep, and curated local experiences (wine tastings, guided hikes) directly through the Butler app—available 24/7 without chasing down property hosts.

The Ultimate San Diego Bachelorette House Rental Guide for Large Groups in 2026

When you’re planning a bachelorette weekend for 10 people, hotel booking feels like a lose-lose situation. Pay $400 per room and you’re looking at $2,000 nightly for separate spaces that force half your group to sit on floors during gift exchanges, or try cramming everyone into fewer rooms and deal with bathroom wars that ruin the vibe before you even leave for dinner. San Diego beachside bachelorette house rentals give you something hotels can’t: multiple ensuite bedrooms where everyone has space, kitchens that become natural gathering spots for morning coffee and charcuterie assembly, and pools where the celebration flows from noon mimosas to midnight hangs without elevator rides killing momentum. The math shifts completely when you split a beach house among your crew, dropping costs to $300 per person while adding all the shared spaces that turn a weekend into an actual experience instead of just coordinated hotel stays.

TLDR:

  • San Diego beach houses split 10 ways cost $300/person vs $800/person for hotel rooms
  • Professionally managed rentals include 24/7 support, verified amenities, and TOT compliance
  • Pacific Beach offers walkable nightlife; La Jolla brings upscale dining and dramatic cliffs
  • Multiple ensuite bedrooms and outdoor spaces turn rentals into private bachelorette resorts
  • AvantStay manages 2,300+ properties with 4.83/5 rating and services like private chefs

Why San Diego Is the Perfect Bachelorette Destination for Large Groups

San Diego’s 70 miles of coastline and year-round temperate weather create an unbeatable backdrop for bachelorette celebrations. While most destinations force you to choose between beach access and city amenities, San Diego delivers both without the hassle of international travel or the high-maintenance vibe of Los Angeles.

The numbers back up San Diego’s appeal for group celebrations. Most bachelorette parties include 8-12 guests, and San Diego’s inventory of large beachside homes was practically built for this group size. You get multiple bedroom suites so everyone has space, shared living areas large enough for the whole crew, and outdoor zones where half the group can lounge poolside while others prep for dinner.

The city’s diverse beach neighborhoods mean you can tailor the vibe to your group’s personality. Want laid-back surf town energy? Head north. Prefer walkable nightlife and restaurants? Stay central. Each neighborhood offers distinct character while keeping you steps from the water.

The Large Group Advantage: Why House Rentals Beat Hotels for Bachelorette Parties

The math alone makes house rentals a no-brainer for bachelorette parties. Split a $3,000-per-night, six-bedroom beach house among 10 guests and you’re paying $300 per person. Book five hotel rooms at $400 each and you’re looking at $800 per person for less space and zero communal areas. That price gap only widens when you factor in kitchen savings from group breakfasts and pre-game cocktails.

Large homes experienced 12.61% booking growth year-over-year because groups realized hotel hallways kill the party vibe. When you rent a house, the bachelorette experience starts the moment you walk in. Everyone gathers in the kitchen while mimosas get poured. Someone claims the outdoor couch. The bride opens gifts by the pool instead of a cramped hotel room where half the group sits on the floor.

Shared spaces turn a rental into your private resort. Picture your crew around an oversized dining table for a catered dinner, then moving to the fire pit for games without worrying about noise complaints or last call.

San Diego’s Top Beachside Neighborhoods for Bachelorette House Rentals

Neighborhood

Best For

Walkability

Nightlife Scene

Dining Style

Beach Type

Pacific Beach

Groups wanting high-energy nightlife and bar hopping without cars

Highly walkable with bars, restaurants, and beach access on Garnet Avenue

Rooftop bars, late-night venues, and spontaneous 2 a.m. options

Casual beachfront spots and taco shops

Wide sandy beach with active surf scene

Mission Beach

Groups seeking boardwalk charm with bay and ocean access

Three-mile boardwalk with minimal car traffic, ideal for bikes and walks

Live music at beachfront venues with more laid-back energy

Boardwalk casual with vintage amusement park backdrop

Narrow strip between bay and ocean, calm bay waters for paddleboarding

La Jolla

Groups prioritizing upscale experiences, spa days, and refined atmosphere

Boutique shopping and ocean-view restaurants in The Village

Sunset cocktails at upscale venues, minimal late-night club scene

Upscale dining with champagne brunches and dressy-casual dress codes

Dramatic cliffs, protected coves, and sea lion colonies

Pacific Beach

Pacific Beach delivers high-energy bachelorette vibes with bars, restaurants, and beach access within walking distance. Garnet Avenue runs through the heart of the neighborhood, lined with rooftop bars and late-night taco spots that keep the party going after sunset. Groups who want to bar-hop without designated drivers or spontaneous 2 a.m. pizza runs thrive here.

Mission Beach

Mission Beach offers a more intimate boardwalk experience with Belmont Park’s vintage roller coaster as your backdrop. The narrow strip between the bay and ocean creates a resort-town feel where you can paddleboard in calm bay waters by day and catch live music at beachfront venues by night. The boardwalk stretches three miles with minimal car traffic, perfect for morning coffee walks or bike rides between activities.

La Jolla

La Jolla brings upscale coastal elegance with dramatic cliffs, sea lion colonies, and refined dining. This neighborhood suits groups prioritizing spa days, champagne brunches, and Instagram-worthy cove backdrops over late-night club scenes. The Village offers boutique shopping and sunset cocktails at ocean-view restaurants where dress codes lean dressy-casual.

What Makes a House Rental Truly Bachelorette-Ready

Bachelorette-ready properties go beyond bedroom count. The right rental turns your group’s downtime into an experience worth planning the weekend around.

Multiple ensuite bedrooms solve the bathroom traffic jam that ruins morning routines. When each person or pair gets their own bathroom, no one’s waiting in towels while someone else finishes makeup. Look for homes with several primary suites rather than one master and a bunch of twins.

Outdoor entertaining space matters more than square footage. A pool with a lounging deck, outdoor dining table, and fire pit creates natural gathering zones where conversations split organically. Half your group can float with drinks while others grill dinner.

Chef’s kitchens with oversized islands become the heart of bachelorette houses. Your group will gravitate here for morning coffee, charcuterie board assembly, and pre-dinner cocktail mixing.

Design that photographs well creates natural backdrops for group photos that don’t require scouting locations or perfect timing.

The Managed Rental Difference: Why Professional Management Matters

Owner-operated vacation rentals create risks you can’t take during a bachelorette weekend. The host disappears Thursday evening. The cleaner cancels last minute. The hot tub from the listing photos stopped working months ago. When you’re managing flights and schedules for 10 guests, these problems destroy the entire experience.

The vacation rental market projects $135.23B by 2032, fueled by travelers selecting professionally managed properties over individual hosts. Airbnb management services operate 24/7 support teams who respond within minutes, not whenever the owner checks messages between meetings.

Managed rentals follow standardized cleaning protocols between each stay with quarterly inspections. You walk into fresh linens in every bedroom, stocked bathrooms, and kitchens ready for your group’s first meal. Owner-operated properties depend on whoever the host hired recently.

Verified amenities guarantee the six-burner range, outdoor sound system, and pool heater you reserved actually function at check-in. Managed properties test features before arrival and maintain backup solutions when equipment breaks.

Booking protection becomes critical for celebration weekends where 10 people purchased plane tickets. Professional management companies can’t ghost you or suddenly cancel because their relative wants the house.

San Diego Short-Term Rental Regulations Explained

San Diego requires Transient Occupancy Tax (TOT) registration and permits for all short-term rentals under 30 days. The city enforces occupancy limits, noise ordinances, and parking restrictions that vary by neighborhood. Certain coastal zones have additional restrictions on vacation rentals, particularly in residential areas where neighbors monitor compliance closely.

Managed rental companies handle the entire regulatory burden. They maintain current permits, collect and remit TOT automatically, and monitor local ordinance changes that affect guest stays. When you book through professional managers, the property already meets all legal requirements before it appears in their inventory.

Self-managed listings create risk for guests who arrive to find the rental operates without proper licensing. San Diego can shut down illegal rentals mid-stay, leaving your group scrambling for last-minute accommodations during peak weekend rates. Professional management also means responsible occupancy monitoring and noise control that keep neighbors happy and properties compliant.

Planning Your San Diego Bachelorette Itinerary Around Your Rental

Your rental becomes the anchor for your entire weekend when you plan activities around it rather than treating it as just a place to crash. Start mornings with yoga by the pool or coffee on the patio before anyone needs to be camera-ready. These relaxed starts create bonding moments that rushed hotel lobby meetups simply can’t replicate.

Block out afternoon getting-ready time at the house. Spread makeup across bathroom counters, blast music through the living room, and pour champagne while everyone rotates through showers. This pre-party session often becomes the weekend’s most memorable part because the energy builds naturally without time pressure or space constraints.

Late-night wind-downs by the fire pit or pool extend the celebration after bars close, with no elevator rides or lobby walks to interrupt the fun.

Cost Considerations: Budgeting for Large Group Beach House Rentals

Average bachelorette party attendees spend $1,300 per person, with lodging and flights each climbing 15% since 2019. San Diego beach house rentals help you maximize that budget by consolidating expenses that hotels charge for separately.

Hotels charge per room, but hidden costs add up fast. Daily parking fees run $30 to $50 per car. Resort fees tack on another $25 to $40 per room per night. Pool cabana rentals cost $150 to $300 for a few hours. A beach house includes parking for multiple vehicles, private pool access, and outdoor spaces without additional fees.

Kitchen access cuts food costs when you’re feeding a group. Breakfast for 10 at a beachfront restaurant costs $250 to $350 with tip. Stock the rental kitchen with bagels, fruit, and coffee for under $50.

Split costs fairly by dividing the nightly rate by guest count for shared spaces, then adjusting for bedroom preferences. Someone taking a primary suite might pay slightly more than guests doubling up.

How AvantStay Enhances the San Diego Bachelorette Experience

We manage every detail of your bachelorette celebration so you can focus on the fun. Our San Diego collection features beachside properties in Point Loma, La Jolla, and Pacific Beach built for large groups, with multiple primary suites that give everyone private space and bathrooms.

The Butler app delivers 24/7 support alongside services that transform your rental into a complete experience. Book private chef dinners, pre-arrival fridge stocking, or mid-stay cleaning without stepping away from the celebration. Our 4.83/5 rating across 10,000+ verified stays reflects what happens when award-winning design meets attentive management.

We own the entire operation, giving you verified amenities, instant support, and homes maintained to hospitality standards that match your celebration.

Final Thoughts on Group House Rentals for Bachelorette Parties

The right managed house rental in San Diego changes how your bachelorette weekend actually feels. Instead of coordinating between hotel rooms or dealing with noise complaints, your group gets a private space where the celebration flows naturally from morning coffee to late-night fire pit hangs. You’re investing in the experience, not just a place to crash between activities.

FAQ

How many bedrooms should I look for when renting a San Diego beach house for a bachelorette party?

For the typical bachelorette group of 8 to 12 guests, aim for at least 5 to 6 bedrooms with multiple ensuite bathrooms to avoid morning traffic jams and give everyone comfortable private space.

What’s the real cost difference between renting a beach house versus booking hotel rooms for a large group?

A $3,000-per-night beach house split among 10 guests costs $300 per person, while five hotel rooms at $400 each run $800 per person—and that’s before hidden hotel fees like parking ($30-$50/day), resort charges ($25-$40/room/night), and no shared kitchen to save on meals.

Why does professional management matter more for bachelorette weekends than regular vacations?

When 10 guests have booked flights around your rental dates, you can’t risk hosts ghosting, cleaners canceling, or broken amenities ruining the celebration—managed properties provide 24/7 support, verified working amenities, and booking protection that owner-operated rentals don’t guarantee.

Can I book services like private chefs or grocery stocking through AvantStay for my San Diego rental?

Yes, the Butler app connects you directly to private chef dinners, pre-arrival fridge stocking, mid-stay cleaning, and other concierge services so you can arrange everything without leaving your celebration to coordinate logistics.